AirVision Transition Training Quick Reference Manual Version 3.1

AirVision Transition Training
Quick Reference Manual
Version 3.1 build 9
1
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Installation …
…
1.1 New Installation …
1.2 Upgrade Installation
…
…
…
Page
…
…
…
…
…
…
Chapter 2 EDAS Ambient Conversion
…
…
…
…
…
…5
…6
…15
…
…
…19
Chapter 3 General Information …
…
…
3.1 Requirements for An AirVision PC …
3.2 Requirements for Running AirVision
3.3 Filtering Buttons in Editors and Reports
3.4 Editing and Saving …
…
…
3.5 Macro Buttons in Reports …
…
3.6 Hidden Features …
…
…
3.7 Help and Support …
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…22
...22
…22
…23
…25
…27
…29
…29
Chapter 4 Configuration …
…
…
4.1 Parameter Template Editor …
4.2 Site / Parameter …
…
4.3 Unit Editor …
…
…
4.4 Math Editors …
…
…
4.5 GSI & Modbus Drivers
…
4.6 Data Source Details …
…
4.7 AQI Program Editor …
…
4.8 Violation of Standards Editor
4.9 Wind Rose Levels Editor
…
4.10 AIRNow FTP Setup …
…
4.11 Frequency Distribution Editor
4.12 Email Alarm Trigger Editor …
4.13 E-Mail Notification Subscriptions
4.14 Server Configuration
…
4.15 Modem Types
…
…
4.16 Task Scheduler
…
…
4.17 Report Logo Editor …
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…31
…31
…35
…42
…43
…48
…52
…84
…89
…91
…93
…95
…97
…99
…101
…114
…116
…131
Chapter 5 Communication
5.1 Linking to Logger
5.2 Logger Download
5.3 Manual Poll …
5.4 Task Status …
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…132
…132
…134
…137
…139
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…142
…142
…144
…158
…162
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
Chapter 6 Data Editors …
…
…
6.1 Query Usage for All Data Editors
6.2 Average Data Editor …
…
6.3 Batch Reading Updater
…
6.4 Purging Data …
…
…
2
6.5 Sample Data Editor …
6.6 Flags Editor …
…
6.7 Calibration Data Editor
6.8 Calibration Adjust Tool
6.9 Cal Expected Values
6.10 Forecast Editor
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…166
…175
…177
…179
…183
…184
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…185
…185
…187
…192
…194
…195
…198
Chapter 8 Reports
…
…
…
…
8.1 Query Usage for All Reports
…
8.2 Daily Summary Report
…
…
8.3 Data With Flags Report
…
…
8.4 Daily Parameter Report
…
…
8.5 Monthly Report
…
…
…
8.6 8 Hour Rolling Average Report
…
8.7 24 Hour Average Summary Report …
8.8 Logger Reports
…
…
…
8.9 Calibration Reports …
…
…
8.10 AIRNow Report …
…
…
8.11 AQI Reports …
…
…
…
8.12 AQS Report …
…
…
…
8.13 AIRNow CSV Text Report (AQCSV) …
8.14 Violation of Standards
…
…
8.15 Met Reports
…
…
…
8.16 Statistical Reports …
…
…
8.17 Sample Data Reports
…
…
8.18 Annotations Report
…
…
8.19 Audit Trail Report …
…
…
8.20 Configuration Reports
…
…
8.21 Cumulative Report
…
…
8.22 Basic Data Export …
…
…
8.23 Average Data Graph Report
…
8.24 Site Health Report …
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…199
…199
…200
…203
…204
…205
…208
…209
…210
…214
…220
…221
…226
…229
…230
…231
…235
…248
…252
…253
…254
…267
…268
…269
…270
Chapter 7 Logs …
…
…
7.1 Log Viewer …
…
7.2 Internal Reports
…
7.3 Purge Journal Messages
7.4 Audit Table Enable Tool
7.5 LogBook Entry Editor
7.6 LogBook Report
…
Chapter 9 Additional Modules …
…
…
…
…
9.1 Favorites Editor
…
…
…
…
…
9.2 Server Restart
…
…
…
…
…
9.3 SQL Execution Tool ...
…
…
…
…
9.4 AQS Import Tools …
…
…
…
…
9.5 Database Export …
…
…
…
…
9.6 Creating the CLAIRE Files to Update the CLAIRE System
…272
…272
...275
…276
…278
…279
…280
3
Chapter 10 Security
…
...
…
…
…
…
…285
Chapter 11 Quick Reference
…
…
…
…
…
…290
Chapter 12 Troubleshooting
…
…
…
…
…
…296
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…302
…302
…307
…311
…315
…324
…329
…332
…333
…346
…350
…352
…368
…379
…381
…383
…392
…394
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…395
…395
…402
…405
Chapter 13 Optional Modules …
…
13.1 Math Editors
…
…
13.2 Calibration Adjust Tool
…
13.3 Data Average Tag Rollup Editor
13.4 Sync …
…
…
…
13.5 Status Displays
…
…
13.6 File Import Configuration …
13.7 File Import Tool …
…
13.8 Instrument Polling Setup …
13.9 PARS Module
…
…
13.10 PARS Reports
…
…
13.11 Monitor Assessment
…
13.12 Monitor Assessment Reports
13.13 Asset Tracking Tool
…
13.14 Asset Reports
…
…
13.15 ADVP Editor
…
…
13.16 Work Item Editor …
…
13.17 Work Items
…
…
Chapter 14 SQL Server …
…
…
…
14.1 Installing SQL Server 2008 …
…
14.2 Backing up the Database in SQL 2008
14.3 Restoring the Database in SQL 2008 …
4
Chapter 1: Installation Instructions
AirVision is required to be installed on Windows 7 or 8, Server 2008R2 or 2012 with a recommended
8GB of RAM, under the administrative login of the system, with 500GB hard drive minimum with Intel 5
processor, but Intel 7 is recommended.
First, make sure .NET version 3.5sp1 with service packs and .NET version 4.0 are installed for AirVision to
be able to function. Second make sure 2008R2 of SQL Server Standard, Workgroup, Enterprise, or SQL
Express is installed along with any available service packs. Where SQL Express with a limit of 10GB will
work for a very small amount of configuration and data, we strongly suggest installing SQL Server
Standard or SQL Server Workgroup to allow for a large capacity of configuration and/or data is being
stored. If the server and the client are going to be installed on separate pc’s, be sure to install SQL
Server and create the database on the actual server pc.
NOTE: SQL 2012 or 2014 can be used, but the default security settings can alter the installation steps.
By default, when the database is created, SYSTEM does not have privileges to a database, and they
have to explicitly be added in SQL. To do this open the SQL Management Studio and click Connect.
Expand Security then Logins. Double click on NT AUTHORITY\SYSTEM to open the Login Properties
screen. Click User Mapping; in the Users mapped to this login: section at the top, put a check in the box
beside of AVData. In the Database role membership for: AVData section at the bottom, put a check in
the box beside of db_owner and public. Click the OK button at the bottom. From SQL’s main menu at
the top select File and Save All. Close the SQL Management Studio.
5
1.1 New Installation
Copy the AVTrend_*.*.*.bak file that you downloaded into the SQL Backup folder. Which is usually
located in C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\Backup.
When installing AirVision for the first time a blank database will need to be created in SQL Server or
SQL Express called AVData. Open SQL Server Management Studio | right click on Databases and select
New Database | under the General page selection, on the right side of the screen in the Database name
field type in AVData | select the Options page selection on the left listed under General | click the down
arrow in the Collation field and select SQL_Latin1_General_CP1_CI_AS | click the down arrow in the
Recovery model field and select Simple |Click OK at the bottom | expand Databases | click once to
highlight the AVData database, leaving the SQL Management Studio open.
The database structure will need to be created first before it can be used by the software. Expand
Databases on the left and right click on the AVData database and select Tasks | Restore |Database. This
will open a screen titled Restore Database – AVData. Under the Select a page section on the left side of
the screen select General.
Under Destination for restore on the right side of the screen the To database field should be defaulted
to AVData. The To a point in time field should be grayed out, but defaulted to Most recent possible.
Both of these fields need to remain using their default settings.
Under the Source for restore section on the right side of the screen the From database field should be
grayed out, but defaulted to AVData. This field needs to remain using its default setting. The From
device field needs to be selected but it will remain grayed out with a blank field. Click the ellipses
button at the right end of the field to open the Specify Backup window.
6
The Backup media field should say File. The Backup location should be blank. Click the Add button to
bring up the Locate Backup File window.
Open the location C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\Backup where the backup
file is stored. Select the AVData.bak file so that it is highlighted and the file name appears in the File
name field at the bottom of the window and click the OK button to select the file.
This will put the path to the backup file in the Backup location field on the Specify Backup screen. Click
the OK button to return back to the Restore Database – AVData screen.
7
The Select the backup sets to restore field now has two backup entries listed. Under the Restore
column check the box beside of AVData full Database Backup.
Under the Select a page section on the left side of the screen select Options. Under Restore options on
the right side of the screen, check the first option to Overwrite the existing database. Under Restore the
database files as will have the AVData and the AVData_log entries listed. Under Recovery state select
the first option to RESTORE WITH RECOVERY. Click the OK button to begin the restoring process. On the
bottom left the Progress section will show Executing with the percentage.
Once the restore is finished it will give a message stating “The restore of database “AVData’ completed
successfully. Click Ok and the window will close. Close the SQL Server Management Studio.
Once the restore has completed close the SQL Server Management Studio.
8
1.1a Installing AirVision Server on the same PC as SQL
To install AirVision Server on the same PC where SQL is installed, insert the new AirVision CD and
browse to the Server folder. Open the folder and double click on the setup.exe file to install the Server
part of the software. The setup wizard will open, click Next to get started. Select I Agree to the License
Agreement and click Next to continue. Take the default path and folder for the software to be installed
into and click Next. Click Next to confirm the installation and the progress bar will begin on the next
screen. The installation will try to detect the database and connect to it through the Server Settings
Editor.
If you are running SQL Standard, Workgroup, or Enterprise replace local with the name of the
computer where SQL is installed. For example, if the computer name is MYSERVER.agilairecorp.com,
then you would replace local with MYSERVER leaving off the domain name, which in this example is
agilairecorp.com.
If you are running SQL Express replace local with the name of the computer where SQL is installed along
with \SQLEXPRESS . For example, if the computer name is MYSERVER.agilairecorp.com, then you would
replace local with MYSERVER\SQLEXPRESS leaving off the domain name, which in this example is
agilairecorp.com.
Be sure to not make any other changes to the file. Do not add in any other characters or spaces, and do
not take out any previously existing characters or spaces, as this will cause the login to fail to connect to
the Server. After replacing local with the pc name on both tabs click the Test Connection button and if
a successful message box pops up click OK then click the Save button at the bottom right. You will not
see anything happen when the Save button is clicked. After saving click the X button in the top right
corner to close the screen.
Once the database has connected the Database Update Utility will open behind the Installing Server
screen if updates need to be made to the database. Click on the small message box to bring it to the
front and click OK. The default is for the database to be backed up if any changes are applied. The
database will first be checked to see if any updates are needed, and if so they will then be applied. In
order for this process to run the user of the PC and the PC itself has to have full admin privileges into
SQL in order for the installation to be able to make the needed changes to the database. The
installation has to have full privileges to create database tables, delete database tables, read from the
database tables, write to the database tables, and delete from the database tables. Each step of the
backup process will show in the bottom section of the window. When it give the message Processing
finished click the OK button, then click the X in the top right corner of the screen to close the backup
utility.
9
The installation will continue until it gets to the Installation Complete screen where it will show that
AirVision Server has been installed successfully. Click OK and close the database update screen with the
X in the top right corner. If the AirVision Client is to also be installed on the same PC, leave the Launch
AirVision Client Setup box checked, then click the Close button and it will automatically start the
installation for AirVision Client.
The steps for installing the AirVision Client are basically the same as Server. Once AirVision Client has
been successfully installed, the AirVision Server service and the Client can be started by leaving the
Launch AirVision Client box checked, then click the Close bottom and the login screen will open.
10
Click the ellipsis button at the end of the Log in to: field to open the properties screen. To setup the
default profile fill in the Service Gateway URL with tcp://the server name:9885/. For example: if the
computer name is MYSERVER.agilairecorp.com, fill in the URL with tcp://MYSERVER:9885/ leaving off
the domain name, which in this example is agilairecorp.com.
Leaving the Service Gateway URL field blank will cause AirVision Client to not connect to AirVision Server
and the software will not be able to restart the service, link to, nor poll any of the loggers. These
features are controlled by the Server software and the Client software cannot make changes to any of
these features if it is not connected to the Server software.
Once the properties has been set up click the Test Connection button at the end of the URL field. If the
database is connected it will return a Success message. Click Ok to save the settings on the properties
screen.
The Username should be filled in with Admin, if the password is blank it is to be filled in with Agilaire.
The Admin user should not be changed from its default settings under Security, as this can cause the
user to be permanently locked out of the software.
11
1.1b Installing AirVision Server and SQL on different PC’s
If AirVision Server is to be installed on a PC separate from SQL, the installation may not be able to
detect where SQL is installed. If this occurs the Database Server field in the Server Settings Editor for
both the Default Connection Settings tab and the Advance Settings tab will need to be set. If AirVision
Server has already been installed on the same PC as SQL, skip this step.
If you are running SQL Standard, Workgroup, or Enterprise replace local with the name of the
computer where SQL is installed. For example, if the computer name is MYSERVER.agilairecorp.com,
then you would replace local with MYSERVER leaving off the domain name, which in this example is
agilairecorp.com.
If you are running SQL Express replace local with the name of the computer where SQL is installed along
with \SQLEXPRESS . For example, if the computer name is MYSERVER.agilairecorp.com, then you would
replace local with MYSERVER\SQLEXPRESS leaving off the domain name, which in this example is
agilairecorp.com.
Be sure to not make any other changes to the file. Do not add in any other characters or spaces, and do
not take out any previously existing characters or spaces, as this will cause the login to fail to connect to
the Server. After replacing local with the pc name on both tabs click the Test Connection button and if a
successful message box pops up click OK then click the Save button at the bottom right. You will not see
anything happen when the Save button is clicked. After saving click the X button in the top right corner
to close the screen.
1.1c Installing AirVision Client and AirVision Server on different PC’s
If AirVision Client is to be installed on a different PC from AirVision Server, insert the AirVision CD and
browse to the Client folder. Open the folder and double click on the setup.exe file to install the Client
part of the software. Once AirVision Client has been successfully installed, the Client can be started by
leaving the Launch AirVision Client box checked, then click the Close bottom and the login screen will
open. If the Client has already been installed on the same PC as AirVision Server, the installation process
is complete.
Click the ellipsis button at the end of the Log in to: field to open the properties screen. To setup a
profile click the New Profile button and enter in the name of the computer in the Profile Name field.
Only enter in the computer name of the AirVision Server, but not the domain name. For example, if
the computer name is MYSERVER.agilairecorp.com, fill in the Profile Name with MYSERVER leaving off
the domain name, which in this example is agilairecorp.com. Fill in the Username with Admin. Click the
password button and enter in Agilaire in both fields and click OK. Fill in the Service Gateway URL with
12
tcp://the server name:9885/. For example: if the computer name is MYSERVER.agilairecorp.com, fill in
the URL with tcp://MYSERVER:9885/ leaving off the domain name, which in this example is
agilairecorp.com.
Leaving the Service Gateway URL field blank will cause the Client to not connect to the Server and the
software will not be able to restart the service, link to any of the loggers, nor poll any of the loggers.
These features are controlled by the Server software and the Client software cannot make changes to
any of these features if it is not connected to the Server software.
Once the properties has been set up click the Test Connection button at the end of the URL field. If the
database is connected it will return a Success message. Click Ok to save the settings on the properties
screen.
The AirVision Server service must be started before AirVision can be logged into. Once the AirVision
Server service is started the Log in to: field should now be showing the name of the computer where the
Server software is installed. The Username should be filled in with Admin, if the password is blank it is
to be filled in with Agilaire, if it is already filled in with dots then simply click the OK button to log in.
The Admin user should not be changed from its default settings under Security, as this can cause the
user to be permanently locked out of the software.
The administrative level is the only level that is preset, and any customer that wants lower level users
set up will have to set those users up once the software is installed on site.
13
AirVision cannot run without the services running. If the service was not started from the installation it
can be started manually by opening the Control panel | Administrative tools | Services and selecting
AirVision and clicking the start button. Or they can be started automatically by rebooting the PC after
the AirVision installation is finished. The service will be set to automatic by the install and should start
automatically any time unless it has been manually stopped by the user; then the service will have to be
manually started by the user or the PC will need to be rebooted for the service to start automatically.
14
1.2 Upgrade Installation
AirVision is required to be installed on Windows 7 or 8, Server 2008R2 or 2012 with a recommended
8GB of RAM, under the administrative login of the system, with 500GB hard drive minimum with Intel 5
processor, but Intel 7 is recommended.
First, make sure .NET version 3.5 with service packs and .NET version 4.0 are installed for AirVision to be
able to function. Second make sure 2008R2 of SQL Server Standard or Enterprise (recommended), or
SQL Express is installed along with any available service packs. Where SQL Express with a limit of 10GB
will work for a very small amount of configuration and data, we strongly suggest installing SQL Server
Standard or SQL Server Enterprise to allow for a large capacity of configuration and/or data is being
stored. If the server and the client are going to be installed on separate pc’s, be sure to install SQL
Server and create the database on the actual server pc.
NOTE: SQL 2012 or 2014 can be used, but the default security settings can alter the installation steps.
By default, when the database is created, SYSTEM does not have privileges to a database, and they
have to explicitly be added in SQL. To do this open the SQL Management Studio and click Connect.
Expand Security then Logins. Double click on NT AUTHORITY\SYSTEM to open the Login Properties
screen. Click User Mapping; in the Users mapped to this login: section at the top, put a check in the box
beside of AVData. In the Database role membership for: AVData section at the bottom, put a check in
the box beside of db_owner and public. Click the OK button at the bottom. From SQL’s main menu at
the top select File and Save All. Close the SQL Management Studio.
15
Important: Agilaire strongly recommends running a backup of the database before upgrading the
software, either manually or by the pre-database update during the installation. Instructions on backing
up the database are referenced in Chapter 14.
1.2a Installing AirVision Server on the same PC as SQL
To install AirVision Server on the same PC where SQL is installed, first close AirVision. Insert the new
AirVision CD and browse to the Server folder. Open the folder and double click on the setup.exe file to
install AirVision Server. The setup wizard will open, click Next to get started. Select I Agree to the
License Agreement and click Next to continue. Take the default path and folder for the software to be
installed into and click Next. Click Next to confirm the installation and the progress bar will begin on the
next screen. The Database Update Utility will open behind the Installing Server screen if updates need
to be made to the database. Click on the small message box to bring it to the front and click OK. The
default is for the database to be backed up if any changes are applied. The database will first be
checked to see if any updates are needed, and if so they will then be applied. In order for this process to
run the user of the PC and the PC itself has to have full admin privileges into SQL in order for the
installation to be able to make the needed changes to the database. The installation has to have full
privileges to create database tables, delete database tables, read from the database tables, write to the
database tables, and delete from the database tables. Each step of the backup process will show in the
bottom section of the window. When it give the message Processing finished click the OK button, then
click the X in the top right corner of the screen to close the backup utility.
This upgrade will take significantly longer to run because of all of the updates that have to be made to
the database. To help the performance of this process we recommend changing the memory settings in
SQL. To do this open the SQL Server Management Studio | right click on the PC name/SQL Server
instance at the top of the tree above Databases on the left side of the SQL screen | Properties |Memory.
The Maximum server memory field will have a large number that tells SQL to use all available memory.
We recommend changing the setting 50% of the PC's physical memory (e.g., 2000 MB for a 4GB PC)
before running this update.
The update will roughly take 6 minutes per GB of database size (e.g., about 1 hour for a 10 GB
database), so the AirVision system will be offline for a good amount of time.
A Command Timeout control has been added to the database update screen. It defaults to 120 minutes
(2 hours), but can be adjusted up to 10000 (approx. 1 week). Using the information in the above
paragraph to approximate the time it will take for the database to update. If the size of the database
indicates that it will take more than two hours, Agilaire suggests starting out with it set to 720 minutes
(12 hours) to avoid the database update from failing and giving a timeout error. To do this click the
Cancel button, change the Command Timeout, then click the Update button. If it takes less than 12
hours for the database to update it will simply give a message when it has finished successfully.
16
The installation will continue until it gets to the Installation Complete screen where it will show that
AirVision Server has been installed successfully. Click OK and close the database update screen with the
X in the top right corner. If the AirVision Client is to also be installed on the same PC, leave the Launch
AirVision Client Setup box checked, then click the Close button and it will automatically start the
installation for AirVision Client.
The steps for installing the AirVision Client are basically the same as Server. Once AirVision Client has
been successfully installed, the AirVision Server service and the Client can be started by leaving the
Launch AirVision Client box checked, then click the Close bottom and the login screen will open.
17
1.2b If AirVision Client has been installed on a different PC from AirVision
Server, after AirVision Server has successfully updated the AirVision Client software will automatically
update to the same version of the AirVision Server when it connects to the Server software. If for some
reason the Client doesn’t automatically update when connecting to the upgraded server, then simply
run the installation of the Client software on the Client PC. The Admin user should not be changed
from its default settings under Security, as this can cause the user to be permanently locked out of the
software.
18
Chapter 2: EDAS Ambient Conversion
ATTENTION: Please read this entire chapter before proceeding with converting any Ambient data. This
document covers the conversion for Ambient systems only.
Note: The conversion of ATX systems has to be done in house by Agilaire.
Important: Agilaire strongly recommends running a backup of the database once the conversion for the
configuration is complete in the case that you have to restore without data, this would keep the
configuration from being lost and from having to be hand entered again. Then create another backup
once the data has been converted. Then run the backup on a frequent basis to keep from losing data in
the case of having to restore from the last backup. Running a backup daily would be the first choice, but
if this is not possible, running a backup weekly would be the second choice.
Before running the conversion, keep in mind that you should never run a conversion or make drastic
changes to the data folder that the Ambient software uses. Copy the contents of the data directory into
a backup folder, then the conversion can be ran on the contents of the backup folder. This is a
precaution to make sure the original data folder does not get damaged; as we advise that you continue
to run the Ambient system in parallel to the new AirVision system for a few months to ensure that
everything is operating properly.
If the conversion runs into any problems it will give an error, which will stop the conversion. To
minimize the chance of getting errors during the conversion, look at the files in the backup folder and
make sure the data files are in sets. If you only have one data file from a set it will need to be removed
to keep the conversion from stopping with an error on that file.
The data files should be in sets so there will be two files per each data set that will have the name of the
files duplicated, but will have two different extensions. One file will have the extension of .dat and the
other file will have the extension of .inx.
Minute files begin with M and the format is the two digit logger ID, the two digit year, and the three
digit Julian day. Auxiliary begins with AUX, Hourly begins with HLY, Daily begins with DLY, and
Calibration begins with CAL; and the format for all of these files is the two digit year and the two digit
month. Raw files are only for hourly and auxiliary and they begin with RWH and RWA, and the format is
the same as the validated files.
The configuration of each channel should be complete even if the channel is disabled. It is imperative
that the Base and Average 1 & 2 intervals are filled in as well as the storage times. If the data type in the
interval field is not stored by the logger, or isn’t polled by the software, simply put the storage time 000S
for zero seconds. If these fields are not filled in before the conversion is ran on the configuration, it will
give an error during conversion and cause it to stop running.
AirVision does not communicate with 8800 loggers, so any site that is setup as an 8800 the conversion
will skip over and those settings will not be imported into AirVision. To have data from an 8800 site
added to AirVision it must first be changed over to an 8816 in the Ambient software. This means that all
of the settings have to be removed from the 8800 setup starting with the least significant settings such
as alarm and digital settings, then the calibrations, then the parameters, and then the sites last. You will
then have to put all of those settings back in under the 8816 set up keeping all of the settings identical
19
to as they were before, such as the names and ID’s so that the data will match correctly to the channels
and sites that is belongs too.
However, keep in mind that if the 8800 logger is still in use at the site AirVision will not collect data from
that site until the 8800 logger is physically replaced with an 8832.
The conversion utility is now built into AirVision. To run the conversion, single click EDAS Ambient
Conversion from the Utilities menu. The EDAS Ambient Conversion tab will open on the right side of the
screen.
NOTE: It is best for the configuration to be converted first before converting the data. Then start with
one data type, such as hourly data. The smaller the increments the faster the conversion will run, so
you may want to start with a month or quarter to see how quickly it is able to convert, and if the
amount of data is small you could advance the time frame of data. Keep in mind the more the sites and
parameters the larger the data, and converting a year may take an extended amount of time to
complete.
If the units for a parameter in the Ambient software does not match any of the units in the units list in
AirVision, the units will not be converted and the units field in AirVision will be filled in with none. The
user will then need to manually select the units from the drop down list in the Site/Parameter screen
after the conversion is finished.
If data still exists in the Ambient database that is no longer linked to a site and parameter, it will not
have channel to link up with once converted into the SQL database, so SQL will create a generic channel
for the data to be linked to. If this occurs and you do not want the generic channels and data showing in
AirVision, Agilaire can provide you with a script that can be edited to remove those channels and the
data.
Edas Data Folder section - Click the Browse button and select the path to where the Ambient data
backup folder is located. The Load Config button simply loads the config into the grid below the query
but does not convert the config.
Data Types section – Check the box beside of Configuration and a data type that you want to convert to
the AirVision Database. The raw data options for hourly and auxiliary are only available to be converted
when the validated data for the hourly and auxiliary are converted. Converting one data type at a time
in small increments is best.
Date Range to Convert Data section – Enter in the Start Date and End Data of the range of the data that
is to be converted. Keep in mind the larger the date range the longer it will take for the conversion to
complete. If you choose to all of the data at once you will probably have to leave it to convert over
multiple hours to possibly multiple days. You can also convert in even smaller section than mentioned
to make it easier to correct any errors it may in counter.
Options section
Use Site long name if they exist? – Click to check the box if you want the existing long site name
to be used in the new database.
Prepend Logger ID to Site name? – Click to check the box if you want the logger ID to appear at
the beginning of the site name in the new database.
20
Prepend Channel number to Parameter name? – Click to check the box if you want the channel
number to appear at the beginning of the parameter name in the new database.
Include RAW data – Click this box if you want the raw data to be converted along with the
validated data for the hourly and/or auxiliary data.
When ready to run the conversion click the Start Import button.
When the conversion has completed without errors it will bring up an Import complete message box.
Note: There are some settings that the conversion utility will not be able to convert from Ambient over
to AirVision, because the setup in AirVision differs so much from Ambient that some of the settings
cannot be translated.
21
Chapter 3: General Information
3.1 Requirements for An AirVision PC
The platform can be Windows 7 or 8, Server 2008R2 or 2012.
8GB of RAM minimum is recommended for AirVision Server, and 2GB for AirVision Client.
500GB hard drive minimum with Intel 5 processor, but Intel 7 is recommended.
.NET Framework 3.5sp1 with service packs and 4.0 is needed for AirVision. If AirVision Server and
AirVision Client are on separate machines, the .NET Framework is required on both machines.
A full version of SQL 2008R2, or SQL Express can be used, set up to use Windows Authentication. SQL is
required on the server where the database will be located, but is not required on the client pc if the
client is separate from the server. Agilaire recommends the Standard, Work Group or Enterprise
version of SQL be used as SQL Express has a 10GB limit for the database, which includes the
configuration and the data.
On board serial ports if using a modem for polling.
3.2 Requirements for Running AirVision
The screen resolution has to be set at 1280 x 1024 or greater in order to see all of the features on each
screen.
All of the menus under the Main Navigation tree on the left side of the screen can be opened with a
single click of the mouse on the menu name.
Any tab that opens on the right side of the screen that has its own tree structure; the options in those
trees have to be double-clicked to open them further over on the right side or the screen.
In any of the editors when putting in new entries, some of the fields will have a red circle with a
white exclamation point. This indicates that the field it is located beside of has to be filled out or it will
not allow you to save the other settings in that particular screen.
AirVision has the feel of Office 2007, and the Ribbon at the top is dynamic and will change based upon
the screen that you have open.
Each tab that is opened will have an X on the right end of the tab bar that allows you to close only that
tab without closing any of the other screens that you may have open.
Most of the tabs can also be closed by right clicking on the tab and selecting close from the popup
menu.
22
After making any changes to any of the configuration screen always be sure to save after making each
change. This will help to keep SQL from having problems with making the relationships with the pieces
of information that has been entered as well and the pieces that have been deleted. Always save any
changes you have made before exiting the screen you are in or the changes won’t be kept. Making too
many changes before saving can sometimes cause SQL to get confused to the point that it will give an
error rather than saving the changes. The more often changes are saved the better for SQL. If you get
an error when trying to save changes, it is best to close the screen that is open without saving any of the
changes and simply start over by reopening the same screen and saving after each change that is made
to insure SQL doesn’t have any problems.
3.3 Filtering Buttons in Editors and Reports
When you hover the mouse over a button it will give the function of the button in a small text box.
Clear field button is the light blue button with the dark blue X located on the right side of certain
fields. It is used to clear that field quickly without having to click in the field and backspace, or without
having to highlight and then backspace or delete with the delete key.
Clear filter button is the button with the filter with a slash through it located on the left side of all
search fields at the top of the columns. It is used to clear or reset the filters for all of the search fields in
that section to be blank and show all entries of each column.
Filter each button is the button with a capital A located on the left side of each search field at the top
of the columns. It is used to drop down a list that allows you to choose the filter you want to use to sort
the column with. Each column also has a down arrow that allows you to pick a specific name from the
list to filter the column on down even more.
Column selector button is the button with the two sheets of paper located on the left side of the
field name. Selecting this button will open a Field Chooser box that allows you to choose from a list of
fields to add or remove columns from the Parameter Selection in the query section of the reports.
23
The minus button is found in the Report Criteria of the reports. Click the button to hid the criteria
selection above the reports and the button will change the minus sign to a plus sign. This allows for
more room for the report to be displayed.
Click the plus sign button and it will bring the criteria selection back up.
The button with a yellow star brings up Date Criteria that lets you select the Current Day, Week,
Month, Quarter, Year, Yesterday, Last Week, Month, Quarter, or put in the number of days back from
the current day. This is used to help save time not having to enter in the exact date and time.
Site and Parameter Selection – Select one or more sites and parameters to be shown on the report. To
select multiple row; click and drag down the left side of the columns in the blue boxes and each row will
highlight as it is selected. You can also click each row while holding down the Control key, or you can
click the first row you want to start with then hold down the Shift key and click the last row you want to
end with. When right clicking on the selection it will bring up two options of Select All and Clear All
Selections. If multiple fields are selected and the Clear All Selections option is chosen it may not remove
the highlight from the fields but it has deselected the previous choices. If you right click and choose
Select All it will highlight all options.
24
Average Interval selection – You can only select one interval per generated report. Select the interval
by clicking the blue box on the left side of the interval for the data type you want to run the report for.
Each interval has its description listed to the right of the interval. The default highlight is on the hourly
interval, but may not necessarily be selected. To make sure the interval is selected click on the blue box
on the left side of the interval so that the interval and description is highlight with dots around the edge
of the highlight.
In various areas of the software, specifically above columns, such as the Parameter Selection will be an
area that states Drag a column header here to group by that column. This means that you can resort the
columns, or you can drag a column header to this area and it will sort the rest of the columns off of the
column header that was chosen.
Quick Launch field – Is located on the Ribbon for each of the Main Navigation menus. To save time in
finding a menu when you are unsure where it is located, you can click the down arrow and select the
menu from the drop down list. After the menu is showing in the Quick Launch field, click the green
circled check mark button to search for the menu, and it will open that menus screen.
3.4 Editing and Saving
All of the menus under Configuration Editors, Data Editors, Utilities, and Reports are listed in
alphabetical order, and only require one mouse click to open the editor on the right side of the screen.
If a tab opens on the right side of the screen with a tree menu, it will take a double click to open the
menu to the right of the tree menu.
To add buttons to the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top; click the green sun button and it will
drop down a list of options to choose from. To add any of the option right click on the button option
you want to add and select Add To Quick Access Toolbar. The options that can be added to the toolbar
are listed below. This toolbar is similar to the toolbar in Word 2007. There is also an Exit button at the
bottom right of the drop down list. Clicking this button will close the entire AirVision program
Save. After setting up any new screens or making changes to any screens that are open, be sure
to click the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings
before exiting the screen.
25
Refresh. When making changes in certain setup screens that affect other parts of the software. If
those screens are open when the changes are made those screens do not see those changes without the
screen is refreshed. A screen can be refreshed by closing and reopening it again, or by selecting the
refresh button on the quick access bar beside of the save button or from the Sun menu drop down.
Screen Capture Form. This button will give you three options to choose from to capture the
screen; the clipboard, the printer, and an image file. The image that gets capture is only the screens
that are brought up from the menus. It does not capture the Ribbon at the top, nor the Main Navigation
menus on the left side.
To Clipboard. Capturing the screen to the clipboard allows you to paste the image into an
image editing program such as paint so that you can edit the image.
To Printer. Capturing the screen to the printer will bring up a small Print preview screen
that will show what the print out is going to look like. To send the image to the printer click the
printer icon macro button on the left of the macro bar at the top. It also gives the options to
preview the printout from one to six pages, or to increase or decrease the preview size for
viewing. The number of pages to print out be printed can be selected as well.
To Image File. Capturing the screen to a file will bring up a Screenshot File Location screen
where you can select the location of where to save the file to and the name of the file. The type
of the file will be save as a PNG Image file. Right clicking on the .png file and selecting to open
with will give a number of programs that the image can be view in. Double clicking on the .png
file will default to being opened with Microsoft Office Picture Manager.
Print. The print button comes into focus when data is brought up in a report so that it can be
printed by clicking the print button.
Close. This button will close the tab or sub-tab that is in focus. To close a sub-tab without closing
the parent tab, you need to right click on the sub-tab that is in focus and select Close active form from
the pop-up menu and it will close only that one sub-tab.
AirVision Profiles. This button brings up the same profiles screen as the ellipses button
does on the login screen. This screen is used to setup the client connection to the server and database.
Exit. If this button is selected it does not just close the Quick Access Toolbar selection, it closes
the whole AirVision program.
26
If you make edits in any of the editors that carries over to other editors, even though you have saved the
edits, if the other editors are open that should be seeing the edits, they won’t refresh until you close
and reopen those editors. Once you have done so they will see the edits that were saved in the other
editors. I need to reword this to sound better.
3.5 Macro Buttons in Reports
The reports Toolbar is in the Report Output section of the reports. The buttons will remain grayed out
until the report has been generated; then only the buttons that apply to that report will become active.
If you hover the mouse over a button, active or inactive, it will pop up a quick reference as to what the
button is used for. Each button is explained below.
The button with the paper and floppy disk with a drop down selection is the Export Document
button. Selecting the button will bring up an export options box of the preselected format where you
can select the settings for the export. It is best to select the drop down arrow first, which lets you pick
the format to export the file in. When selecting the format it will bring up an export options box for the
settings for the format that you chose. After entering in the setting select the OK button and it will bring
up a Save As box where you pick the location of where the save the report, and to either except the
default name or change it, before saving the report. These Exporting Options are also available on the
Ribbon minus the MHT and Image File options.
The button with the binoculars is the Search button. Selecting this button will bring up a find box
where you type in what you want to search for, and select how you want it to search. The Search option
is also available on the Ribbon.
The button with the printer and question mark is the Print button. Selecting this button will bring
up a print query box where you select the printer you want to print to as well as which pages and how
many to print.
The button with the printer is the Quick Print button. Selecting this button will send the report
directly to the default printer and will not give you the print query box to make the selection you want.
The button with the paper and wrench is the Page Setup button. Selecting this button will bring up
a page setup box where you can select the letter size and source, if you want it portrait or landscape,
and set the margins.
The button with the little box and arrow inside of a larger box is the Scale button. Selecting this
button will bring up a scaling box to adjust the size of the page.
The button with the hand is the Hand Tool button. Selecting this button will change the mouse from
the arrow to a hand that will allow you to grab a hold of the page and drag it up or down. This is an
alternative if your mouse does not have a track wheel or if you don’t want to use the scroll bar on the
right side of the report.
27
The button with the magnifying glass and the dot is the Magnifier button. Selecting this button will
change the mouse from the arrow to a magnifying glass with a minus sign. Placing the magnifier on the
report on clicking is once will take the report from 100% down to 36% and will change the mouse to a
magnifying glass with a plus sign on it. Clicking on the report once again will take it from 36% back to
100%. Click the magnifier button again and it will change it from the magnifying glass back to the arrow.
The button with the magnifying glass and minus sign is the Zoom Out button. Each time this button
is selected it reduces the report in size by 5%.
The percent down arrow button is the Zoom Options button. Selecting the down arrow
allows you to change the size of the report. Zoom Options are also available on the Ribbon.
The button with the magnifying glass and the plus sign is the Zoom In button. Each time this button
is selected it increases the report in size by 10% if increasing from 100%. If the report has been reduced
below 100% the button will increase the report in size by 5% until it reaches 100%.
The button with the bar and left arrow is the First Page button. If the report is on any page other
than the first page, selecting this button will take you to the first page. If the report is already on the
first page this button will be grayed out.
The button with the left arrow is the Previous Page button. If the report is on any page other than
the first page, selecting this button will take you to the previous page. If the report is already on the
first page this button will be grayed out.
The button with the right arrow is the Next Page button. If the report is on any page other than the
last page, selecting this button will take you to the next page. If the report is already on the last page
this button will be grayed out.
The button with the right arrow and the bar is the Last Page button. If the report is on any page
other than the last page, selecting this button will take you to the last page. If the report is already on
the last page the button will be grayed out.
The button with the three sheets of paper is the Multiple Pages button. Selecting this button will
drop down a selection the will expand down three rows and expand over ten columns. Placing the
mouse over each block will show at the bottom of the drop down how many pages by how many pages
it can change the layout of the report to. Selecting one of those layouts will change the report to that
selection.
The button with sheet of paper and yellow box is the Color background button. Selecting this button
will bring up a color box with three tabs; Custom, Web, and System where you can select the color of
the background on the report.
The button with paper with lines through it is the Watermark button. Selecting this button will
bring up a Watermark box where you select the text or picture that you want across the paper, the
direction, color, size, font, and transparency of the text or picture.
28
The button with the envelope and drop down selection is the Send Via Email button. Selecting the
button will bring up an export options box of the preselected format where you can select the settings
for the export. It is best to select the drop down arrow first, which lets you pick the format to export the
file in. When selecting the format it will bring up an export options box for the settings for the format
that you chose. After entering in the setting select the OK button and it will bring up a Save As box
where you pick the location of where the save the report, and to either except the default name or
change it, before saving the report. After selecting saving the report it will bring up your email window
for composing an email with the exported format attached to the email.
3.6 Hidden Features
Each screen opens under its own tab in the right pane of the software. Some of those main tabs also
have sub-tabs. Those tabs and sub-tabs can be closed in a number of different ways.
The X at the far right will close the main tab that is in focus and all of its sub-tabs that are open, but it
can’t close just the sub-tabs. Some of the screens will have a Close Active Form button on the Ribbon at
the top, and if the button is colored in it has the ability to close the main tab or sub-tab that is in focus.
Other screens will have main tabs and sub-tabs that actually have the X on the right end of the tab itself,
which can be clicked to close the tab. Most of the tabs can also be closed by right clicking on the tab
and selecting Close.
Most of the menus have options to add or delete. A few of the menus do not have the delete option,
but that does not mean that you can’t delete certain entries. For some of those menus that don’t have
the delete option, the alternative is to use the delete key.
The AQI Editor is one of the menus that doesn’t have a delete option. To delete a program no longer
needed or wanted by the user, simply highlight the row in the top section be clicking once on the blue
box at the left end of the row. Once the row is highlighted press the delete key on the keyboard and it
will bring up a message box that states: You have selected 1 row for deletion. Choose Yes to delete the
row or No to exit. If Yes button is selected the row will be deleted. In order for the deletion to take
affect the change must be saved.
3.7 Help and Support
Help and Support is a new menu option under the Main Navigation menu that has four sub-menu
options.
When Agilaire Support is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the Support
page on the Agilaire web site.
When AirVision Manual is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the
AirVision manual in pdf form. The pfd can be downloaded.
When Software Release Info is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the
Agilaire web site to the page where the Release Notes are listed for the latest version first, then
some of the previous versions on down the page.
When Video Tutorials is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the Agilaire
web site to the Video Training Resources page where a video for AVTrend is listed first, and
29
individuals videos for different sections of AirVision are listed next, and videos for the 8872 are
listed last.
30
Chapter 4: Configuration Editors
After entering in and saving some setting you may be prompted to restart the AirVision service. You
may do so, or if you have other settings that you need to enter or change that you know will also
prompt you to restart the service you can opt to wait by clicking No on the prompt. When you are
finished with entering, changing, and saving all of the settings then restart the service by clicking Yes on
the prompt or by manually restarting the service using the Server Restart menu; this menu is discussed
in further detail in Chapter 9.
4.1 Parameter Template Editor
The purpose of the template editor is to setup templates for existing parameters that are going to be
used at multiple sites, and will be used during the setup of each parameter in the Site/Parameter screen.
This will help to save time for the user setting up parameters so they don’t have to fill in every field
manually, they can simply apply a template and it will automatically fill in the fields. The user can fill in
the blank fields in the parameter setup if needed. Some of the fields are blank in the templates, and can
be filled in by the user if needed. It is highly recommended that the settings that have been preset for
the parameter templates not be changed, and if changes are needed, it is best to select a different
parameter template that the parameter can be associated with. If the proper template does not
exist, then one should be created with the needed settings for that parameter to be associated with.
Some parameters that are imported in a configuration are likely to not have existing templates for those
parameters, and if used at a number of sites creating a template would likely to prove helpful in saving
time in setting up those parameters.
Important! - A template should be used once for one parameter per site. If a template is used for
more than one parameter at the same site, it can cause the reports to not function properly as the
reports will not know which parameter the template is supposed to be reporting for. There is a
template already created for each type of parameter with the specific EPA Parameter Code selected.
This is especially important when setting up Particulate Matter continuous and non-continuous data,
and for AQI reporting. If a parameter template for Particulate Matter does not exist for the codes and
settings you are needing, it is best that the settings for the existing template not be changed, and a
new template be created with the settings and codes that are needed, using a different name than the
templates that are already created in the list.
To setup parameter templates, single click Parameter Template Editor from the Configuration Editors
menu. The Parameter Template Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen that has multiple
fields. As parameters are added they will appear in the Parameter Name column on the left of the
setup screen.
To add a new template, select the New button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields on the
right side of the screen, which are described below.
To open an existing template, single click the parameter name in the Parameter Name column to bring
up the parameter settings on the right side of the screen.
31
To delete an existing template, single click the parameter name in the Parameter Name column that you
want to remove. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure
you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the template is immediately removed from the
list.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Parameter Template Editor, select the disk
icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.
Parameter – Enter in the name of a monitored pollutant, meteorological parameter, or other measured
entity.
Description – Enter in a description of the parameter if one is needed. This is not a required field.
AIRNow Mnemonic – These names are what is going to show on the AIRNow report. If you want the
name of the parameter as you have it set in the software to be the way it shows on the report just
simply type in the same parameter name. If not, then type in the name that is required to appear on
the AIRNow report. Example of a parameter that might have two different spellings one of which you
have in the software and one of which is required on the report could be Ozone or O3. This field is
required if the parameter template is going to be associated with the parameter that is to be included
on the AIRNow report.
Math Equation: (if Calculated) – This designates the parameter to be calculated from the central math
pack engine, which makes it like a central only channel. This feature currently has to be turned on with
a key from Agilaire, but will be a standard feature in the next release. The instructions for setting up an
equation is discussed in Chapter 4 Section 4.4 Math Editors.
Enable AIRNow Reporting – Check this box if you want this parameter to be included as one of the
parameter reported on the AIRNow report that will be submitted to EPA.
Parameter Data Type – Average (Continuous) is data that is to be collected on an hourly basis, and this
setting is the default. Particulate Sample is Non-Continuous data to be manually entered on a nonhourly basis. This option is useful for parameters like TSP (total suspended particulate matter, PM10
(particulate matter), or lead, for which data can be collected at different intervals. Composite Sample is
a calculated measurement.
EPA POC – The parameter occurrence code. Enter in a one digit code used to distinguish between
different monitors at one site that are measuring the same parameter.
EPA Method – Enter a three digit code indicating the sampling method code.
EPA Units – Enter a three digit code indicating the engineering units for the parameter.
EPA Parameter – Enter a five digit code indicating which parameter is being reported on.
Reported Digits – Number of digits to report between 0 and 6. This number should be greater than or
the same as the precision.
32
Precision – Number of digits past the decimal between 0 and 6. This number should be the same as or
less than the reported digits.
Truncate Round Rule – Enter a T for truncate and an R for round the end result. The field defaults to
truncate.
Reported Units – Enter the engineering units to which the voltage or current inputs will be scaled.
Analyzer Units (if different) – Enter in the units that the analyzer uses if those units are different than
the reported units used on the report.
Graph Minimum – Lower scale of the graphs. Changing this setting will change the scaling in the graphs
in the Average data Editor.
Graph Maximum – Upper scale of the graphs. Changing this setting will change the scaling in the graphs
in the Average data Editor.
Calibration Span – This field is determined by the instrument. Enter the configured calibration span
value for the parameter to determine the parameter’s calibration error (at the data logger). For “Error
Calculation,” the value is only used for Standard formula out of the three possible formulas of which are
Standard, Difference, and Linearity.
Formula: (ABS (Actual Value - Expected Value) * 100)) / SPAN
where ABS is the absolute value.
Instrument Detection Limit – Minimum concentration of a pollutant that can be measured above
instrument background. The data logger is an estimate of concentrations as which one can be fairly
certain that the compound is present. Concentrations below this limit may not be detected.
Limit Of Quantization – A minimum criterion or region for quantization that should be clearly above the
detection limit. The lowest concentration of a pollutant in a sample that can be determined with
acceptable precision and accuracy under the stated operational conditions of the method. Traditionally
this is approximated as 10 times the signal-to-noise ratio.
Minimum Detectable Limit – This is the minimum limit, in engineering units, detectable by the
instrument. Mainly used for Ozone if you use the Ozone Standard for the Violation of Standards
reporting.
Practical Quantization Limit – The lowest concentration of a pollutant that can be reliably measured
within specified limits of precision and accuracy during routine operating conditions.
Totalize in Reports – Check this box to get a Total column in the Monthly report and Statistical report. If
this box is not checked and the Monthly or Statistical report is ran on the particular parameter it will not
show the Total column but instead will show the Average column. If this box is checked the Daily
Summary report will give totals in the Total row at the bottom of the report, if it is not checked the Total
row will still show on the report but the cells will be blank.
33
Minimum in Reports – Check this box to get a Minimum column in the Monthly report. If this box is not
checked and the Monthly report is ran on the particular parameter it will not show the Minimum
column but instead will show the Maximum column.
34
4.2 Site/Parameter
The Site/Parameter editor is used to setup Systems, Sites and Parameters. To setup these features,
single click Site/Parameter from the Configuration Editors menu. The Site/Parameter tab will open on
the right side of the screen. This tab has a tree menu that expands each System’s Sites and their
Parameters once they have been created. All of the settings created here are for the software’s purpose
only when it comes to generating files and reports to be submitted. Each setup is described below.
4.2.1 Systems
A system is defaulted in the tree menu called System, but the name can be changed by double clicking
on System to bring its setting up on the right side of the screen. Multiple systems are not usually
needed unless for example a state agency was also polling data from some of the counties and wanted
to keep the counties configuration separated from each other to make it easier to sort through.
To add a new system, select the Add System button on the Ribbon at the top. A new System tab will
open on the right side of the screen that has one section that contains three fields which are described
below.
To open an existing system, double-click the system name in the tree menu to bring up the System
Name tab.
To delete an existing system, single click the system name in the tree menu you want to remove. Select
the Delete System button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you
want to delete the current selection. Select Yes to continue deleting the system or select No to stop the
deletion and retain the system. However, keep in mind that a system cannot be deleted if it has existing
parameters.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Site/Parameter editor, select the disk icon on
the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
General Tab
System Details section
System Name – Enter in the name of the System that will hold the Sites. You can setup more
than one System, and it can hold other Sites as well. This is used in a situation where you may
be monitoring Sites from another agency or customer and you want to keep different agency
Sites separated from each other in different Systems.
Country Code – This code for the United States is 840, which should fill in automatically.
Time Zone – Click the down arrow and select a time zone for the polling pc from the drop down
list.
35
AQS Agency Code – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the agency’s code
and name.
AIRNow Agency Code – This is your unique three digit agency code established by the EPA, and
will be used automatically by the information entered in the AIRNow Setup.
4.2.2 Sites
To add a new site, single click the system name in the tree menu and select the Add Site button on the
Ribbon at the top. A new Site tab will open on the right side of the screen that has four sections that
contain a number of fields each, which are described below.
To open an existing site, expand System in the menu tree to show the list of sites. Double-click the site
name to bring up the Site Name tab.
To delete an existing site, single click the site name in the tree menu that you want to remove. Select
the Delete Site button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to
delete the current selection. Select Yes to continue deleting the site or select No to stop the deletion
and retain the site.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Site/Parameter editor, select the disk icon on
the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
General section
Name – Name of the site used to identify a data logger’s location or overall purpose.
Abbreviation – Enter an abbreviation name of the site for easier reference if the site name is
too long
Description - Enter a description of the site, or possibly its location to help describe or reference
the purpose of the site. This field is not required to be filled in.
Time Zone – Select the time zone from the drop down list where the site is located.
Enabled – Click the box to add or remove the check to enable or disable the site.
36
Miscellaneous section
Latitude – Enter a value for the site location (0-90 degrees) as a decimal.
EPA Site – Enter in the four digit code indicating the site of the data collection.
Longitude – Enter a value for the site location (0-180 degrees) as a decimal.
AIRNow Mnemonic – If you use Mnemonic site names for the AIRNow, enter the name in this
field. Mnemonic names are used for when you need to report a pollutant by a specific name
such as Ozone, but you have ozone setup in the software as O3. The mnemonic name will put
all of the O3’s data under Ozone to be submitted to the EPA.
Surrogate Slope – If you are using Ozone Surrogate for the AQS report, enter in the slope for the
Ozone Surrogate.
Surrogate Offset - If you are using Ozone Surrogate for the AQS report, enter in the intercept for
the Ozone Surrogate.
File Import Code – This field is customer specific and will not apply to your setup and needs to
be left blank.
EPA County or Tribal Code – Enter in the three digit code indicating the county or tribe where
the data is collected, which can be selected from the drop down list.
Address section – Enter in the street address, city, county, state, and zip code of where the site
is located.
Additional Information section – This section is used for the Site Metatags, but it can also be used
as a free editor and note field. Click the row with the asterisks at the bottom to add in a new entry.
Name – The required Metatag name should be called SiteIdentifier.
Value – The value should be the EPA Site code for that particular site.
37
4.2.3 Parameters
To add a new parameter, single click the site name in the tree menu and select the Add Parameter
button on the Ribbon at the top. A new blank tab will open on the right side of the screen that has
multiple fields which are described below.
To open an existing parameter, expand System and the site in the menu tree and double-click the
parameter name to bring up the Parameter Name tab.
To delete an existing parameter, single click the parameter name that you want to remove. Select the
Delete Parameter button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you
want to delete the current selection. Select Yes to continue deleting the parameter or select No to stop
the deletion and retain the parameter.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Site/Parameter editor, select the disk icon on
the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
Site – The name of the site used to identify a data logger’s location or overall purpose, which is grayed
out because it is propagated from the Site configuration screen.
Parameter – Enter the parameter name for a single monitored pollutant, meteorological parameter or
other measured entity. This field will be automatically entered if the parameter template field is used.
Parent Parameter – This field is used for parameters that use other settings that forms the parameter.
Its main use is for data QA. A Parent Parameter can be designated to form relationships that can be
used for drill-down in the Data Editor. For example, a primary analyzer pollutant such as NOX could be a
parent and designated diagnostic parameters such as sample flow or box temperature could be
children. Another example would be to assign particulate parameters as parents and metals for XRF (Xray fluorescence) analysis as children.
Enabled – Click the box to add a check mark to enable the parameter to be used by the software.
Filter From Web Site – This field is for filtering a parameter from appearing on AgileWeb historical
graphs and reports. Example: logger calculations or temperature that the public would not be
interested in.
AgileWeb is an optional feature that can be purchased in addition to AirVision. This field only works
with AgileWeb and should remain uncheck if AgileWeb has not been purchased.
Parameter Template – This field uses the parameters created in the Parameter Template Editor. If this
field is used it will propagate all of these settings used to create the parameter. If any of the settings
that are brought over from the template are different, you can change any of the field simply by clicking
in the field and editing the setting, with the exception of the Parameter Data Type. The Parameter Data
Type needs to remain the same as the template that the parameter has been associated with. If the
Parameter Data Type is not correct and needs to be changed, it is best to select a different parameter
template that reflects the correct Data Type for the parameter to be associated with. If the proper
template does not exist, then one should be created with the needed settings for that parameter to be
associated with. A template should be used once for one parameter per site. If a template is used for
38
more than one parameter at the same site, it can cause the reports to not function properly as the
reports will not know which parameter the template is supposed to be reporting for. There is a
template already created for each type of parameter with the specific EPA Parameter Code selected.
This is especially important when setting up Particulate Matter continuous and non-continuous data. If
a parameter template for Particulate Matter does not exist for the codes and settings you are needing, it
is best that the settings for the existing template not be changed, and a new template be created with
the settings and codes that are needed, using a different name than the templates that are already
created in the list.
Parameter Report Order – Parameters are listed in the reports in the same order that they are shown
under each site. If parameters need to be shown in a different order on the reports, this field can be set
per each parameter setting the order number in which each one is to appear on the reports. This
setting will only be seen in the Monthly report and Daily Summary report.
The remaining fields listed below have already been discussed in the Parameter Template section.
Enable AIRNow Reporting
Parameter Data Type
Description
Math Equation: (if Calculated)
EPA POC
EPA Method
EPA Units
EPA Parameter
Reported Digits
Precision
Truncate Round Rule
Reported Units
Analyzer Units
Graph Minimum
Graph Maximum
Calibration Span
Instrument Detection Limit
Limit Of Quantization
Minimum Detectable Limit
Practical Quant Limit
Totalize in Reports
Minimum in Reports
Additional Information section – This section is used for the Parameter Metatags, but it can also
be used as a free editor and note field. Click the row with the asterisks at the bottom to add in a new
entry.
Name – The required Metatag name should be called ParmIdentifier.
Value – The value should be the EPA Parameter code for that particular parameter.
39
A parameter cannot be deleted if there is data still attached to the parameter. When deleting a
parameter, make sure all other tabs are closed before making the deletion. To delete a parameter
expand the site and select the parameter, click the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top and it will ask
if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. If OK is selected it will then ask if you are sure
you want to delete all the data and configuration attached to the parameter. Selecting Yes will
permanently delete the parameter and its data. Selecting No will cancel the deletion.
The deletion processes will then start scrolling through data types and time frames as it deletes the
data. Once it has finished it will show the status as finished successfully.
40
41
4.3 Unit Editor
To open the Unit Editor, single click Unit Editor from the List Editors menu. The Unit Editor tab will open
on the right side of the screen.
The Unit Editor has been pre-set with the required units for reporting and for polling data straight from
the logger and the analyzer, however, if you need to add additional units click the row with the Asterisk
symbol (*) at the bottom of the Unit Editor screen, and the row will highlight and put the required field
symbol beside of the fields that have to be filled in. Note: It is best to use the tab key to move from one
field to the next in this screen. After filling in the needed fields, single click to highlight one of the
existing units and the new entry will attach as the bottom row.
Units that the analyzer uses are different than the reported units required on most of the report. The
Analyzer Units is meant for digital communications with the analyzer, which is only needed for direct
communication with the analyzer. For the Reported Units to be downloaded to the logger to be used by
the logger the Analyzer Units field must remain blank. If the Analyzer Units field is filled in, this will be
the units downloaded to the logger instead of the Reported Units, and will cause the values to be
calculated incorrectly.
To make changes to an existing unit, single click the blue box to the left side of the unit name to
highlight the row, then make the correction to the particular field needing the change.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Unit Editor select, the disk icon on the Quick
Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
Unit Name – The name of the unit used in the Site/Parameter screen.
Unit Type – Gives what the unit of measure is.
Slope & Intercept – Used in relation to the acquired units from the analyzer compared to the reported
units set in the Site/Parameter screen. If these fields are already filled in with the number that is to
remain, such as a 0, do not tab past this field or it will appear that it is blank because nothing was typed
in. Be sure to type the number again even if the number is already there, then tab to the next field.
Description – Gives a more details description of the unit name field.
42
4.4 Math Editors
The Math Editors are used in conjunction with the Math Equation field in the Parameter Template and
Site/Parameter screens for a central channel calculation only. This is an add on feature that has to be
enabled with a license key that has to be provided by Agilaire. Math Editors is also discussed in
Chapter 13.1. If the equation is to be used as a global setting it can be set it in the Parameter Template,
but if it is going to be used on one parameter only, it can be set on the parameter setup in the
Site/Parameter screen. This setting is to be set after the equation has been configured. To setup math
equations or math constants, expand the Math folder from the List Editors menu and single click either
Math Equation Editor or Math Constants Editor. Either of those tabs will open on the right side of the
screen. Each setup is described below.
4.4.1 Math Equations Editor
To add a new equation, select the Add Equation button on the Ribbon at the top. It will create a new
entry row with an editing box.
To delete an equation, single click the blue square on the left side of the equation name to highlight the
row that you want to remove. Select the Delete Equation button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not
prompt you before simply deleting the current selection.
Equation Name - Type in a name to identify the equation.
Equation Description – Type in a description to help identify the function of the equation.
Math Equation – Type in the formula that is to be used to calculate the value of the selected parameter
in the Site/Parameter setup screen. Do not put an equals sign at the end of the formula as it will cause
the calculation when ran to give an error and not calculate the value.
If there are any flags that are to be ignored from the propagation can be selected by expanding the plus
sign beside of the equation row to open an ignore flags box. To setup a flag select the blue square on
the left side of the row with the asterisks, then click the down arrow at the right end of the field and pick
the flag from the drop down list.
43
To manually run the calculator select Manual Parameter Calculator from the Utilities menu and it will
open the Math Parameter Calculator tab on the right side of the screen. After making the query
selection click the Calculate Selected button on the Ribbon at the top. To evaluate the calculated data
use the Average Data Editor.
4.4.2 Math Constants Editor
To add a new constant, select the Add Constant button on the Ribbon at the top. It will create a new
entry row with an editing box.
To delete a constant, single click the blue square on the left side of the constant name to highlight the
row that you want to remove. Select the Delete Constant button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not
prompt you before simply deleting the current selection.
Constant Name - Type in a name to identify the equation.
Constant Value – Type in the value the constant is to be set to.
Constant Description – Type in a description to help identify the function of the constant.
4.4.3 Math Parameter Calculator
To manually run the math equations or math constants, select Math Parameter Calculator from the
Utilities menu. To run all configured equations for a site, select the site tab and enter in the query, then
select the Calculate Selected button on the Ribbon at the top.
44
To run specific parameter calculations, select the Parameter Calculation tab and enter in the query,
then select the Calculate Selected button on the Ribbon at the top.
4.4.4 Task Scheduler
To run the math equations automatically, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down
list will open with a selection of jobs and tasks; select Calculate Math Parameters Task.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task
Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the
Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.
Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.
Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you
want to handle running the task.
45
Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start
running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The
default is the current date and time that you create the task.
Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and
select how often the task is to run.
Task Details Section
General Tab
Basic Task Information section
Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list,
which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection
section at the top unless given a different name by the user.
Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the
scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.
Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.
This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled
Task Selection section at the top.
Calculation Options section
Site - Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list the
site that the calculation is to be performed on. A separate task will have to be
configured for each site that a calculation is to be ran for.
Interval - Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list
the data type that the calculation is to be performed on.
Advanced Tab
Retry Options section
Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number of time
you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the retries throughout
the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic
polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a
site that may not be communicating during the particular poll.
46
Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the
down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries should be.
Status Logging section
Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the
degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount of information
it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the level the larger the log
will become and the more hard drive space it will take up.
Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom,
and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.
Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the
drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed to users.
Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.
Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.
47
4.5 GSI & Modbus Drivers
To open the GSI and Modbus Drivers, single click GSI/Modbus Drivers from the Configurations Editors
menu. The GSI/Modbus Drivers tab will open on the right side of the screen.
The GSI Drivers has been pre-set with the existing GSI and Modbus drivers for various types of
instruments. These drivers are needed for GSI and Modbus channels setup in the logger to
communicate digitally with the instrument. To add additional drivers, select the New button on the
Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields on the right side of the screen, which are described below. As
drivers are added they will appear in the GSI Instrument and Entry columns on the left of the setup
screen.
To delete an existing driver, single click the driver name in the GSI Instrument and Entry columns that
you want to remove. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will ask if you are sure you
want to delete the selected driver. Select Yes to continue deleting the driver, select No to cancel the
deletion.
To make changes to an existing unit, single click the blue square on the left side of the unit name to
highlight the row, then make the correction to the particular field needing the change.
After adding in new entries or making any changes in the GSI/Modbus Drivers, select the disk icon on
the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
GSI Driver Entry tab
Details section
Driver Entry Name – Enter in the name that the driver will be referred to as, and that
will likely be what the GSI channel is referred to as well. This is a required field.
Associated Instrument – Click the down arrow and select the instrument name from the
drop down list that used with this driver. This is a required field.
Data Field Type – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the type of
data field that is to be used with the driver. The float type converts ASCII text to a
number.
Modbus Register – Has been defaulted to a number associated with the particular
modbus instrument. If this field has not been set and is required or needs to be
changed, use the radio buttons or type in the number that is needed.
Data Value Format – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the
format in which the data that will be parsed into the database.
Autosend section
Send Name – Enter in the name of the GSI channel.
48
AutoSend Repeat Interval – Enter in the interval time the autosend should repeat.
AutoSend String – The string to be sent out of the GSI port. This string can contain time
formatting and time offset characters.
Parsing section
Parse Name – Enter in the tag name to identify the GSI delimited parse entry.
Parse Sync String – One or more characters that signal the beginning of the data stream
to be parsed.
Fixed section
Number of Chars of Data – Use the radio buttons or type in the number of
characters (0-512) between the end of the Start String and the beginning of the
channel data field. Zero indicates that the next byte after the Start String is the
first character of the channel data.
Data Field Width –Use the radio buttons or type in the number of characters (032) in the channel data field of the incoming stream.
Number of Chars in String – Use the radio buttons or type in the number of
characters that is to be received after the last byte of the start string before the
string is parsed.
Delimited section
Delimited Chars – Enter in the characters that define the beginning of each new
field in the data stream. Up to 32 characters may be entered. If any of the
delimiter characters are found, a new field begins with the following character
and ends with the character preceding the next delimiter character.
Number of Delimiters to Data –Use the radio buttons or type in the number
between the end of the Start (sync) String and the beginning of the Validation
String field, 0 to 99.
Number of Delimiters in String – Use the radio buttons or type in the number of
delimiters that must be received after the last byte of the start (sync) string
before the string is parsed. The configuration of this field allows for more than
one GSI Data Parse Entry to contain the same start (sync) string and for data to
be received for multiple channels from a single GSI string.
Advanced section
Primary Driver - Click the down arrow and select the driver entry name from the
drop down list that used with this instrument.
49
Input index - Use the radio buttons or type in the number of input indexes.
GSI Driver Digital tab - This tab is only to be used with Modbus. If the logger has not been setup with
Modbus, this tab is to remain with its default settings.
Details section
Driver Entry Name – The driver name is usually associated with the process the
instrument is controlling.
Associated Instrument – Click the down arrow and select the name that identifies the
instrument.
Coil Number – Using the radio buttons select the coil number this driver is set to.
Input/Output type – Click the circle beside of the correct selection.
GSI Driver Instrument tab – This tab is only to be used with Modbus. If the logger has not been setup
with Modbus, this tab is to remain with its default settings.
GSI Instrument Details
Instrument Name – Name of the type of instrument/analyzer being used.
50
Default Modbus TcpIp Port – The TCPIP port number the Modbus is using, which is
usually Industry Standard Port 502 used to communicate with the slave.
Default Modbus Code – The ID code for the slave address, which is usually 100.
Default Modbus Command Type – The command ID for the function code, which is
usually 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 15, & 16.
Default Timeout (ms): - If a timeout needs to be set click in the field and type in the
number or use the radio buttons to enter in the number, which is set in milliseconds.
Supports Force Multiple Coils – Defaults to enabled for the use of multiple coils.
51
4.6 Data Source Details
To setup the logger information, single click Data Source Details from the Configuration Editors menu.
The Data Source Details tab will open on the right side of the screen. This tab has a tree menu that
expands each System’s Sites and their Loggers once they have been created. Expand each Logger to
show the channels, calibrations, digital events, and average alarms. Each setup is described below.
4.6.1 Loggers
To add a new logger, single click the Site name in the tree menu, select the Add button on the Ribbon at
the top, and select Logger. A new Logger tab will open on the right side of the screen that has three
sub-tabs; Logger, IO Labels, and Math Constants, each of which have multiple sections and fields which
are described below.
To open an existing logger, expand System and the Site in the tree menu to show the list of loggers.
Double click the logger name to bring up the Logger Name tab.
To delete a logger, single click the logger name in the tree menu that you want to remove. Select the
Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete
the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the logger or select Cancel to stop the deletion and
retain the logger. However, the logger cannot be deleted if it has existing channels.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
Source tab – This tab has two sections.
Source Information section
Site – Grayed out to show it cannot be edited and is propagated from the Site/Parameter
configuration screen.
Source Name – This is the data acquisition and control device that collects data from monitoring
instruments (sensors), averages it, stores it temporarily, and passes it to the PC on request.
Control functions include calibration control, alarms, and digital event programs.
Enabled – The site must be enabled before its configuration information can be downloaded to
the data logger. If the sited is disabled, the PC cannot poll for information from a disabled site.
Description – Used to describe specifics about the site or its location.
Retry Attempts – This is the total number of times the central PC will repeat sending a
command string to a data logger in the event of communication problems. The default is 3.
52
Retry Delay – The amount of time to wait before attempting a communication retry to the
logger.
Logger Details section
Logger Identifier – The ID that identifies which logger it is, and how it is referenced during the
polling.
Logger Type – Select the type of data logger being used at this site.
Debounce Digital Inputs – Select this option for the input line numbers to remain in a new state
for at least one second before the new state is recognized. If not selected, digital transitions
take effect as soon as they are detected.
Send Central Messages to Log Book – If central messages are left on the logger, and the
automatic polling is setup to poll for central message, checking this box will cause those
messages to be written into the logbook in the database.
Send Chart Memos to Annotations - Check this box if the chart memos setup in the logger, if
polled are to be written as annotations on the data in the database.
Communication tab
Important! Communication Routes section – This feature cannot be completed until the
Communication Routes have been created in the Server Configuration setup which is covered in
Chapter 4 section 4.13.2. The Communication Routes can also be configured from the Server
Configuration setup screen as well.
Communication Routes section
Create New Route button – Click the Create New Route button to add the route. This will open
a new screen where you select the server by clicking the down arrow and selecting the
Executive name from the list. Select if the connection will be made by TCP, Modem, or serial
(which is considered direct connection). Click the OK button to save the settings.
Route – Shows the communication option and executive name that was chosen when the route
was created. To add a communication route, single click the blue square with the asterisks to
highlight the new row. Put the mouse in the highlighted field under route and a drop down
53
arrow will appear. Click the down arrow and it will drop down a list of communication options
where you select the route created in the Server Config from the list.
Priority – If you only have one communication route the priority should be set to 1. If you have
more than one communication route setup for a site, then the priority has to be set in order of
which route is to be used first to communicate with the site. If another site connection is
configured, set the priority to 2. Never leave any of the priority fields set to 0.
Polling – Check this box if the communication route selected is to poll the site. If you have only
one route to communicate with the site then this box will need to be checked.
Emulation – Check this box if the communication route selected is to be able to link to logger. If
you have only one route to communicate with the site then this box will need to be checked.
Init Command – This field is only used for sites with T switch or switch boxes. If a switch box is
used at a site that needs a command to know how to set the switches, enter in the command
that is to be used. The command will be sent after the modem opens the connection.
Final Command – This field is only used to sites with T switch or switch boxes. Enter in the
command that is needed to tell the switch the string is finished. The command will be sent
before the connection disconnects.
IO Labels tab
Inputs – Enter in the field the number of inputs that are to be set up. If you are using Modbus
do not set this field or it will cause the Modbus columns to become grayed out. It should remain
blank.
Outputs – Enter in the field the number of outputs that are to be set up. If you are using
Modbus do not set this field or it will cause the Modbus columns to become grayed out. It
should remain blank.
Digital Input Labels section
IO Number – A digital input line number from1 thru 96. This field has been preset.
Name – Input Line 1 thru 96. This field has been preset.
54
Description – Enter in the name of the Input line or description of what it controls.
Modbus Instrument & Modbus Coil – These two fields are mainly for calibration where the
digital I/O points are mapped to the logger I/O points. If you do not used Modbus these fields
need to remain blank. If you are using Modbus, click the down arrow at the right end of the
fields and select from the drop down lists the instrument name and the driver name and coil
number that is to be used.
Digital Output Labels section
IO Number – 1 thru 96. This field has been preset.
Name – Output Line 1 thru 96. This field has been preset.
Normally Closed – When a digital output is setup, it state has to be set to normally open or
normally closed, so that when the state changes it will be detected. Check the box if the state is
normally closed. Leave the box unchecked if the state if normally open.
Description – The name of the Output line or description of what it controls.
Modbus Instrument & Modbus Coil – These two fields are mainly for calibration where the
digital I/O points are mapped to the logger I/O points. If you do not used Modbus these fields
need to remain blank. If you are using Modbus, click the down arrow at the right end of the
fields and select from the drop down lists the instrument name and the driver name and coil
number that is to be used.
Math Constants tab - math constants can be used to represent parameters in the system that need to
be changed only occasionally. The user can configure up to 32 math constants that can be used in
equations for math pack channels in the Math Constants configuration screen. Calibration results and
base averages can also be written to a math constant.
Number – This field has been preset.
55
Name – The name of the constant which is referred to as the capital letter K with a number to
follow. This field has been preset.
Primary Value – Enter in the constant value that is to be used in the formulas for the math pack
channels.
Secondary Pattern – When clicking in this field it brings up a Secondary Input Pattern box to
specify which input lines will control the status changing condition.
Secondary Value – Secondary value based on digital inputs can also be defined for the math
constants. These were designed for fuel-switching systems, which must constantly adjust the fuel
factor and can provide digital inputs representing the exact fuel loaded.
Tertiary Pattern - When clicking in this field it brings up a Tertiary Input Pattern box to specify
which input lines will control the status changing condition.
Tertiary Value – Tertiary values based on digital inputs can also be defined for the math
constants. These were designed for fuel-switching systems, which must constantly adjust the fuel
factor and can provide digital inputs representing the exact fuel loaded.
Description – These fields have been preset.
Analog Outputs tab – Analog outputs are used to output the result of a calculation performed by the
Logger. Any channel can be used to drive the outputs, the unit may even be used as a simple voltage to
current loop converter if desired (i.e., a current loop output driving the result of a single analog input).
DAC Channel Number – Type in the Digital-to-Analog Converter channel number.
Channel – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the channel that
Interval – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the data type that will be
affected.
High Input – The high reading in engineering units of the driving input.
Low Input – The low reading in engineering units of the driving input.
56
High Output – The high value of the analog output corresponding to the High Input in mA.
Low Output – The low value of the analog output corresponding to the Low Input in mA.
Action On Error – The action to take when the input parameter has been flagged with an error
code indicating bad data. Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list:
Ignore - continue to output values normally
Zero - hold output at 0mA
Hold - hold output at the last good output setting
Lowval – hold output equal to 0.0 EU). For instantaneous data, this action is taken when one or
more of the following flags exists: R, -, +, A, U, O, M, C, B, F, T, D or P. For an average interval,
this action is taken when the < flag is present. A current output can be set to a constant value
by setting both the Low Output and High Output fields to the desired value.
4.6.2 Instruments
Direct polling of an instrument is an optional feature and a license has to be purchased before the
instrument setup can be used.
To add a new instrument, single click the Site name in the tree menu, select the Add button on the
Ribbon at the top, and select Instrument. A new Instrument tab will open on the right side of the screen
which has multiple fields which are described below.
To open an existing instrument, expand System and the Site in the tree menu to show the list of
instruments. Double click the instrument name to bring up the Instrument Name tab.
To delete an instrument, single click the instrument name in the tree menu that you want to remove.
Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want
to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the instrument or select Cancel to stop
the deletion and retain the instrument.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
Source tab
Source Information section
57
Site – Defaults to the name of the site the instrument is being created for and is grayed out to
indicate that it cannot be changed.
Source Name – Enter in a name that identifies the instrument.
Enabled – Click to check the box if this instrument is to be used.
Description – Enter in a description for the instrument or for what it is used for. This is not a
required field and can be left blank.
Retry Attempts – This is the total number of times the central PC will repeat sending a
command string to an instrument in the event of communication problems. The default is 3.
Instrument Details section
Instrument Type – Click the down arrow and select an instrument name from the drop down
list.
Instrument Identifier – Enter in the identifier number for the instrument.
Instrument Password – Enter in the password for the instrument if it requires one for
communication.
Communication tab
Important! Communication Routes section– This feature cannot be completed until the
Communication Routes have been created in the Server Configuration setup which is covered in
Chapter 4 section 4.13.2. The Communication Routes can also be configured from the Server
Configuration setup screen as well.
Communication Routes section
Create New Route button – Click the Create New Route button to add the route. This will open
a new screen where you select the server by clicking the down arrow and selecting the
Executive name from the list. Select if the connection will be made by TCP, Modem, or serial
(which is considered direct connection). Click the OK button to save the settings.
58
Route – Shows the communication option and executive name that was chosen when the route
was created. To add a communication route, single click the blue square with the asterisks to
highlight the new entry. Put the mouse in the highlighted field under route and a drop down
arrow will appear. Click the down arrow and it will drop down a list of communication options
where you select the route created in the Server Config from the list.
Priority – If you only have one communication route the priority should be set to 1. If you have
more than one communication route setup for a site, then the priority has to be set in order of
which route is to be used first to communicate with the site.
Polling – Check this box if the communication route selected is to poll the site. If you have only
one route to communicate with the site then this box will need to be checked.
Emulation – Check this box if the communication route selected is to be able to link to logger. If
you have only one route to communicate with the site then this box will need to be checked.
Init Command – This field is only used for sites with T switch or switch boxes. If a switch box is
used at a site that needs a command to know how to set the switches, enter in the command
that is to be used. The command will be sent after the modem opens the connection.
Final Command – This field is only used to sites with T switch or switch boxes. Enter in the
command that is needed to tell the switch the string is finished. The command will be sent
before the connection disconnects.
4.6.3 Channels
To add a new channel, single click the logger name in the tree menu, select the Add button on the
Ribbon at the top, and select Add Channels. It will open another menu with channel types to choose
from. Once you choose the channel type a new Channel tab will open on the right side of the screen
that has three tabs; Channel, Validation, and Misc. The Validation tab has the same setup fields for all
channel types, but the Channel and Misc. tabs vary in difference or do not exist for each channel type.
Each setup is described below.
To open an existing channel, expand System, site, and logger in the tree menu to show the list of
channels. Double click the channel name to bring up the Channel Name tab.
To delete a channel, single click the channel name in the tree menu that you want to remove. Select the
Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete
59
the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the channel or select Cancel to stop the deletion
and retain the channel.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
Standard Averaging channel
Channel tab – Most of the channels will have identical fields on the Channel tab as the Standard
channel setup has, but will be noted on the channels description when fields are different.
Avoid using equation symbols in an instrument name as it can cause problems with math
channels if such a channel name is used in a math equation.
General section
Associated Source – This field is already filled in for you as it is propagated from the
logger name, and it does not allow you to edit it.
Channel Type – Click the down arrow and select what type of channel you need for data
collection from the drop down list. For a standard type channel select Standard
Averaging.
Channel Number – Use the radio button to select the logical number of the channel
being configured.
Channel Name – Enter the parameter name for a single monitored pollutant,
meteorological parameter or other measured entity. If you do not type in the name that
you want used, it will default to Chan and a number that will represent the number of
the channel in the channels list.
Enable Channel – Click to check the box to enable the channel to be downloaded to the
logger.
Parameter – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down pollutant list
propagated from the Site/Parameter configuration editor.
Base Average
Average Interval – The data logger will average instantaneous readings over the
Base Avg Interval, which defaults to one minute and is entered in as 001M. To
change the interval click the down arrow and select another interval type from
the drop down list.
Storage Time – This is the length of time the data logger will store base
averages. Use the radio buttons to select the time or click in the field and type
in a value from 0 to 999. Click the down arrow and select from the drop down
list the time span: S = seconds, M = minutes, H = hours, D = days.
60
Extended Averages section
Extended Average 1
Average Interval – The averaging interval for the first extended average defaults
to 15 minutes and is entered in as 015M. This is not an average of
instantaneous readings, but an average of the Base Average. If the Base Average
Interval is 1 minute, then the first extended average may be an auxiliary, hourly,
or daily interval type (of which have to be divisible by 60). To change the
interval click the down arrow and select another interval type from the drop
down list.
Storage Time – Same type of field as explained for the base storage time field.
Extended Average 2
Average Interval – The averaging interval for the second extended average
defaults to one hour and it entered in as 001H. This field must use a higher
interval type than Average Interval 1, and must be a multiple of the Base
Average Interval. To change the interval click the down arrow and select
another interval type from the drop down list.
Storage Time – Same type of field as explained for the base storage time field.
Averages that can be collected are:
Second data in seconds are: 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 30
Minute data in minutes are: 1, 2, 3, or 4
Auxiliary data in minutes are: 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 30
Hourly data in hours are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, or 12
Daily data in days is: 1
Validation tab – All of the channels will have identical fields on the Validation tab as the
Standard channel setup has. The validation has columns for each of the three average intervals.
Average Level Validation section
61
Base Average, Extended Average 1, Extended Average 2 sections
High-High Alarm Limit (H) – Enter the high compliance alarm limit in
engineering units (exceedance limit) for the base average and each extended
average. Any average exceeding this limit will be marked with an “H” alarm flag,
which is also marked as invalid data.
High Alarm Limit (h) – Enter the warning level high alarm limit in engineering
units for the base average and each extended average. The value can be
specified separately for all three averaging intervals. Any average exceeding this
limit will be marked with an “h” alarm flag.
Both High and High-High alarm limits can be used to describe an alarm condition
for the same parameter. The High alarm limit might be used to define a warning
threshold and the High-High alarm limit to specify a standard violation.
Low Alarm Limit (l) – Enter the warning low alarm limit in engineering units for
the base average and each extended average. Any average below this limit will
be marked with an “l” alarm flag.
Low-Low Alarm Limit (L) – Enter the compliance low alarm limit in engineering
units (exceedance limit) for the base average and each extended average. Any
average below this limit will be marked with an “L” flag, which is also marked as
invalid data.
High ROC Alarm Limit (J) – Rate of Change. Enter the error threshold in
engineering units for the difference between one average and the next. Any
difference that exceeds this limit will be marked with a “J” alarm flag.
Low ROC Alarm Limit (j) – Enter the warning threshold in engineering units for
the difference from one average to the next. Any difference below this limit will
be marked with a “j” alarm flag. The alarm limit can be specified separately for
all three averaging intervals.
Floor Limit (f) – Enter a minimum value in engineering units for each averaging
interval. If the average falls below the floor limit, the average will be marked
with an “f” information flag and the average will be replaced with a specified
floor value.
Floor Value – Enter the value in engineering units. This field will replace an
average in the event the average falls below the floor limit.
Percent Valid – This field specifies the percentage of valid data points required
for an average to be marked as valid. Any average that falls below this
percentage will be flagged with “<” to indicate it is invalid. Valid values are 1100.
Example: If you enter 75 in the Percent for Valid Average field for hourly
averages and 15 minutes of the hours was invalid, the hour will be marked as
valid.
62
Ceiling Limit (c) – Enter a maximum value in engineering units for each
averaging interval. If the average exceeds the ceiling limit, the average will be
marked with a “c” information flag and the average will be replaced with a
specified ceiling value.
Ceiling Value – Enter a value in engineering units. This field is used to replace an
average that exceeds the ceiling limit.
Overwrite Math Constant – If a math constant (K01 through K32) is entered in
the field, the average interval value will be written to that math constant each
time the average is calculated. Click the down arrow and select the constant
you want to use from the drop down list. Select a separate math constant for
each average interval.
Information Flags section
Digital Info#1 (V), #2 (W), #3 (X), #4(Z) Status – When one or more input status
lines cause a V, W, X, Y, or Z information flag to be appended to averaged data,
the Digital Info Status (#1 - #5) buttons are used to define the conditions.
Bad Status Inputs (B) – Use the Bad Status Lines (B) screen to specify which input status
lines will be monitored for an off or on state. Entries here determine which input lines
will be monitored for data flags. Data will be flagged when the specified Off/On line
conditions occur, according to the Or/And selection at the bottom of the screen. When
specified lines are in the designated state, the associated data will be marked with a “B”
validation flag.
Maintenance Inputs (M) – The input line pattern in the Maintenance Status Line screen
is used to signify maintenance being performed. The associated data will be marked
with an “M”, which is a validation flag.
Max Readings (+) – Enter the highest allowable instantaneous reading in engineering
units. The data will be flagged with a “+” validation flag if any instantaneous value is
equal to or more than this limit.
Min Reading (-) – Enter the lowest allowable instantaneous reading in engineering units.
The data will be flagged with a “−” validation flag if any instantaneous value is equal to
or less than this limit.
Rate of Change (R) – Enter the maximum allowable difference from one reading to the
next in engineering units. The data that the data logger receives from the analyzers will
be flagged with an “R” validation flag if there is a difference that exceeds this limit
between one reading and the next.
Example: If the Rate of Change Limit is set to 10, the current reading is 5, and the next is
20, the data will be flagged.
63
Misc. tab – Some of the channel types do not have the Misc. tab as an option, but will be noted
on the channels description when tab exists and the fields are different. If the channel has been
enabled to be downloaded to the logger, and the fields on the Misc. tab are left blank; the
logger will fill in these settings in its setup with the minimum settings that it can use, which can
cause the stored values to be calculated incorrectly.
Analog Input section
Analog Input Number – Use the radio button to select a number that specifies the
actual physical input line. The input numbers do not have to be entered in succession.
High In Voltage/mA – In the text box, enter the high voltage or current input to the data
logger from the instrument. Typical values are -10 to +10 V for a voltage card and 4 to
20 mA for a current card.
Low In Voltage/mA – In the text box, enter the low voltage or current input to the data
logger from the instrument. Typical values are -10 to +10 V for a voltage card and 4 to
20 mA for a current card.
High Out Eng Units – In the text box, enter the high reading of the instrument, in
engineering units, corresponding to the High Input. Enter up to six digits.
Example: If the high input to the data logger from the instrument is 10V when the
output reading of the instrument is 50°C, then a High Input of 10V indicates a
corresponding High Output of 50°C.
Low Out Eng Units – In the text box, enter the low reading of the instrument, in
engineering units, corresponding to the Low Input. Enter up to six digits.
Example: If the low input to the data logger from the instrument is 0V when the low
output reading of the instrument is 0ºC, then a Low Input of 0V indicates a
corresponding Low Output of 0ºC.
64
Average Math Pack channel – Average math pack channels function like math pack channels except
instead of performing calculations on instantaneous readings and then averaging the results, these
channels wait until the end of an averaging interval and perform calculations on the averages. Any
equation using operators other than addition or subtraction will yield different results using this
method. The Average Math Channel configuration screen is identical to the Math Channel configuration
screen except for the channel name, number, and type. The Channel and Validation tabs have the same
setup fields as the Standard channel.
Misc. tab
Round Constituents – Check this field to round the sampled constituents to the number of
places specified in the Decimal Positioner field before the equation and average are calculated.
Math Pack Equation – Enter an equation in the Equation text box to define the Math Channel
result. It can be entered just as it would be on a calculator, but equations must be terminated by
an equal sign (=).
General channel – Used to evaluate data in six different channel types: accumulative, maximum,
minimum, number of valid runs, percent complete number of runs, and difference – which is a setting
that can only be used on an 8872 logger only. For example, a general channel can store the maximum
one-minute average for each hour. The Validation tab has the same setup fields as the Standard
channel. The fields under the General section are the same as the setup of the standard channels minus
the interval and storage time fields.
Misc tab
Specific section
Input Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down the data type you
want the general channel to be based on, such as minute our hourly data.
Input Channel Number – Use the radio button and select the channel number of the configured
channel that will be the data source.
General Value Duration – Enter how long the data will be collected for the Input Average
Interval value.
65
General Value Storage Time – Enter the length of time the data logger stores data for this
channel.
Data Channel Type – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which type of
data you want to use; accumulative, maximum, minimum, number of valid runs and percent
complete number of runs.
Ignore Input Channel Flag(s) – Click the Channel Flags button and a pick list will open where you
select the flags you want to ignore when verifying the validity of the current data point.
Reset Input Status Pattern (Max of 8) – Click the Status Pattern button to select the line
numbers and set the Off or On status. When the pattern is met, a reset will be generated to the
general channel based on the Data Channel Type at the next Input Average Interval.
GSI channel –Generic Serial Interface channel is a serial communications interface used by the data
logger to retrieve data from devices such as analyzers and digital control systems. The interface can
receive data strings and stores values into GSI Channels for data collection. The interface can also
receive alarm strings or send strings to an analyzer to execute functions like calibrations, either on a
repeating timed basis or on a given status input pattern. The Channel and Validation tab are the same
as the Standard channel with an additional field on the Channel tab called Hold Data Between Updates?
is set to Yes or No. If Yes is selected it will use the last value received until the next value arrives. The
default is Yes.
Misc tab
GSI Driver Info section
Driver Instrument – Click the down arrow and select the driver from the drop down list that
best suits your instrument.
Driver Parameter – Click the down arrow and select the GSI parameter from the drop down a
list the driver is associated with.
Serial Port – Use the radio buttons to select the port number that is to be used by using the
radio buttons, or you can click in the field and delete the current number and type in the new
port number, or you can highlight the current number and type over it.
Using Dongle? - The dongle is used when daisy chaining Thermo analyzers in serial, because
their response does not include the ID of the analyzer sending the response. The dongle helps
the logger figure out which analyzer is sending the response. The default is set to No.
Hold Data section
Hold Data Between Updates? – Select Yes or No if the data is to be help from the previous
update to the next. It is defaulted to No because this feature has not been implemented at this
time in the logger.
66
Linear Sigma channel – takes data from an analog input to calculate a standard deviation/mathematical
sigma on three averaging intervals. The base and extended intervals all calculate their averages using
instantaneous data, i.e., the extended averages have no dependency on the base average. The Channel
and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard channel.
Misc. tab
WDR Analog Input Number – If using a met card this setting would be D1. If using a voltage
card it would be the analog input you chose to use.
WDR High In Voltage and WDR Low In Voltage – The high and low input voltage settings of the
met equipment.
WDR High Out Voltage and WDR Low Out Voltage – The high and low output EU’s of the met
equipment.
Math Pack channel – Math pack channels are useful when special functions are required. Math pack
channels are used to calculate results by combining information from other channels and/or constants
according to user-defined equations. The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the
Standard channel.
Misc. tab
Round Constituents – Check this field to round the sampled constituents to the number of
places specified in the Decimal Positioner field before the equation and average are calculated.
Math Pack Equation - Enter an equation in the text box to define the Math Channel result. It can
be entered just as it would be on a calculator, but equations must be terminated by an equal
sign (=).
Modbus channel – The Modbus channel type is used to take data from a distributed control system over
a Modbus link. The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard and GSI
channels.
Misc. tab
Hold Data Between Updates? – Select Yes or No if the last value received is to be used until the
next value arrives.
Modbus tab
Modbus Instrument – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the name of the
Modbus instrument.
Driver – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the driver used to
communicate with the instrument.
67
Rainfall channel – If the optional meteorological input card was purchased for the data logger, this
channel will be available. Rainfall channels calculate accumulation by counting the number of pulses
received during the averaging interval, typically received from a tipping bucket rain gauge. This count is
then scaled to engineering units, usually inches of rain per hour. The Channel and Validation tabs have
the same setup fields as the Standard channel.
Misc tab
Analog Input Channel – If using a met card in the logger, enter in R1.
Counter Input - Enter the number of pulses that will equal one engineering unit.
Channel Output - Enter the number of engineering units corresponding to the number of pulses
counted (Counter Input).
Rolling channel - Rolling channels calculate an extended rolling average from another channel’s average,
such as hourly averages rolling on the minute. The rolling average is updated when the base average is
updated. For example, if the base average interval is one minute and the rolling average interval is one
hour, the rolling average channel will store a new data point every minute; each data point will be an
average of the previous 60 one-minute averages. The Validation tab has the same setup fields as the
Standard channel, and the Channel tab has the General section the same as the Standard channel.
Misc. tab
Input Channel – Click the down arrow and select the channel that will be used as the input for
the rolling channel average.
Input Interval – This field defaults to minute data, but if minute data is not to be used, click the
down arrow and select the interval that will be used to input into the rolling channel averages.
Duration – Use the radio buttons and the down arrow to select the length of time the data will
be collected for each average.
Exclude Offline Data? – Click the box to enable if the offline data is to be excluded. If not, leave
the box unchecked.
Clear at Rolling Interval? - Click the box to enable if the value is to be cleared when it is time for
the interval to roll. If not, leave the box unchecked.
Storage Time - Use the radio button and down arrow to select the length of time the data will
be stored.
Sigma Theta - A meteorological input card needs to be installed in the logger for this channel to work
properly. The logger can calculate the sigma-theta of an initialized wind direction. Sigma-theta is the
calculation of the standard deviation of wind direction. If the wind never changes the sigma would be 0.
68
If the wind direction is changing frantically, it will approach 50 to 60, which gives an estimate of
atmospheric stability. If sigma-theta has a high number, it can be rated by classes: A, B, C, D, E, and F.
Meteorological input cards can be designated in the analog input number field as D1 (for wind direction
channels) and S1 (for wind speed channels). The loggers use the EPA-approved Yamartino single-pass
algorithm, and have software protection against zero sigma “blowup” caused by small rounding errors.
The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard channel, but only has one
average interval and storage time on the Channel tab.
Misc. tab
RMS Average Details section
Average Interval - Click the down arrow and select the interval data type from the drop
down list.
Storage Time - Use the radio button and down arrow to select the length of time the
data will be stored.
WDR Analog Input Number – If using a met card this setting would be D1. If using a voltage
card it would be the analog input you chose to use.
WDR High In Voltage and WDR Low in Voltage – The high and low input voltage settings of the
met equipment.
WDR High Out Voltage and WDR Low Out Voltage – The high and low output EU’s of the met
equipment.
Vector Wind Speed channel – If the optional meteorological input card was purchased for the data
logger, these channels will be available. The Vector Wind Speed Channel computes average wind speed
as a vectored average. A corresponding Vector Wind Direction Channel must also be configured to
support the Vector Wind Speed Channel. Zero crossovers and 0-540 degree instruments are
automatically supported by the data logger. If a met card was not purchased you can use a voltage card.
If you have scalar wind channels setup, you can use their inputs for the vector setup as well. The
Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard channel.
Misc. tab
WSP Analog Input Number – If using a met card this setting would be S1. If using a voltage card
it would be the analog input you chose to use.
WSP High In Voltage and WSP Low in Voltage – Enter in the high and low input voltage settings
of the met equipment.
WSP High Out Voltage and WSP Low Out Voltage – The high and low output EU’s of the met
equipment.
69
Vector Wind Direction Channel – Companion channel field. The Wind Direction and Wind
Speed channels are companion channels and work off of each other so if the Report Channel
Number is 07 for the Wind Speed, then the companion channel of the Wind Direction needs to
be 06 or 08. Before this field can be filled in both the vector wind and vector speed channels
have to be created and saved, then you can go back and fill in the companion channel field.
Once this field has been filled in, it is very important to click out of the field so that SQL sees the
field has been completed, otherwise it will not save the setting and will blank out the field when
the save button is selected.
Vector Wind Direction channel – The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the
Standard channel.
Misc. tab
WDR Analog Input Number – If using a met card this setting would be D1. If using a voltage
card it would be the analog input you chose to use.
WDR High In Voltage and WDR Low in Voltage – The high and low input voltage settings of the
met equipment.
WDR High Out Voltage and WDR Low Out Voltage – The high and low output EU’s of the met
equipment.
Vector Wind Speed Channel – Companion channel field. The Wind Direction and Wind Speed channels
are companion channels and work off of each other so if the Report Channel Number is 07 for the Wind
Direction, then the companion channel of the Wind Speed needs to be 06 or 08. Before this field can be
filled in both the vector wind and vector speed channels have to be created and saved, then you can go
back and fill in the companion channel field. Once this field has been filled in, it is very important to
click out of the field so that SQL sees the field has been completed, otherwise it will not save the setting
and will blank out the field when the save button is selected.
Vector Wind Speed (GSI) channel – The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the
Standard channel.
Misc tab
GSI Input Channel – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the input channel
into providing the data to the GSI channel.
Companion Channel – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the Vector Wind
Direction (GSI) channel.
Vector Wind Direction (GSI) channel – The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as
the Standard channel.
70
Misc tab
GSI Input Channel – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the input channel
into providing the data to the GSI channel.
Companion Channel – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the Vector Wind
Speed (GSI) channel.
Scalar Wind Direction (GSI) channel – The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the
Standard channel.
Misc tab
GSI Input Channel – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the input channel
into providing the data to the GSI channel.
Scalar Wind Speed (GSI) channel – The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the
Standard channel.
Misc tab
GSI Input Channel – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the input channel
into providing the data to the GSI channel.
Wind Speed channel – The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard
channel. The Misc tab has the same setup at the Vector Wind Speed channel, minus the Vector Wind
Direction Channel field.
Wind Direction channel – The Channel and Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard
channel. The Misc tab has the same setup at the Vector Wind Speed channel, minus the Vector Wind
Speed Channel field.
Stream-Switched Averaging channel - Stream switch channels allow the data logger to monitor
one analyzer that is time-shared between two sampling trains. It forms a base average and two
extended averages from another channel, and accepts data from that input channel only when
an on-line digital input status is met. If this condition is not met, the data can be designated as
invalid, or the data (last good reading, base average, extended average, or average) over the
previous on-line period may be “held” until the on-line status condition is met. When stream
switch channels are controlled by digital event programs or are calibrated using automatic
calibration programs, the digital program or calibration timing may not line up exactly with the
stream switch channels averaging periods. Calibrations and event programs should be
71
configured to end a few seconds before the start of the next base average. The Channel and
Validation tabs have the same setup fields as the Standard channel.
Misc. tab
Input Channel Number – Will default to the channel number of the channel unless changed by
the user.
Purge Time Interval – Use the radio buttons and down arrow to select how often the data is to
be purged.
Offline Action – Click the down arrow and select the flag that is to represent the Offline Action.
On-Line Input Status Pattern (Max of 8) – Click the Status Pattern button to bring up the Line
Status Pattern screen to select the status line that are going to be used to control the switching
between channels.
4.6.4 Calibrations
To add a calibration, single click the logger name in the tree menu, select the Add button on the Ribbon
at the top, and select Add Calibrations. It will open another menu with calibration types to choose from.
Once you choose the calibration type a new Sequence tab will open on the right side of the screen that
has three tabs; Sequence, Phase(s), and Alarms(s). The Sequence tab has the same setup fields for all
calibration types with the Automatic cal having a couple extra fields, the Phase(s) tab has the same
setup for all cal types minus one of the fields on the Instrument Controlled cal, and the Alarms(s) tab has
the same setup for all cal types. Each setup is described below.
To open an existing calibration, expand System, site, and logger in the tree menu to show the list of
calibrations. Double click the calibration name to bring up the Sequence Name tab.
To delete a calibration, single click the calibration name in the tree menu that you want to remove.
Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want
to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the calibration or select Cancel to stop
the deletion and retain the calibration.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
Automatic calibration sequence
Sequence tab – Most of the calibrations will have identical fields on the Sequence tab as the
Automatic calibration setup has, but will be noted on the channels description when fields are
different. Click the disk icon at the very top to save the settings.
72
Sequence section
Calibration Type – This field is already filled in for you as it is propagated from the
calibration type you selected, and it does not allow you to edit it.
Calibration Name – The name you choose to call the calibration sequence. This field has
an eight character limit.
Enabled – Check for the calibration to be downloaded to the logger.
Number of Calibration Records – Determines how long the cal record is stored. The
logger defaults to 14 unless changed by the software download. If you use the default
of 14 and you run a cal sequence once a day, each cal record will be stored for 14 days.
If you run a cal twice a day, it will cut the time in half because it is now storing two cal
records a day, so it will only store them for 7 days. If you run a cal more than twice a
day it will get cut again, etc.
Recovery Time – Enter the time required to purge the calibration gases after calibration
phases are completed. This function provides a delay before normal sampling and
averaging resumes
Repeated Interval – How often you want the cal to run. Such as once a day would be
001D.
Start Time – Click the down arrow and select a date from the drop down calendar when
the cal is supposed to start running.
Affected Channels – Channels that are affected by or included in the running of the
calibration sequence, in which the hourly data for these channels will be marked with a
C flag to show that it was collected during the running of the calibration. Click the Select
box to put a check mark beside of the channel(s) that are to be affected during the
calibration.
Phases(s) tab – Has the same setup for all cal types minus one of the fields on the Instrument
Controlled cal.
73
To add a phase, click the Add button above the Sequence tab, then select Phase from the popup
menu and it will put a new row under the columns in the Phases section. Do the same when
adding channels to the phases, just choose phase channel instead of phase when the option is
given. Click the disk icon at the very top to save the settings.
To delete a phase, single click the blue square with the right arrow on the left side of the phase
name to highlight the row that you want to delete. Click the Delete button above the Phase(s)
tab, then select Phase from the popup menu. It will bring up a message box stating that you
have selected to delete Phase: (and give the phase name), then ask if you are sure you want to
delete. Click Yes to delete the phase or click No to retain the phase. Do the same when deleting
phase channels, just choose phase channel instead of phase when the option is given.
Phases section
Phase Name – A new phase entry will default with name of New Phase and a number
depending on which phase number you are at the time of adding the phase. This phase
name can be changed to the phase name desired by the user.
Phase Number – Use the radio buttons to select the order in which you want the phases
to run. If you want the zero phase to run first then you need to put 1 in the phase
number field. If you want Span1 to run second then you would have to put 2 in the
phase number field. The phase number will default in sequential order but can be
changed by the user. Defaults to one minute (001M).
Duration Type – Enter a time to specify how long the affected lines will be switched on
for the phase to run. Defaults to five minutes (005M).
Response Time – Specifies how long data will be averaged during a calibration phase. If
the Duration Type is longer than the Response Time, the Response Time occurs at the
end of the Duration Type. Referenced in the logger as Data Time.
For example, if the duration is 10 seconds and the response time is five seconds, it will
be the last five seconds of the duration. All data collected during the response time will
be included in the data for that phase.
Enabled – Check this box to enable the phase to run. If the field is unchecked the phase
will not run. Defaults to being disabled on new entries.
Status Pattern – When clicking in this field it brings up a Line Status Pattern box where
you can select the lines that will control the calibration phase. You can select up to 8
output lines. If you select more than 8, all of the output lines that are above 8 must be
set up in the data logger manually. A list of the input lines and their on/off states that
signal the beginning of this phase of an instrument controlled calibration.
Level – Applies to those who have the Calibration Adjust Tool to identify the calibration
levels, such as zero, span, or precision, regardless of how they are named. This field is
also used to allow the Precision phase of a cal to be identified and reported on the AQS
report when the Cal Precision Data Records box is selected on the report query. Click
74
the down arrow and select from the dropdown list, ZERO, SPAN, PREC, 20%, 40%, 60%,
or 80%.
Phase Channels section
Channel – Click the down arrow and select a parameter that will be affected by the
calibration, from the drop down list. When adding a phase channel the Channel field is
blank by default.
Expected Value – Enter a value in this text box to specify the expected value of the
calibration for the phase. Enter a number, in engineering units, or a constant (e.g., K3).
The expected value is the (numerical) bottle value. The default is zero for new entries.
Expected Value From Constant – The expected value held in a math constant can be
used for the calibration. To use the expected value from a constant click the down
arrow and select the constant you want to use from the drop down list.
Warning Drift Limit – Enter the maximum amount each calibration result is allowed to
differ from the expected value, in engineering units or percentage. The default is zero
for new entries. This field represents the Warning Drift Tolerance field in the logger. If
this field is set in the logger, the logger will put a d flag on the calibration data, which
will be polled back and show on the cal data in the Calibration Data Editor and on the
Calibration Results report. If you do not want this field to be set in the logger, remove
the zero and leave the field blank and it will leave the field in the logger not set when
the calibration information is downloaded to the logger.
EV for Auto Correct – The Use EV (expected value) for Automatic Correct defaults to
disabled on new entries. Check the box to set the field to Y in the logger. If this field is
set to Y in the logger a parameter for one phase, a zero adjust is performed. If this field
is set to Y for two phases, a linear rescaling is performed. If this field is set to Y for
three phases, a three-point parabolic curve fit is performed. Only standard and rolling
average channels may be rescaled. If you want this field to be set to yes in the logger
put a check in the box, click the box again to remove the check mark to disable the
setting. If this field is set to Y in the logger, the logger will put a z flag on the cal data,
which will be polled back and show on the cal data in the Calibration Data Editor and the
Calibration Results report. If you do not want this field to be set in the logger leave the
box unchecked and it will leave the field in the logger not set when the calibration
information is downloaded to the logger.
Store Calibration Results – Check this box to enable the data point to be stored in the
calibration record. Where the data is normally stored, the user may choose that this
data point not be stored in the calibration record. This feature may be used when a
parameter is in the calibration for correction or write to math pack purposes, but should
not be included in calibration records (i.e., if the parameter is not required by
regulations to be calibrated). Default is enabled on new entries.
Write Result To Constant – A calibration result can be written to a math constant to be
used for other purposes such as in a math pack channel formula. To write the result to a
75
constant click the down arrow and select the constant you want to use from the drop
down list.
Error Method – Enter in the method to be used for calculating calibration error:
Difference, Standard, and Linearity. The table in “Calibration Error Calculation” in the
data logger manual shows the methods with and without rounding. The default is
Difference to mimic the data logger, which shows the actual difference, not a
percentage, between the expected value and the actual value.
The error method calculations the logger performs:
Method
Rounding Error Calculation Used
Standard
Off
(ABS(Actual – Expected) * 100) / Span
Standard
On
((ABS(Actual~RP – Expected~RP) * 100) / Span~3)~1
Difference
Off
ABS(Actual – Expected)
Difference
On
ABS(Actual~RP – Expected~RP)
Linearity
Off
(ABS(Actual – Expected) * 100) / Expected
Linearity
On
((ABS(Actual~RP – Expected~RP) * 100) / Expected~RP)~1
Where:
ABS = absolute value
Actual = actual calibration result for the parameter
Expected = configured expected value for the parameter
Span = configured calibration span value for the parameter
~ = rounding operand (a~b means a rounded to b places)
RP = configured rounding precision for the parameter
Write Expected Value To Constant – The expected value can be written to a math
constant to be used for other purposes. To write the expected value to constant click
the down arrow and select the constant you want to use from the drop down list.
Out of Control Limit – The maximum value of a calibration result can drift for
determining out-of-control status. If a calibration exceeds this value, the data will be
flagged with a T in the logger to indicate that it is out-of-control. Mainly used for CEMs
monitoring, and almost never used in Ambient monitoring. If this field is set in the
logger and the calibration drifts past the limit indicated it will mark the calibration data
with an o flag, which will be polled back and show on the cal data in the Calibration Data
Editor and the Calibration Results report. The logger will also put a T flag on the hourly
data that indicated the cal failed, and the only way to remove the T flag from the data is
to make the same cal run again and pass. If you do not want this field to be set in the
logger leave the field blank and it will leave the field in the logger not set when the
calibration information is downloaded to the logger.
76
Alarms(s) tab - Has the same setup for all cal types.
To add an alarm, click the Add button above the Sequence tab, then select Alarm from the
popup menu and it will put a new row under the columns in the Alarms section.
To delete an alarm, single click the blue square with the right arrow on the left side of the alarm
name to highlight the row that you want to delete. Click the Delete button above the Phase(s)
tab, then select Alarm from the popup menu. It will bring up a message box stating that you
have selected to delete Alarm: (and give the alarm name), then ask if you are sure you want to
delete. Click Yes to delete the alarm, or click No to retain the alarm.
Alarms section
Alarm Name – When adding an alarm the Alarm Name field is blank by default. Click in
the Alarm Name field to type in the name you want to give the alarm to identify the
purpose of the alarm.
Enabled – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the alarm. Click the box again
to remove the check mark to disable the alarm. The default for new entries is enabled.
Alarm On Cal Drift – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the setting to
indicate if the alarm should be generated when the calibration error exceeds the
configured Warning Drift Tolerance. Click the box again to remove the check mark to
disable the setting. The default for new entries is enabled.
Alarm On Cal Aborted – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the setting to
indicate if an alarm should be generated when the calibration sequence is aborted
before completion. Click the box again to remove the check mark to disable the setting.
The default for new entries is disabled.
Alarm On Autoscale Failure – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the setting
to indicate if an alarm should be generated when the automatic rescaling fails for any
reason. Click the box again to remove the check mark to disable the setting. The
default for new entries is disabled.
Output To Alarm Port – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the setting to
print the alarm (sent to the alarm printer port). The alarm printer port is the default port
for all alarm-to-printer notifications. Click the box again to remove the check mark to
disable the setting. The default for new entries is disabled.
77
End Alarm On No Flag – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the setting for
alarms to be automatically terminated after the Acknowledgment Timeout period. Click
the box again to remove the check mark to disable the setting to enforce users to
manually acknowledge alarms. If disabled alarms will stay in effect until they are
acknowledged by an operator. The default for new entries is disabled.
Ack Timeout Interval – Acknowledge timeout specifies the time-out period before
automatic acknowledgment of an alarm. 0 to 999 s, m, h, or d (for seconds, minutes,
hours, or days). Use 0s to configure the alarm program without an automatic
acknowledgment. Defaults to zero seconds, but can be changed by the user.
StateBit – This setting is only used by the SiteNodeLogger module to track cal alarms
that it is generating and managing. If you have not purchased this extra module, then
this setting would remain unchecked.
Alarm Output Lines – When clicking in this field it brings up a Line Status Pattern box to
configure which output lines to activate in the event of an alarm.
Alarm Input Lines – When clicking in this field it brings up a Line Status Pattern box to
specify which digital input lines (2 digits) the data logger will monitor during an alarm.
Monitored Parameters – When clicking in this field it brings up a channels box. Select
the parameters that are to be monitored by this alarm. If there is more than one
calibration alarm set up and both calibrations programs are using the same parameter,
they will not overwrite each other.
Instrument Controlled, Interactive (Menu), and User Initiated calibration sequences – The settings for
the Sequence, Phase(s), and Alarms(s) tabs are the same as the Automatic calibration setup minus a few
fields on each. Instrument calibration is initiated and controlled by external equipment, and the current
state is sensed via digital inputs, and cannot be manually started or stopped.
Interactive calibration type uses a menu interface to control data acquisition and to move from one
calibration phase to another, and is often used for highly manual procedures such as testing opacity
instruments against standard filters.
User Initiated is similar to the Automatic Calibration, but there is no automatic start time or repeat time.
The calibration begins when Start a Calibration Program is selected from the Cal Configuration Menu on
the logger. The timing, control, and phase configuration is the same as for an Automatic Calibration.
78
4.6.5 Average Alarms
Average alarms are generated in the logger and received from the logger during the polling process.
To add a new alarm, single click the logger name in the tree menu, select the Add button on the Ribbon
at the top, and select Average Alarm. A new Alarm Program tab will open on the right side of the
screen.
To open an existing alarm, expand System, site, and logger in the tree menu to show the list of alarms.
Double click the alarm name to bring up the Alarm Program Name tab.
To delete an Alarm, single click the alarm name in the tree menu that you want to remove. Select the
Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete
the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the alarm or select Cancel to stop the deletion and
retain the alarm.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon at on
the Quick Access Toolbar the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
Alarm Program Name – Assign a name to the alarm program.
Monitored Parameter(s) – Click the box in the Select column to put a check mark beside of the
parameter that is to be affected in the alarm. Click the box again to deselect the parameter. By default
no parameters are selected on a new alarm entry.
Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the type of data that will be affected by the alarm
from the drop down list.
Output Lines During Alarm button – Click the button in the Select column to put a check mark beside of
the of output line that you want to set the condition for the alarm. If you are selecting only one output
line you can leave the default of OR selected. If you are selecting more than one output line then you
will need to decide if the alarm is triggered by any of the selected lines, which the OR would need to be
selected, or if a combination of the output lines will trigger the alarm, which the AND would need to be
selected.
Ignore State Changes Flag(s) button – Select the flag(s) that are to be ignored by the alarm.
Flag(s) for Alarm Condition button – Select the flag(s) that are to trigger the alarm.
79
4.6.6 Digital Events
To add a digital event, single click the logger name in the tree menu, select the Add button on the
Ribbon at the top, and select Add Digital Events. It will open another menu with the digital types to
choose from. Once you choose the event type a new Event Program tab will open on the right side of
the screen.
To open an existing digital event, expand System, site, and logger in the tree menu to show the list of
events. Double click the event name to bring up the Event Program Name tab.
To delete a digital event, single click the event name in the tree menu that you want to remove. Select
the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to
delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the digital event or select Cancel to stop the
deletion and retain the digital event.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon at on
the Quick Access Toolbar the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
Timed Event tab
Timed Event Details section
Digital Event Program Name – Enter in the name you choose to identify the digital timed event.
Starting Time – Click the down arrow and select the scheduled execution date and time of the
program from the drop down calendar. The default is the current date and time that you create
the new event.
Output Duration – The length of time that the Output Control Line(s) will be activated. After this
time, the lines will return to their inactive state. The default is 5 seconds because the logger will
not accept anything smaller than 5 seconds
Repeat Interval – The time between program executions. The default is 1 day.
80
Enabled – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the digital event. Click the box again to
remove the check mark to disable the digital event.
Calibration Name – The list of calibration program names during which the digital program will
update its starting time but will not activate output lines. Click the box beside of the calibration
sequence to select the calibrations that are to be ignored.
Output Lines button - The list of the two-digit output control line numbers that should be
activated at execution time. Click the box in the Select column to put a check mark beside of the
output line that you want to set the condition for the event. If you are selecting only one output
line you can leave the default of OR selected. If you are selecting more than one output line
then you will need to decide if the event is triggered by any of the selected lines, which the OR
would need to be selected, or if a combination of the output lines will trigger the event, which
the AND would need to be selected.
Triggered Event tab
Triggered Event Details section – A triggered event has the same settings as the timed event with the
exception of not having a Starting Time and Repeat Interval, but does have a Trigger Digital Input
Pattern button.
Trigger Digital Input Pattern button – The digital input line pattern that will trigger the
execution of this digital event program. Click the box in the Select column to put a check mark
beside of the input line that you want to set the condition for the event. If you are selecting
only one input line you can leave the default of OR selected. If you are selecting more than one
input line then you will need to decide if the event is triggered by any of the selected lines,
which the OR would need to be selected, or if a combination of the input lines will trigger the
event, which the AND would need to be selected.
81
Triggered GSI Event tab - These events are used to send GSI strings based on the transition of a digital
input, or of a pseudo Digital Input – Digital Output pair in the logger. Commonly, these are used to
control RS-232 based calibrators or other devices. For this device, a digital input pattern is defined.
When the logger sees the digital input transition to match this pattern, the GSI string is sent only once
out the designated serial port. The string is not resent again until the logger goes to a non-matching
input state, and then back to the matching state.
Digital Event Details section
Digital Event Program Name – Enter in the name you choose to identify the digital timed event.
Trigger Digital Input Pattern button – The digital input line pattern that will trigger the
execution of this digital event program. Click the box in the Select column to put a check mark
beside of the input line that you want to set the condition for the event. If you are selecting
only one input line you can leave the default of OR selected. If you are selecting more than one
input line then you will need to decide if the event is triggered by any of the selected lines,
which the OR would need to be selected, or if a combination of the input lines will trigger the
event, which the AND would need to be selected.
Enabled – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the digital event. Click the box again to
remove the check mark to disable the digital event.
Serial Port – Type in the serial port being used by the logger for GSI communications.
Output String – Type in the string to be sent out of the GSI port. This string can contain time
formatting and time offset characters.
4.6.7 Modbus Instruments
For modbus to be downloaded to the logger the modbus feature has to pre-exist on the logger. This
feature is usually purchased along with the purchase of the logger, but can be purchased after the
logger has already been put into use. However, if the logger does not have the modbus feature, then
there is no need to setup modbus in the software.
To add a modbus instrument, single click the logger name in the tree menu, select the Add button on
the Ribbon at the top, and select Logger Modbus Instrument. It will open a Modbus Instrument tab on
the right side of the screen.
82
To open an existing modbus instrument event, expand System, site, and logger in the tree menu to show
the modbus list. Double click the instrument name to bring up the Modbus Instrument Name tab.
To delete a modbus instrument, single click the instrument name in the tree menu that you want to
remove. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure
you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the instrument or select Cancel
to stop the deletion and retain the instrument.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon at on
the Quick Access Toolbar the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
Modbus Instrument tab
Modbus Instrument Details section
Modbus Instrument Name – Enter in the name you choose to identify the instrument.
Driver Type – Click the down arrow and select appropriate driver for the instrument that will be
communicating with the modbus.
Modbus Code – Enter in the Modbus ID or Slave ID depending on how it has been setup. The
Modbus ID is unique for each machine and can be set between 1 and 999.
Modbus Command Type – Modbus support commands 1- thru 6, 15 and 16. Only 3, 6, and 16
support floating point operations., which occupy two regular modbus registers. Enter in the
command type needed.
Poll Interval (100ms) – Use the radio buttons or type in the number of intervals it is to poll. The
interval is broken down into milliseconds, so depending how you type in the number will
depend if it is a partial second or whole second. Entering in 5 equals out to be 5 milliseconds or
.5 seconds; 10 would be one whole second.
TCP/IP Address – Enter in the IP address of the instrument and the Modbus ID as both are
required with TCP/IP.
TCP/IP Port – The standard TCP/IP that is used and already preset is port 502, and should only
be changed under special circumstances.
83
4.7 AQI Program Editor
To setup the AQI Editor, expand Report Configurations from the Configuration Editors menu and single
click AQI Program Editor. The AQI Program Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.
The AQI Program Editor has been pre-set with the pollutants that are commonly used in AQI reporting,
however, if you need to add additional AQI programs click the row with the Asterisk symbol (*) at the
bottom of the AQI Program Selection section, and the row will highlight and put the required field
symbol beside of the fields that have to be filled in. After filling in the needed fields click on the left end
of one of the existing entries in the top section of the AQI Program Selection and the new entry will
attach as the bottom row.
To make changes to an existing program, single click the blue square on the left side of the program
name to highlight the row, then make the correction to the particular field needing the change.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the AQI Program Editor, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
AQI Program Selection section
Program Name – Click in the program name field on the new entry row and enter in the name
you choose to identify the AQI program.
AQS Parameter Type – Click the down arrow to drop down a list of pollutants and select the
pollutant along with its AIRS code that you need to report on. This code is what links the AQI
setting to the parameter. This code has to match the code that is set in the parameter in the
Site/Parameter screen in order for the parameter to show up on the AQI report.
AQS Unit Type – Click the down arrow to drop down a list of units and select the unit the
pollutant is measure in. This code has to match the code that is set in the parameter in the
Site/Parameter screen in order for the parameter to show up on the AQI report.
Average Interval – Click the down arrow to drop down a list of interval types and select the
interval for the type of data being report. The requirement for AQI is hourly data, so 001h
would be the correct option to select.
Enabled – Check the enable box for the pollutant to be considered in the AQI calculations and
included on the AQI report.
Averaging – Click the circle beside of the correct setting for the data of rolling or block. This
defines if the average is formed from a rolling number of averages. For example: if a pollutant is
normally an 8 hour rolling average, forming a new value every hour from the current hour and
the previous 8 hours. A 24 hour block average only have a new value every 24 hours.
Averaging Direction – Click the circle beside of the correct setting for the data of forward or
backward. This defines if a multi-hour rolling or block average for a specific hour is calculated
84
using that same hour and the following hours forward, or previous hours backwards. For
example: if the pollutant is set to forward average for hour 03 would consist of data for hour 03
through 10.
Rounding Method – Click the circle beside of the correct setting for the data of truncate or
round. This determines if the value should be rounded or truncated to the number of digits set
in the Decimal Positioner field before entering the calculation. Ozone is normally truncated in
the United States, the other pollutants are usually rounded.
Decimal Positioner – Click in the field for the Decimal Positioner on the new entry row and
enter in how many places past the decimal are to be displayed.
Average Period - Hours to calculate a total average from.
Scale Factor – If you need to apply a multiplication factor to data for PPM to PPB conversion
before comparing against breakpoints. Or you can just use the preset entries of PPM and PPB,
or you can enter your own. This is not normally used.
Percent Availability – Click in the field for the Percent Availability on the new entry row and
enter in the percent of the average interval that is the minimum percentage of valid readings
that must be available to form a valid AQI calculation. The default for this setting is usually 75%
or 0.75.
Use Zero Scaling – A zero pollutant means a zero AQI. For pollutants that have the lowest limit
set at 50, any value that is below that limit will not show on the AQI report unless zero scaling is
selected.
Use Surrogate Forecast – Click the box to enable Surrogate Forecasting to be used on the
pollutant. Surrogate Forecast is usually used for Ozone. In the case of forward averages, the
AQI can normally not be calculated in real-time since the calculation depends on data that is not
yet available. So AirVision commonly uses algorithms to estimate the 8 hour pollutant’s current
and previous values. If selected AirVision will use the algorithms, but if not selected AirVision
will only calculate when there is sufficient data to make the calculation.
The Ozone Surrogate uses a simple estimation method:
8 hour Ozone concentration = current hour Ozone concentration * surrogate slope + surrogate
intercept.
The slope and intercept can be setup on the site under the Site/Parameter screen.
Use Reff Forecast – This option generates the NowCast that EPA uses to produce the AQI for
PM2.5. This replaces the Conroy Forecast which is no longer used. Click the box to enable Reff
Forecasting to be used on the pollutant.
Computing the NowCast with the Reff Method:
85
1. Compute the concentration range (max-min)
over the last 12 hours. This tells how much
the air has changed, but relative to what?
It needs to be scaled.
2. Divide the range by the maximum
concentration in the 12-hour period.
3. Compute the weight factor by subtracting
the scaled rate of change from 1. The
weight factor must be between .5 and 1.
The minimum limit approximates a 3 hour
average. If the weight factor is less than .5
then set it equal to .5.
Example 12-hour period:
50 80 75 90 82 53 64 74 21 10 16 13
Range = 90 -10 = 80 ug/m3
Scaled rate of change is 80/90
Weight factor is 1 – 80/90 = .11 -> less than .5, so use .5
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
4. Multiply each hourly concentration by the
weight factor raised to the power of how
many hours ago the concentration was
measured (for the current hour, the factor
is raised to the zero power).
13*(.5) +16*(.5) +10*(.5) +21*(.5) +74*(.5) +…
5. Compute the NowCast by summing these
products and dividing by the sum of the
weight factors raised to the power of
how many hours ago the concentration
was measured.
13*(.5) +16*(.5) +10*(.5) +21*(.5) +74*(.5) +…
0
1
2
3
4
(.5) +(.5) +(.5) +(.5) +(.5) +…
= 17.4 ug/m3
Missing data is handled as such:
To compute a valid NowCast, there must be at least two of the most recent three hours.
If there is a single hour missing, there will
be no interruption in the reported NowCast
If there are two of the three hours missing,
there will be at least one missing NowCast value.
I = data
X = No data
Hourly data I I I X I I I I I
NowCast
I I I I I I I
Hourly data I I I X X I I I I
NowCast
I I X X I I I
Hourly data I I I X I X I I I
NowCast
I I I X I I I
The weighing of the values does not change.
Each hourly concentration is multiplied by the
weight factor raised to the power of how many
hours ago the concentration was measured
Example 12-hour period
50 80 75 90 82 53 64 74 21 10 16 13
86
The example to the right shows the calculation
if the next to last value in the 12-hour period
was missing
0
1
2
3
4
13*(.5) +16*(.5) +10*(.5) +21*(.5) +74*(.5) +…
0
1
2
3
4
(.5) +(.5) +(.5) +(.5) +(.5) +…
AQI Level Selection section
To fill in the AQI Level Selection, single click the blue square on the left side of the Program Name to
highlight the row in the top section that you want to set the levels for.
Pollutant Level – Click in the Pollutant Level field and enter in the concentration levels of the
pollutant. Example: .034, .144, .244, etc.
Sub Index - Click in the Sub Index field and enter in the AQI SubIndexes of the pollutant.
Example: 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, etc.
Description – Click in the Description field and enter in the breakpoints of the pollutant.
Example: Good, Moderate, Unhealthy, etc.
Color – Click the down arrow and select a color from the color selection popup box that you
want to assign the index. The default color for Good is green, Moderate is yellow, Unhealthy for
Sensitive Groups is orange, Unhealthy is red, Very Unhealthy is burgundy, and Hazardous is
brown.
Font Color – Click the down arrow and select a color from the color selection popup box that
you want to assign the fonts. The default is black for the first four levels and white for the last
two levels.
Sensitive Groups – Click in the Sensitive Groups field and enter in the statement that best fits
the level of the Sub Index and description of the pollutant.
Health Effects - Click in the Health Effects field and enter in the statement that best fits the level
of the Sensitive Group.
Health Advisory – Click in the Health Advisory field and enter in the statement that best fits the
level of the Health Effect.
87
88
4.8 Violation of Standards Editor
To setup the violation limits, expand Report Configurations from the Configuration Editors menu and
single click Violation of Standards Editor. The Violation of Standards Editor tab will open on the right
side of the screen. As violation programs are added they will appear in the Violation Programs column
on the left of the setup screen.
To add a new violation program, select the New button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields
on the right side of the screen.
To open an existing violation program, single click the program name in the Violation Programs column
to bring up the program settings on the right side of the screen.
To delete an existing violation program, single click the program name in the Violation Programs column
that you want to remove. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to
make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the program is immediately remove
from the list.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Violation of Standards Editor, select the disk
icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.
General section
Program Name – Enter in a name that identifies the violation program.
Parameter Type – Click the down arrow and select the parameter from the drop down list that
will be affected by the violation program. For the Ozone Standard select Ozone in this field.
Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the type of data from the drop down list
that is to be affected by the violation program. This is usually hourly data.
Violation Limit - Enter the violation of standards limit, in engineering units, for the selected
parameter. Data averages in excess of this limit will be shown on the Violation of Standards
Report.
Decimal Positioner - This field will be used to convert floating point numbers from Data Loggers
to values with a fixed number of places to the right of the decimal. Valid values are 0 through 4.
For the Ozone Standard this should be set to 2.
Enabled – Check this box if the violation is to be included on the VOS report.
Average Method section
Block or Rolling – Block does not use forward or backward, it is simply the block of hours that
are indicated in the Average Periods box. Rolling works in conjunction with the forward and
backward setting.
89
Average section
Periods – The number of hours to calculate forward or backward.
Forward or Backward - Indicates whether data included in rolling averages will come before or
after the hour selected for the report.
Example: If an eight-hour average for hour 15 of the day is based on hourly data from hour 08
through hour 15, select Backward. If an eight-hour average for hour 15 is to be based on hour
15 through hour 22, select Forward.
Average Type section
Mean – This is a total average.
Annual PM 2.5 Standard, 24-Hour PM 2.5 Standard, 24-Hour PM 10 Standard – These can be
hourly or daily sample readings.
8-Hour Ozone Standard – The 8 hour standard required by EPA.
1-Hour SO2 Standard – The 1 hour standard for SO2 NAAQS calculation.
Ozone Season section
Start and End – If ozone is to be reported between specific dates, enter in the date range in the
start and end fields.
90
4.9 Wind Rose Levels Editor
To setup the wind rose, expand Report Configurations from the Configuration Editors menu and single
click Wind Rose Levels Editor. The Wind Rose Levels Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.
As wind rose programs are added they will appear in the Wind/Pollution Rose Programs column on the
left of the setup screen.
To add a new wind program, select the New button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields on
the right side of the screen.
To open an existing wind program, single click the program name in the Wind/Pollution Rose Programs
column to bring up the program settings on the right side of the screen.
To delete an existing wind program, single click the program name in the Wind/Pollution Rose Programs
column that you want to remove. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt
you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the program is immediately
remove from the list.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Wind Rose Levels Editor, select the disk icon at
on the Quick Access Toolbar the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.
General section
Program Name – Enter in a name you want to identify the rose program.
Plotted Parameter Type – Click the down arrow to select the parameter used for magnitude
from the drop down a list, which could be wind or it could be ozone, etc.
Wind Direction Parameter Type – Click the down arrow and select the wind direction parameter
that is the companion of the wind speed direction parameter the rose is being configured for.
Program Enabled - Check the enable box for the pollutant to be displayed on the Wind Rose.
Calm if Wind Speed < - Set the level that indicates that the wind speed is calm (e.g., 0 or a low
level such as .01). Data below this level is not plotted in the rose.
Class Limits section
Rose Level 1 through 8 and Limit - Use the class limits to set up levels of wind speed. Associate
the desired color with each class limit. Meteorologists might have specific levels of wind speed
for your geographic location (i.e., Chicago, the windy city, as opposed to Knoxville). Make an
entry, in engineering units (e.g., M/S for meters per second), for each class. Class 1 is the lowest
limit, which might indicate a small breeze; class 2 is higher than class 1, which might indicate a
stronger breeze, etc. Class 8 is for data values that are greater than or equal to class 7, and
might indicate a strong gust or an intense wind speed for that particular area.
Example: A limit of <10 in Class 1 would indicate that values less than 10 would be in Class 1.
91
Plot Color – Click the down arrow to drop down a list of colors. There are three tabs to choose
from; Custom, Web, or System. Custom has the basic color chart, Web has the web colors and
their names, and System has the colors for Windows and their names. Select a color from one
of the tabs for each class level.
92
4.10 AIRNow/FTP Setup
To setup the AIRNow transfer program, expand Report Configurations from the Utilities menu and single
click AIRNow/FTP Setup. The AIRNow/FTP Setup tab will open on the right side of the screen. This tab
has one section called AIRNow Transfer Details which has multiple fields that are described below. As
transfer programs are added they will appear in the AIRNow FTP Program Selection column on the left
of the setup screen.
To add a new transfer program, select the Add FTP Program button on the Ribbon at the top. The fields
will be blanked out on the right side of the screen.
To open an existing transfer program, single click the program name in the AIRNow FTP Program
Selection column to bring up the transfer program on the right side of the screen.
To delete an existing transfer program, single click the program name in the AIRNow FTP Program
Selection column that you want to remove. Select the Delete FTP Program button on the Ribbon at the
top. It will not prompt you to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the
program is immediately remove from the list.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the AIRNow/FTP Setup, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.
NOTE: Make sure there are no spaces in any of the fields, especially after entry in the fields.
AIRNow Transfer Details section
Program Name – This is the name that you choose to use to identify the transfer program.
Transfer Method – Click the down arrow and select from FTP, FTP/SSL explicit, FTP/SSL implicit,
and SFTP.
FTP is standard File Transfer Protocol.
FTP/SSL explicit is (FTP over SSL – Explicit). Explicit security requires that the FTP client
issues a specific command to the FTP server after establishing a connection to establish
the SSL link.
FTP/SSL implicit is (FTP over SSL – Implicit). Implicit is a mechanism by which security is
Automatically turned on as soon as the FTP client makes a connection to an FTP server.
SFTP is (SSH File Transfer Protocol) also known as Secure FTP. It encrypts commands
and data both, preventing passwords and sensitive information from being transmitted
in the clear over a network.
FTP Host – Enter in the EPA’s FTP address provided to you by the EPA. For AIRNow it should be
ftp.airnowdata.org.
Directory – Enter in the path of the destination directory provided to you be the EPA. To test
the transfer to make sure it is working correctly, use incoming/data/AQCSV_Test. Do not put a
forward slash at the end of the path.
93
User Name – Enter in the User ID, SHOperator, which is provided to you by the EPA.
Enable – Click the enabled box to enable the transfer program to function.
Port – Enter in port 21 as required by the EPA.
AIRNow – Click the AIRNow box for the report being transferred to be in the AIRNow format.
Agency – Enter in the Agency Code provided to you by the EPA.
Set User Password button – When selecting this button it brings up a password box where you
enter and re-enter in your password, Navi7r, which is provided by the EPA, for confirmation.
94
4.11 Frequency Distribution Editor
To setup the percentage distribution, expand Report Configurations from the Configuration Editors
menu and single click the Frequency Distribution Editor. The Frequency Distribution Editor tab will open
on the right side of the screen. As frequency programs are added they will appear in the Program
column on the left of the setup screen.
To add a new frequency program, select the New button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank
fields on the right side of the screen.
To open an existing frequency program, single click the program name in the Programs column to bring
up the program settings on the right side of the screen.
To delete an existing frequency program, single click the program name in the Programs column that
you want to remove. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make
sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the program is immediately remove from
the list.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Frequency Distribution Editor, select the disk
icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.
General section
Program Name – Enter in a name to identify the frequency program.
Parameter Template – Click the down arrow and select a parameter that has a parameter
template created for it, from the drop down a list that is to be used for this program.
Lowest <= through Range 9> – Has two columns; Freq Distribution % and Concentration
Distribution. The data that falls into each row show that percentage of data was the particular
value or less for the particular channel. Rows 1 - 9 of which 10.00 is the 10% column. Under the
10% is .001. What this means is that 10% of the data or less was .001 out of the 734 samples
that were taken for a site, which helps users analyze their data by breaking it down into
percentages.
Freq Distribution % column – Ranges that will be used in the calculation of and displayed on the
Frequency Distribution report.
Concentration Distribution column – Ranges that will be used in the calculation of and
displayed on the Concentration Distribution report.
95
96
4.12 E-mail Alarm Trigger Editor
This editor is used to email alarm information that is attached to the data as it is retrieved to an email
address of your choosing. Once that you have set up the email alarm trigger, you can setup the email
addresses that you want to have the email sent to, which is located under Notification Subscriptions
under Configuration Editors.
To setup alarm triggers, single click E-mail Alarm Trigger Editor from the Configuration Editors menu.
The E-mail Alarm Trigger Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen. As alarm triggers are added
they will appear in the Alarms column on the left of the setup screen.
To add a new alarm trigger, select the New Trigger button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank
fields on the right side of the screen.
To open an existing alarm trigger, single click the alarm trigger name in the Alarms column to bring up
the alarm trigger setting on the right side of the screen.
To delete an existing alarm trigger, single click the alarm trigger name in the Alarms column that you
want to remove. Select the Delete Trigger button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to
make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the alarm trigger is immediately
removed from the list.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Alarm Trigger Editor, select the disk icon on
the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the settings before exiting this screen.
Alarm Criteria section
Alarm Name – Enter in the name you want to identify the alarm trigger.
Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the data type from the drop down list that
will be affected by the trigger.
Enabled – Click to put a check in the box to enable the alarm trigger to function within the
software only.
Site - Click the down arrow and select the site from the drop down list that will be affected by
the alarm trigger.
Alarm On, Parameter and Description – Click to put a check in the box beside of the parameter
you want to select to be affected by the alarm trigger.
Trigger, Flag, and Description – Click to put a check in the box beside of the flag that is to be
attached to the data to trigger the alarm.
Inhibit, Flag, and Description – Click to put a check in the box beside of the flag that is to be
attached to the data to keep the trigger flag from triggering the alarm. This means that both the
trigger flag and the inhibit flag have to be attached to the data on the same interval.
97
Email Notification section
Subject and Message –The text that you want to be included in the subject line and the
message body of the email being sent out.
Tag Email as Urgent – Click to put a check in the box to enable the urgent tag to be attached to
the email being sent.
Generate Log Book Entry – Click to put a check in the box to have the alarm to create a logbook
entry when triggered. The entry will be similar format to what is sent out in the email.
For any flag that has been selected in an alarm that uses limits to decide if the flag is attached to the
data, is controlled by the logger. So the limit for the flag(s) has to be setup on the specific parameter(s)
in the logger as well as in the Data Source Details setup in the software.
These alarms can only be ran automatically against the data once the data has been polled and written
to the database. To setup the Task Scheduler to process these alarms refer to Chapter 4.16.1.e Adding
an Alarm Processing task.
To setup the recipient’s email refer to Chapter 4.13 Email Notification Subscriptions.
98
4.13 E-mail Notification Subscriptions
To setup email notifications, single click Notification Subscriptions from the Configuration Editors menu.
The Notification Subscriptions tab will open on the right side of the screen that has two columns. In the
left column are the different programs that have been configured, and the right column has group
names or user names and emails.
To setup the alarm triggers to be emailed locate Alarms at the top of the left column, and it should have
the alarms that have been configured listed below Alarms. Select the alarm program from the list by
clicking it once to highlight the name. From the user list in the right column find the user and click the
name to highlight the row then click the bottom button in the middle column that states << Subscribe
User. This will put that user under the alarm name that was selected. To assign a group follow the same
steps except select the top button in the middle column that states << Subscribe Group.
To setup the reports to be emailed locate Reports at the bottom of the left column, and it should have
the reports that have been configured listed below Reports. To setup the ADVP rule triggers to be
emailed locate ADVP Rules in the middle of the left column, and it should have the rules that have been
configured below ADVP Rules. Repeat the same steps for the reports and ADVP rules as explained for
the alarm triggers to set them up.
To remove a user from a program, single click the user you want to remove and click the middle button
in the middle that states Remove Subscriber >>, and it will remove the user from the left column.
If a notification has a green check on the envelope it is enabled. To disable it, select the notification and
click the Notifications Enabled button on the Ribbon at the top and it will put a red circle with a white
dash through the middle on the envelope in the place of the green check. To re-enable the notification,
click the Notifications Enabled button again and it will remove the red circle and put the green check
back on the envelope.
Any other programs that show in the notification setup screen use the same steps for setting them up
for email sending as well.
For AirVision to be able to send emails, it has to be configured to use the email server. This is covered in
Chapter 4.14 Server Configuration.
99
NOTE: In order for the user names and their email addresses to show up in the Notification
Subscriptions screen they have to be setup as a user in the User Editor under Security located in the
Configuration Editors. The User Editor setup is covered in Chapter 10 Security.
If you have setup multiple email addresses for a single user, only the main email address will show in the
user list in the Notification Subscriptions screen. The user name and main email name will get assigned
to each active notification that you have selected for that user. The email that will receive each
notification selected will be the main email as well as the additional email address that was enabled for
that notification in the User Editor under Security.
100
4.14 Server Configuration
To setup the server configuration, single click Server Configuration from the Configuration Editors menu.
The Server Configuration tab will open on the right side of the screen. This tab has a tree menu that
expands each System’s Executive (or PC’s) and their communication routes once they have been
created. Expand each Executive to show the comm routes and service configuration. If the database is
on the same pc as the executive, the executive name will be the name of the pc. Each setup is described
below.
4.14.1 Executive
An Executive represents an instance of a computer running the AirVision Server process within its
operating system. An Executive represents a point that a Client can log into, and also a point where one
or more of the background AirVision processes can run.
By default, a single executive running all processes is installed whenever the server is installed with an
empty database. If the database already exists with an executive, no new executives are created.
Two executives cannot be ran on the same server. To use a second executive to help with resources a
second server will be needed, which also will require a second license that will need to be purchased
from Agilaire LLC. To add a second executive, single click the System in the tree then select the Add
Executive button on the Ribbon at the top. It will bring up a New Executive Options box where the
Name for the executive will default to the pc name but can be changed. All of the Services listed will be
selected. To deselect an item simply click the box beside of the service to remove the check mark. The
services that are selected will show up under Service Configuration in the tree menu or under the
Service Components tab as Plugin services.
To add or remove these settings to existing executive, single click the executive under the System in the
tree menu and select Configure Executive from the Ribbon at the top.
To open an existing executive, double click the Executive name below the System in the tree menu. The
Executive tab will open on the right side of the screen with two tabs that are described below.
To delete an existing executive, single click the Executive name in the tree menu that you want to
remove. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure
101
you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the Executive or select Cancel
to stop the deletion and retain the Executive.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Server Configuration, select the disk icon on
the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.
Executive tab
General tab
Executive Information section
Executive Name – The default is the pc’s name.
Executive Description – The default is Executive on the pc listed in the Executive Name
field, unless it is a new entry then this field will be blank.
Network Address – The default is the pc’s name.
Network Protocol – The default is TCP and should remain at the default. The other
option is HTTP and is a place holder in the software for possible future development.
Port – This port is what the client software uses to communicate with the server
software whether they are both installed on the same pc or on separate pc’s. The
default is 9885 and although the field allows you to change the port number it needs to
remain at the default setting in order for the client and server to communicate.
Service Components tab – To enter in a new service component select the blank row with the asterisk,
and click the down arrow under Plugin to select one of the options from the list. The options in the list
are described below. These options are needed for the scheduled programs and all should remain
enabled.
Enabled – Check the box for selected service to function on this server. If the box is checked it
means that the service is configured. You can disable specific services instead of deleting them,
for example, if you wanted to temporarily turn off one of the services because another server
was going to run that service for a short time.
102
Auto Start – Check the box for the selected service to be running on startup. In most cases this
needs to be set to True, but there are some cases where it can simply call the service when it is
needed. For example Data Access can be set for False, and it will simply be invoked whenever
someone requests data. However, things like the polling and file processing need to be set to
True. As a general rule this column should always be set to True unless directed otherwise.
Start Order – This controls which order the services are started. Enter in the field the order
number in which you want the selected service to run. For the polling related services you need
to make sure the Communication Router is started first before the services that need
communication.
4.14.2 Comm Routes
To add comm routes, single click the Executive name under System in the tree menu. There are three
communication routes that can be added from the Ribbon above the Main Navigation menu. TCP Route
for connection via a TCP/IP connection, Serial Route for direct connection, and Modem Route from the
Central to each of the loggers that use dial up modems.
4.14.2.a Serial Route
To add a serial connection or comport connection, single click the Executive under System in the tree
menu and select the Add Serial Route button on the Ribbon at the top. The COM tab will open on the
right side of the screen.
Note: A serial route configured on its own is also considered a direct connect for a connection between
the PC and the logger using a 9 pin to 9 pin null modem cable. Once a modem is configured on the
comport it can no longer be used as a direct connect, and a phone line and modems must be used to
communicate between the PC and the logger.
To open an existing COM, expand the Executive and Comm Routes in the tree menu and double click on
the COM. The COM tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To delete an existing COM, expand the Executive and Comm Routes in the tree menu. Single click the
COM you want to delete and select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by
asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the COM
or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the COM.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Server Configuration, select the disk icon on
the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
COM tab
General tab
Serial Connection Details section
103
Route Name – Enter in the name you want to give the comm port.
Comm Port – Enter in the actual comm port number. Example: COM1.
Baud Rate – Enter in the speed the central modem and port should be talking at. The
default 9600 is the rate for communicating with the 8816’s and 8832’s.
Data Bits – Default and setting for best results is 8.
Stop Bits – Default and setting for best results is 1.
Parity – This setting if for RS232 and the default is set to None. We recommend leaving
it at the default for the best performance.
Advanced section
Read Timeout – The timeout used when trying to read the response before it deems the
response empty and gives up. If the field is left blank it defaults to 60 seconds.
Recommendation is to leave the field blank.
Write Timeout – The amount of time to allow for sending (writing) data to the device. If
the field is left blank it defaults to 60 seconds. Recommendation is to leave the field
blank.
Disconnect After - The amount of time that should pass before disconnecting in the
event that the communication connection has timed out.
Inter-byte Delay (ms) - The amount of time command strings communications will be
sent to the logger or instrument with the specified gap between each character. This
setting does not affect the responses from the logger or instrument. This will help any
sites that drop characters if the command is sent too fast. If the field is blank, it defaults
to being null and the entire string will be sent at once. If the field is set to zero, then
each character is sent individually with zero milliseconds between them.
104
4.14.2.b Modem
To add a modem for the comport, single click the COM under the Comm Routes in the tree menu and
select the Add Modem button on the Ribbon at the top. The Modem tab will open on the right side of
the screen.
To open an existing modem, expand the Executive, Comm Routes, and the COM in the tree menu and
double click on the modem. The Modem tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To delete an existing modem expand the Executive, Comm Routes, and the COM in the tree menu.
Single click the modem you want to delete and select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will
prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue
deleting the modem or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the modem.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Server Configuration, select the disk icon on
the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
If a site needs to be forced to use a low baud rate different than the other sites, a second modem can be
attached to the same comport in the software, even though there is only one physical modem
connected to the PC. In the modem profiles define a max baud rate for that modem type. Then when
defining the modem route to the slow site, select the Preferred Baud Rate to the slow speed.
Modem tab
Modem Details section
Modem Name – Enter in the name you want to give the modem.
Modem Type – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which modem you are
using. If your exact modem is not listed select the closest model in the list to the modem that
you have.
Enabled – Check the box to enable this modem to be available for use.
105
4.14.2.c Modem Route
To add a modem route or phone line for the modem to use, single click the Executive under System in
the tree menu and select the Add Modem Route button on the Ribbon at the top. The MOD tab will
open on the right side of the screen.
To open an existing modem route, expand the Executive and Comm Routes in the tree menu and double
click on the modem route. The Modem Route tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To delete an existing modem route, expand the Executive and Comm Routes in the tree menu. Single
click the modem route you want to delete and select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will
prompt you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue
deleting the modem route or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the modem route.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Server Configuration, select the disk icon on
the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
MOD tab
General tab
Modem Connection Details section
Route Name – Enter in the name you want to give the route.
Phone Number – Enter in the phone number of the modem at the logger it is to connect
to.
Modem – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the modem you set
up on the Modem setup screen to use to connect to the logger. Use any available
modem should only be selected if there is actually multiple modems connected to
multiple comports.
Preferred Modem Baud Rate – This field becomes available when Use any available
modem is selected in the Modem field. This field defaults to Any, but is recommended
to set it to the baud rate used for the particular sites the particular route was create for.
Redialing Options section
Redial Attempts – Defaults to 1. Use the radio buttons to select the number of
attempts to make a connection with the logger modem. NOTE: All of the retries
throughout the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the
automatic polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to
pass up a site that may not be communicating during the particular poll.
106
Time Between Redial Attempts - Use the radio button to select the amount of time, or
highlight the value and type in the needed time; click the down arrow and select from
the drop down list the type of time. The options are Seconds, Minutes, Hours, and Days.
Advanced Options section
Override Serial Baud Rate – Defaults to Use default, which means it will use the baud
rate that was set on the modem setup screen. If a baud rate is selected it will be used
instead of the baud rate set on the modem setup screen.
Override Serial Read Timeout – If this field is set, this setting will be used rather than
the Read Timeout setting for the timeout that is used when trying to read the response
before it deems the response empty and gives up. If this field is left blank and the Read
Timeout is set it will use the Read Timeout setting. If the Read Timeout is left blank then
it will default to 60 seconds.
Override Serial Write Timeout – If this field is set, this setting will be used rather than
the Write Timeout setting for the amount of time to allow for sending (writing) data to
the device. If this field is left blank and the Write Timeout is set it will use the Write
Timeout setting. If the write Timeout is left blank then it will default to 60 seconds.
Connection Timeout – The amount of time that should pass before disconnecting in the
event that the communication connection has timed out.
Hang-up Idle Time – Defaults to 5 seconds. Use the radio button to select the amount
of time, or highlight the value and type in the needed time; click the down arrow and
select from the drop down list the type of time. The options are Seconds, Minutes,
Hours, and Days.
Recommendation is to increase the time to make sure that the connection is not
disconnection prematurely. If the logger has a delayed response time coupled with the
short idle time could cause the connection to be terminated before the logger has time
to understand the string and then send back a response.
107
Devices tab – This is used to assign the route to a specific site. Click the Add Device Route
button at the bottom and it will put a new entry at the top. Click the down arrow at the right
end of the new entry under the Source column and select which site the route is to be assigned
to. Set the priority to 1 for the first entry, and check the boxes for polling and emulation. If
another site connection is set up, set the priority to 2. Never leave any of the priority fields set
to 0.
4.14.2.d TCP Route
To add a TCP connection, single click the Executive under System in the tree menu and select the Add
TCP Route button on the Ribbon at the top. The TCP tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To open an existing TCP route, expand the Executive and Comm Routes in the tree menu and double
click on the TCP route. The TCP tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To delete an existing TCP route, expand the Executive and Comm Routes in the tree menu. Single click
the TCP route you want to delete and select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt
you by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting
the TCP route or select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the TCP route.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Server Configuration, select the disk icon on
the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
TCP tab
General tab
TCP Connection Details section
Route Name – Enter in the name you want to give the route name.
Enabled – Check the box to enable the TCP connection for use.
Network Address – Enter in the required IP address.
Polling port – The default is 9881, and is required by the logger as it is part of the
logger’s code. Although the field allows you to change the port number, it needs to
remain at the default setting in order for the logger to communicate with the automatic
or manual polling.
Emulation Port - The default is 9887, and is required by the logger as it is part of the
logger’s code. Although the field allows you to change the port number, it needs to
remain at the default setting in order for the logger to communicate through the link to
logger function.
108
Read Timeout – The timeout used when trying to read the response before it deems the
response empty and gives up. If the field is left blank it defaults to 60 seconds.
Recommendation is to leave the field blank.
Write Timeout – The amount of time to allow for sending (writing) data to the device. If
the field is left blank it defaults to 60 seconds. Recommendation is to leave the field
blank.
Disconnect After – The amount of time that should pass before disconnecting in the
event that the communication connection has timed out.
Inter-byte Delay (ms) – The amount of time command strings communications will be
sent to the logger or instrument with the specified gap between each character. This
setting does not affect the responses from the logger or instrument. This will help any
sites that drop characters if the command is sent too fast. If the field is blank, it defaults
to being null and the entire string will be sent at once. If the field is set to zero, then
each character is sent individually with zero milliseconds between them.
Devices tab – This is used to assign the route to a specific site. Click the Add Device Route
button at the bottom and it will put a new entry at the top. Click the down arrow at the right
end of the new entry under the Source column and select which site the route is to be assigned
to. Set the priority to 1 for the first entry, and check the boxes for polling and emulation. If
another site connection is set up, set the priority to 2. Never leave any of the priority fields set
to 0.
4.14.3 Service Configuration
To add Service Configurations they have to be selected when the Executive is configured, or by single
clicking the Executive, then selecting the Configure Executive button on the Ribbon at the top and
selecting the options from the list. The options that appear under Service Configuration are the Email
Service, Import Service, Logger Driver, and Instrument Manager. The Logger Driver can have a logger
added from the Ribbon above the Main Navigation menu, as well as the Instrument Manager can have
an instrument added.
109
4.14.3.a Email Service
To open the existing email service, expand the Executive and Service Configuration by clicking in the tree
menu and double click on the Email Service. The Email Service tab will open on the right side of the
screen.
To delete the existing email service, expand the Executive and Service Configuration in the tree menu.
Single click the Email Service and select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you
by asking if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select OK to continue deleting the
email service, select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the email service.
Email Service
Email Service tab
Email Setup section
SMTP Server – The defaults to the name of the executive, but can also be changed to
the email domain address or the IP address of the email server.
Port – Enter in the port number the email server uses.
From address – Enter in the address that is to show as the sender on the email. This
field needs to be in the format of an email address.
Example: AirVision@agilairecorp.com
Send email per recipient – Check the box if you want the email to be sent to each email
that has been setup in the Notification Subscriptions setup screen.
Failed Email Retry Interval – If the original email fails to send and you want it to be sent
again enter in the interval, which is in seconds, on how long to wait in between retries.
Retry Attempts – Use the radio buttons to select or click in the field or type in how
many times you want the email to try to send.
Polling frequency (sec) – Use the radio buttons to select or click in the field or type in
how many seconds you want the email service to look for anything to send. This feature
will run throughout the whole day as long as the AirVision Server service is running.
Authentication Required – If this box is checked the below mentioned fields will show
on the screen.
Enable SSL/TLS – Click to put a check in the box to enable is a certificate of
authentication for security that requires password.
110
Authentication Criteria section
Username – If the email server requires a username to allow emails to be sent, enter
the username into this field.
Password – If the email server requires a password along with the username to allow
emails to be sent, enter the password into this field.
Domain (if needed) – Enter in the domain name if it is required by the email server to
allow emails to be sent.
4.14.3.b Import Service
The Import service works in conjunction with the direct polling of an instrument, which is an optional
module that does not come with the standard software package and has to be purchased in addition to
the standard software package.
To add an import service, double click Import Service in the tree menu. The Import Service tab will open
on the right side of the screen. Then select the Site Mapping button at the bottom and it will put a
blank row on the right side of the screen with blank fields that are explained below.
To open the existing import service, expand the Executive and Service Configuration in the tree menu
and double click on Import Service. The Import Service tab will open on the right side of the screen.
Single click the blue square on the left side of the import template source to highlight the row that you
want to make changes to.
To delete the existing Import Service, expand the Executive and Service Configuration in the tree menu.
Single click the blue square on the left side of the source to highlight the row you want to delete, and
select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking if you are sure you want
to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the import service or select Cancel to
stop the deletion and retain the import service.
Import Service
Import Service tab
111
Folder Root (leave null for default): - This is the root folder the import service watches. Any
source mappings with relative folder paths will be rooted here. By default it is empty, which
means it will use the default of C:\AVServerData\DataFiles. Each mapping entry maps a source
to a file import template, and specifies which folder and what types of files to watch for. If the
folder path is empty, then the service looks under the <RootFolder>\<SourceName> folder for
files. If the folder path is an absolute path (e.g. C:\test\data), then the root folder doesn't affect
it. If the folder path is a relative path (e.g. test\data), then the service looks under
<RootFolder>\test\data for the files.
Site – Click the down arrow on the right end of the field and from the drop down list select the
site the import is coming from.
Import Template – Click the down arrow on the right end of the field and from the drop down
list select the format of the file being imported.
Enabled – Click to put a check in the box to enable the setup of the import to be used by the
software.
Filename Pattern – The filename pattern can be *.*, or something more specific like *.rsp, or
even more specific than that, like "SITE1LABDATA*.csv", etc . Leaving the field blank is the same
as typing in *.*. This is the same as using the command prompt and doing a "dir for a type of
file.
Folder Path – This field should remain blank unless you are polling data straight from an
instrument and running into errors. Have the data dropped into a folder and configure the
source mapping to have the import to look in that folder so it can import the data.
4.14.3.c Logger Driver
To open an existing logger driver, expand the Executive and Service Configuration in the tree menu and
double click on the Logger Driver. The Logger Driver tab will open on the right side of the screen.
Logger Driver
Logger Driver tab
Logger Driver Details section
112
Emulation Server – The default is enabled and the port is set to 9886, and although the
field allows you to change the port number, it needs to remain at the default setting in
order for the server to communicate with the database.
4.14.3.d Instrument Manager
Before the Instrument Manager can be used to poll an instrument directly a license from Agilaire LLC for
Direct Instrument Polling is required.
To setup an instrument for direct polling refer to Chapter 13.7 Instrument Polling Setup.
113
4.15 Modem Types
To open Modem Types, single click Modem Types from the List Editors menu. The Modem Types tab
will open on the right side of the screen.
The Modem Types has been pre-set with a large number of different modems. However, if you need to
add additional modems, click the row with the Asterisk symbol (*) at the bottom of the Modem Types
screen, and the row will highlight and indicate which fields are required to be filled in. After filling in the
needed fields, single click one of the existing modems and the new entry will attach as the bottom row.
To make changes to an existing modem, single click the blue square on the left side of the modem name
to highlight the row, then make the correction to the particular field needing the change.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Modem Types, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
Research for the modems has been done and the settings have been set for the specific requirements
for each modem and should remain with the default settings, especially if the user is unsure of what any
of the settings for any of the modems need to be set to.
Modem Description – The name and type of modem.
BPS – The baud rate the modem communicates at.
Command Mode String – If the modem you are using requires a string to operate in command mode
enter in the string in this column.
Guard Time (ms) –Configures how much time it should wait after data transmission to look for modem
control commands.
Dial Command String – If the modem you are using requires a string to dial enter in the string in this
column.
Hangup Command String – For the existing modems this column is defaulted with the hangup strings
already set. The default for a logger to hangup with a modem is usually ATH.
Online Mode String – Defines what the modem requires to put it into "online mode". If left empty the
default being used is ATO1, which is what the majority of modems use. This field should always be left
blank unless specified in the requirements for the modem itself.
Initialization String – For the existing modems this column is defaulted with the strings already set. For
any modem that you may add to the list this initialization string will have to be provided by the manual
that came with the modem.
114
115
4.16 Task Scheduler
To setup the scheduler, single click Task Scheduler from the Configuration Editors menu. The Task
Scheduler tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To add a new task, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list will open with jobs
and tasks to select from, each are described below. You can also add a new task by using the wizard. To
run the wizard, select the Run Schedule Wizard button on the Ribbon at the top. The manual setup of
each task is explained first and the Schedule Wizard is explained further on in the chapter.
To open an existing task, single click the blue square on the left side of the task name in the Description
column to highlight the row. The settings for the selected task will open in the gray area at the bottom
of that screen. To run that task immediately, select the Execute Scheduled Task Now button on the
Ribbon at the top.
To delete an existing task, single click the blue square on the left side of the task name in the Description
column to highlight the row you want to remove. Select the Delete Scheduled Item button on the
Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you before delete but simply remove the entry.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
4.16.1 Setting up the Task Scheduler Manually
When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task
Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the
Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section at the
top.
Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.
Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you
want to handle running the task.
116
Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start
running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The
default is the current date and time that you create the task.
Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and
select how often the task is to run.
Advanced button – Click the Advance button to open the Schedule Details screen, which will
allow the user to set a task to run at specific times or on specific days. The Task Information
section should keep defaulted information, as this is duplicate information of the Task Schedule
Details section from the previous page defining how the task is to run. The Days to Run section
allows the user to select what days the task is to run on, or deselect the days the task should not
run. The Time of Day Restriction section can be set to Unrestricted to run at the selected
interval for the days selected throughout the whole twenty four hours each day, or it can be set
to Run only between specific hours for the selected interval for the days selected.
Under Task Details section, the Basic Task Information section under the General tab and the Advanced
tab are the same for all tasks as described below.
Task Details Section
General Tab
Basic Task Information section
Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list,
which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection
section at the top unless given a different name by the user.
117
Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the
scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.
Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.
This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled
Task Selection section at the top.
Advanced Tab
Retry Options section
Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number of time
you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the retries throughout
the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic
polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a
site that may not be communicating during the particular poll. It is recommended that
this field remain set to 0.
Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the
down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries should be.
Status Logging section
Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the
degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount of information
it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the level the larger the log
will become and the more hard drive space it will take up.
Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom,
and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.
Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the
drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed to users.
Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.
Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.
118
4.16.1.a Adding a Fill Average Data Gaps Task
Previously this task allowed blank records to be created as place holders in the database where gaps in
the data may have occurred in any previous poll, so that if the data needs to be hand entered the
Average Data Editor will be able to bring up the blank cells. This process is now handled virtually in
memory instead of with records that are stored in the database. This saves space in the database,
improved data load times, and removes the need to have a scheduled task to fill the gaps. The way it
now functions is if any of the blank intervals are edited the application will create the needed entry in
the database at that time. So this task no longer needs to be scheduled to run automatically in the
scheduler.
4.16.1.b Adding a Logger Poll Task
Logger Poll Options section
Logger - Click the down arrow and select the logger from the drop down list that you want to
retrieve the data from.
Logger Command - Click the down arrow and select the type of data from the drop down list
that you want to retrieve from the logger.
Average Interval - Click the down arrow and select the interval type for the data from the drop
down list that you want to retrieve from the logger.
119
4.16.1.c Adding a AIRNow FTP Transfer Task
AIRNow FTP Transfer Task Options section
FTP Configuration – Click the down arrow and select the transfer program from the drop down
list that you previously created under the AIRNow/FTP Setup screen.
System – Click the down arrow and select the system from the drop down list that this report is
for.
Transfer Format – Click the down arrow and select from the list which AIRNow report format is
going to transferred; OBS for the original format, or AQCSV for the new format. This new
selection eliminates the need to set up the new format as a scheduled report to be transferred
Data Availability Options
Wait until at least __ % of the data is available – Use the radio buttons or type in the
field the percentage that you want the data to be completed before it creates the file.
Setting this field causes a check to be done of defined sites and parameters to see if
they are available in the database and if not it will retry before trying to transfer the
report. If the check fails it will not transfer the report, so to make sure a report gets
transferred every hour it is best to set two transfers in a group task, explained further
into the chapter, one with the percent blank and one with the percent filled in.
4.16.1.d Adding a Scheduled Report Task
Report Task Options section
Report – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list of reports which report you
want this task to automatically run.
Configure Report Query button – Clicking this button will bring up a Query Designer screen.
Click Ok at the bottom of the screen to save the settings. If no settings are selected on this
screen, then the default selection for the report will be all of the sites and parameters that are
enabled and qualify for the type of report selected.
120
Date Range Selection section
Current Day, Month, Quarter, Week, and Year – Does not use the date and look
back fields and simply uses the current date range that is selected.
Fixed Date Range – Use the radio buttons or type in the Start and End Date
fields the date range this report is include data.
Last Month, Quarter, and Week, and Yesterday – Does not use the date and
look back fields and simply uses the previous date range that is selected from
the current date.
Lookback Days, Hours, and Minutes – Use the radio buttons or type in the Look
Back Intervals field the number of days you want to the report to go back to and
get data from.
Yesterday – Automatically selects the day before the current day.
Parameter Selection section – Select the site and parameter that is to be included on
this report.
Average Interval section – Select the type of data that is to be included on this report.
Query String section – Shows the string being used to create this report. If you use the
Clear Selection button it will remove the string and it cannot be brought back without
being manually typed in or the task deleted and recreated.
Query Option Switches section - Depending on the report will depend on if this field will
be accessible. Some of the reports have extra check boxes to allow more information to
be turned in the report, like it does in some of the manual reports.
121
Output Options section
Printer Options tab
Enable Printing – Check the box to enable printing to a printer that the AirVision Server
pc sees as one of its printers. Printers seen only by an AirVision Client pc cannot be used
to print to as the Client is not the software controlling the printing.
Printer Path – If you have enabled printing to a printer, enter in the path to the printer
you want the report to automatically print to. This is the UNC printer path (Uniform or
Universal Naming Convention). The printer does have to be connected to the PC where
AirVision Server is installed, either directly connected, or connected through the
network. If the report is not setup to be printed to a printer, it will need to be setup to
enable the notification so that the report can be setup to be sent out by email, or sent
out by ftp, or written to the hard drive. Otherwise the report will not be generated and
it will give an error in the Log Viewer that the report has not been given a destination.
Notification Options tab
Enable Notifications – Check the box to enable if you want this report to show in the
Notification Subscriptions editor.
Notification Context Description: - Enter in the name of the report the way you want it
to show in the Notification Subscription editor. The default name is New scheduled
report. If you setup more than one report and they all have been left with the default
name, there will be no way to distinguish which report is which in the Notification
Configuration screen, so naming them uniquely is recommended.
122
File Output Options tab
Output File Type – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the file
format type the report is to be exported to.
File Name Construction section
File Output Base Name – Enter in the name that is to be assigned to the file
when it is saved.
File Extension – This field will automatically be filled in when the Output File
Type is selected.
Append Date to File Name section
Append Date to Name – Click to check the box if the date is needed to
be appended to the file name.
Date Format – Enter in the format of the date that is to be appended to
the file name. The default is yyyyMMddHHmm for a four digit year, two
digit month, two digit day, two digit hour, and two digit minute.
Save File Options section
Save Reports to File Enabled – Click to check the box if the report is to be saved
to a file.
File Output Path – Click the Browse at the end of the field to bring up a Browse
for Folder and select the path to the destination folder to where the file is to be
save to.
Upload File Via FTP Options section
FTP Upload Enabled – If the report is to be file transferred, click to check the
box to enable the transfer.
FTP Transfer Program – Click the down arrow and select the transfer program
that was previously created under the AIRNow/FTP Setup as to the location the
report is to be transferred to.
123
4.16.1.e Adding an Alarm Processing Task
Alarm Processing Options section
Alarm Rule to Process - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the alarm rule
that was previously created in the Email Alarm Program Editor.
4.16.1.f Adding a Journal Message Purge Task
Agilaire advises to set the purge of the journal at anything older than two weeks, as the log usually is not
beneficial to keep it any longer than two weeks.
Purge Options section
Archive Type – Click the down arrow and select the format you want to archive the data
in.
Purge Data Older Than: - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and time frame you want
the purge to go back to before purging the data. Defaults to two weeks.
Archive Data Before Purging – Click to check this box if you want to archive the data
before purging it, then fill in the Alternate Archive Folder (On Server) field with the
path to the location in which you want the log to be written to.
4.16.1.g Adding a Average Data Purge Task
Purging of data has to be done for more than twenty four hours. If it is set to purge only twenty four
hours the data will not purge.
124
Purge Options section
Archive Type – This field is defaulted to Average Data and cannot be changed.
Purge Data Older Than: - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and time frame you want
the purge to go back to before purging the data. Defaults to three years.
Archive Data Before Purging – Click to check this box if you want to archive the data
before purging it.
Alternate Archive Folder (On Server) – Enter in the path to the location of where the data files
are to be archived. They will be archived in XML format. If the Archive Data box is checked and
this field is left blank the files will be written to the location of C:\Users\Admin\AppData\Local
\Agilaire\AirVision\Server\Archive.
Average Data Purge Options section
Interval to Purge – Click the down arrow and select the data type from the list that is to be
purged.
Retain Readings During Calibration – Check the box if data marked with a C flag for calibration
should not be deleted.
Parameter Selection section – Select between All Parameters or Selected Parameters which will
allow you to pick which parameter to delete the data for.
4.16.1.h Adding a Schedule Command Line Task
Command Line Task Options section
Executable Name – the name of the executable... i.e. notepad.exe
125
Command Line Arguments – whatever the executable needs for argument, i.e. what
would be after the executable on the command line, for notepad it might be –f frog.txt
Success Exit Codes: (Comma Separated) – a command line executable can return a code of
success or failure, typically 0 is success and non 0 indicates an error in execution but it's all
dependent on who wrote the executable.
Kill Process on Timeout – Check this box if you want the process stopped if it times out.
Process Timeout Interval -The scheduler will wait up to X time for the process to finish. If "Kill
Process on Timeout" is checked, the scheduler will actually kill the process. The status of the
task will be failure. If "Kill Process on Timeout" is unchecked, the scheduler will let it continue
running, but it will "detach" it and move on to the next task in the group. In this case the task
status will be warning. Note that if the process time out has been exceeded, then the success
exit codes are ignored.
4.16.1.i Adding SQL Execution Task
SQL Execution Task Information section
SQL Command Text – Type in the command line that will execute the SQL task.
Command Timeout Seconds Override (optional) – Enter in the seconds that you want it to wait
on a timeout before the command is overridden. Defaults to 600.
126
4.16.1.j Adding a New Task Group
Tasks can be defined to run as groups, either in parallel, or sequentially. Task groups can also be run as
sub-tasks of other task groups, in case you need to mix parallel and sequential operation.
Task Groups allow multiple tasks to be group together in one polling process instead of multiple
individual tasks. Tasks can be define to run a groups in parallel, sequentially, or as sub-tasks of other
task groups to allow mixing of parallel and sequential operations.
Add Sub Task button – To add a new sub task to the Task Group click this button and select the task
from the drop down list.
Delete Selected Sub Task button – To remove a task from the Task Group select the task at the bottom
under Sub Task and click the Delete Selected Sub Task button.
Group Options section
Execute Tasks In Parallel – Click to check this box if you want all of the sub tasks to run at the
same time and the execution order to be ignored.
Sub Tasks section
Task Name – Displays the name of the task that was selected from the Add Sub Task button
drop down list.
Task Enabled – Click the check the box to enable the sub task is to run under the Group Task.
Execution Order – Enter in the number to set the order that each sub task is supposed to run.
Fail Group on Error – Click to check this box if you want the whole Task Group to fail or cease to
run, in the case of an error.
Task Type – Indicates the each of the sub tasks are part of one group task.
Edit Task – This is a button that if clicked will bring up another window with the same fields that
are under Task Details on the main Task Scheduler screen.
127
4.16.2 Setting up the Task Scheduler Using the Wizard
To create a task using the wizard, select the Run Schedule Wizard on the Ribbon at the top. This will pop
up a Task Wizard window asking you to create a new task. Follow the steps on each screen. The wizard
can also be ran by selecting Task Wizard from the Utilities menu and it will pop up the wizard in a
separate window.
Click Next to begin the setup through the wizard.
Select the site and logger that is to be polled. Use the Shift key to select more than one site that are in
sequential order, or the Control key to select random sites.
128
Select the type of the data that is to be polled. Use the Shift key to select more than one interval that
are in sequential order, or the Control key to select random intervals.
Enter in the date and time the task is to run, how often it is to run, and which Executive will be running
the task.
Click Next to create the task in the scheduler.
129
After clicking finish the wizard will close and the task will now be showing in the Task Scheduler grid.
4.16.3 Executing a Scheduled Task Manually
To execute a task manually, select the task by single clicking the blue square on the left side of the task
to highlight the row under the Scheduled Task Selection. Then select the Execute Scheduled Task Now
button on the Ribbon at the top. You have to be logged into the server in order for this feature to work.
If you have logged into AirVision as local user it will give a message box stating that it cannot run in local
mode, but only from the server.
Once connected to the server select the Execute Scheduled Task Now button and depending on how
long it takes the task to run will depend on how long you see a progress bar. If it is a short task process,
such as a report, you will just see it blink on the screen; a larger task process will allow the progress bar
to stay up for a few seconds to a few minutes.
To see the task take place open the Log Viewer before executing the scheduled task manually. After
executing the task the status will show as the bottom entry on the Log Viewer.
4.16.4 Editing the Range Time on a Polling Task
The last poll time, or in other words, how far back the poll will ask the logger for data can be changed by
selecting the task that you want to edit then select the Update Task Status button on the Ribbon at the
top. It will bring up an Update Task Status window where you can change the date and/or time, click OK
then click Save before exiting the Task Scheduler.
130
4.17 Report Logo Editor
To setup the report logo, expand Report Configurations from the Configuration Editors menu, and single
click Report Logo Editor. The Report Logo Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen. To add an
image select the Browse for Image button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up an Open box
where you can browse to a location where image files are stored. Select an image and click open for the
image to appear in the Report Logo Image box. Click Save when the desired image has been chosen.
This image will now show at the top of the reports.
To remove the image so that there is no image showing at the top of the reports, select the Clear Logo
Image button on the Ribbon at the top.
131
Chapter 5: Communication
5.1 Linking to Logger
To link to the logger, single click Link to Logger from the Utilities menu. The Link To Logger tab will open
on the right side of the screen with a large black area. At the top of the black area is a blank field with a
drop down area and a Connect button. Click the down arrow on the blank field and select one logger
from the drop down list that you want to connect to, and click the Connect button. The button will then
change to disconnect.
The Server Connection field is defaulted to being selected so that the Telnet connection goes through
the database to connect to the site. This field will remain grayed out for sites using modem or direct
connections, and is only available to be selected or deselected for sites using TCP connections. If
deselected the Telnet connection will go straight to the site without going through the database. Which
means that if the user is using AirVision Client on their PC which is separate from the AirVision Server
PC, then the connection is being made through Telnet on the Client PC only and not from the Server.
When you are finished working in the logger, always select O to log out of the logger before
disconnecting or you could get locked out of the logger for ten minutes or until the logger resets the
connection. Once you have logged out click the Disconnect button to end the connection to the logger.
The logger itself does not support an upload command but it has always had the ability to dump to a file.
The software now has the capability to parse that file and import it into the software. However, the GSI
and Modbus settings cannot be uploaded because of the correlation of the drivers are not known to the
logger in the same way AirVision knows them. These settings will have to be configured manually in the
software.
To upload the configuration from the logger, link to the logger and log in. From the menus select Status
and Dump Setup, then select the Start Recording button on the Ribbon at the top. On the link to logger
132
screen select Dump All to Curr Port and press enter to start the dump process. When the dump has
finished, select the Stop Recording button on the ribbon at the top and it will bring up a save screen.
Give the file a name and select a location for it to be saved to. Press the escape key until you have
returned to the Home Menu, and select O to log out. Click the Disconnect button on the link screen to
completely disconnect from the logger.
To import the information open the Data Source Details screen, expand the site and select the logger,
which has to already exist before the file can be parsed. Then select the Parse Config File button on the
Ribbon at the top. Browse to where the file is stored and double click on the file, or select the file and
click Open. The parsing will then begin and give a status complete when it is finished.
133
5.2 Logger Download
To download settings from the software to the logger, single click Logger Download from the Utilities
menu. The Logger Download tab will open on the right side of the screen.
Site and Source Name – Select the site and source that you want to poll from by clicking the blue square
to the left side of the name to highlight the row. To download to multiple sites use the shift or control
keys while selecting the sites in site and source name list. If using modems you can queue up what you
want to poll, but if using TCP it will connect and collect the data quicker than the task can be queued.
Download Type – Select from the list what you want to download to the logger. To select all types to be
downloaded you can check each of the boxes manually or you can select the Select All Download Types
button on the Ribbon at the top. Selecting the button again will deselect all download types.
Cold Start - Selecting cold start wipes out everything that is currently stored in the logger, the
logger ID included unless set in the EEPROM of the logger. If cold start is selected a disclaimer
will come up warning the user of the potential of wiping out the logger’s ID. If you do not want
to cold start the logger, simple click the enable box again to remove the check and deselect the
option.
NOTE: If you are unsure if the logger ID is set in the EEPROM, link to the logger and check the
first and second screens of the Configure System Parameters menu. Control U will take you to
the second screen of the System Parameters configuration.
Time Sync –Downloads the time from the computer clock running Server to the logger for the
selected site.
Calibrations –Downloads all calibrations that have been configured and enabled in the Data
Source Details screen for the selected site.
Digital I/O labels –Downloads the labels that have been entered in the Data Source Details
screen for the digital input and output lines for the selected site.
Digital Events –Downloads the timed event or triggered event configured and enabled in the
Data Source Details screen for the selected site.
Digital Out –Downloads the digital output line configuration for the timed or triggered event for
the selected site.
Warm Start – Reboots the logger without removing any of the configuration or data.
134
Channels –If this box is checked it will allow you to pick specific channels that you want to
download to the site selected. If the All box is checked it will download all channels that have
been configured and enabled in the Data Source Details screen for the selected site.
Average Alarms –Downloads all alarms configured and enabled in the Data Source Details
screen for the selected site.
Math Constants –Downloads all math constants that have been configured in the Data Source
Details screen, which are mainly used in conjunction with math pack channels, but can be used
for other scenarios.
Modbus Master File – Downloads the Modbus configuration to loggers that have Modbus
enabled.
Details – Allows specific channels to be selected to be download to the site if the Channels box is
checked. This area will be grayed out if the channels All box is checked.
To select everything to be downloaded you can check all of the individual boxes or you can use the
Select All Download Types button on the Ribbon at the top.
To downloaded the selected types to the logger select the Start Download button on the Ribbon at the
top.
To abort the download before it has finished sending the configuration select the Cancel button on the
Ribbon at the top.
The Show Log Viewer and Scroll With Messages buttons are selected by default so the log will appear
at the bottom of the screen to shoe the results of the download. If you do not want to view the log you
can deselect the buttons on the Ribbon at the top.
To clear the results sent back from the logger from the screen select the Clear Results button on the
Ribbon at the top.
The results sent back from the logger will be displayed in detailed columns below the query.
Time Initiated – The time the download was started.
Logger – Indicates which logger is being configured.
Download Type – Indicates what was sent to the logger.
Item Information – This shows the command string being sent and received.
Download Status - Shows the response sent back from the logger and if it was successful.
Download String – Shows the string being sent to the logger.
135
136
5.3 Manual Poll
To run a manual poll, single click Manual Poll from the Utilities menu. The Manual Poll tab will open on
the right side of the screen.
Site and Source Name – Select the site and source that you want to poll from by clicking the blue square
to the left side of the name to highlight the row. Only one site and source can be selected at a time. If
using modems you can queue up what you want to poll, but if using TCP it will connect and collect the
data quicker than the task can be queued.
Data Type – Select the type of data you want to retrieve. To select more than one data type hold down
the Control key while clicking on the data types needing to be polled.
Date Range – Enter in start and end date range of the data that is stored in the logger that you want to
retrieve. The default is the current days date and time when you open the manual poll screen.
Average Interval – Only one average interval can be selected per poll.
To manual poll the selected types from the logger select the Start Manual Poll button on the Ribbon at
the top.
To abort the manual poll before it has finished retrieving the data select the Cancel button on the
Ribbon at the top.
The Show Log Viewer and Scroll With Messages buttons are selected by default so the log will appear
at the bottom of the screen to shoe the results of the download. If you do not want to view the log you
can deselect the buttons on the Ribbon at the top.
To clear the results sent back from the logger from the screen select the Clear Results button on the
Ribbon at the top.
Time Initiated – The time the poll started to contact the logger.
Device – The logger or instrument the poll is connected to.
Type – The type of data the poll is asking for.
Item Information – This shows the command string being sent and received.
Status - Shows the result sent back from the logger, if it was good, successful, or failed with errors.
137
138
5.4 Task Status
To open the task statuses, single click Task Status from the Status Displays menu. The Task Status tab
will open on the right side of the screen. The Task Status gives the status of any task that is scheduled to
run in the Task Scheduler such as polling, printing reports, emailing and ftp transfers, etc.
Refresh Options section
Refresh Status Automatically – Click to check the box if you want the refresh of the statuses to
run automatically.
Refresh Interval: ____Seconds - Used the radio buttons to set how many seconds should pass
before the automatic refresh runs. Default is 30 seconds.
Name – Gives the name of the Executive and the name of the tasks setup for that Executive to handle
and the date and time the task started to run.
Type – Shows if the name is an executive or a task and the type of task.
Status – Shows if the task has completed successfully, with warnings, had an error, if the task is disabled,
or never executed. Status colors indicate:
Green = Task completed successfully.
Yellow = Task completed with warnings.
Orange = Task is currently running.
Red = Critical error was unhandled by the task processor.
Gray = Task is Disabled.
Cream/Tan = Task has Never Executed.
Last Start Time – Shows the date and time when the task last started.
Last End Time – Shows the date and time when the task last ended.
Last Successful Run – Shows the date and time when the task last ran successfully.
Latest Data Time – Shows the date and time that the task has manually been set to for the poll to go
back to that time frame and ask for data. This time frame can be edited by selecting the Update Task
Status button on the Ribbon above the Main Navigation menu.
139
Task Status Message – Shows what an error is or what may have caused the error on a task, or why a
task is disabled.
To view the Journal Message Log for one specific task, without having to run the complete log from the
Reports menu, select the View Log Messages button on the Ribbon above the Main Navigation menu.
This will bring up another window that looks similar to the Log Viewer, that will display the current days
activity.
140
5.4.1 Executing a Scheduled Task Manually
To execute a task manually select the task by single clicking in the tan square on the left side of the task
to highlight the row. Then select the Execute Scheduled Task Now button on the Ribbon at the top.
You have to be logged into the server in order for this feature to work. If you have logged into AirVision
as local user it will give a message box stating that it cannot run in local mode, but only from the server.
To see the task take place open the Log Viewer from the Status Displays menu, before executing the
scheduled task manually. After executing the task the status will show as the bottom entry on the Log
Viewer.
141
Chapter 6: Data Editors
6.1 Query Usage for All Data Editors
Date Ranges – There are several ways to enter in the start and end date range for any of the data
editors.
1. You can click in each division of the date or the time and use the delete key or the backspace
key to remove the existing number and type in a new number.
2. You can highlight the number and type over it, replacing it with a new number.
3. You can click on the number and use the up and down arrows to scroll through the numbers.
4. You can click the larger down arrow at the end of the date and time and it will bring up a
calendar where you can scroll from month to month and click on the date you want to select.
5. You can click the star button and it will bring up another box where you can select from
various ranges to help shorten the time spent in put in the date range you want to see.
Site and Parameter Selection – Select one or more sites and parameters to be shown on the report. To
select multiple row; click and drag down the left side of the columns in the blue squares and each row
will highlight as it is selected. You can also click each row while holding down the Control key, or you
can click the first row you want to start with then hold down the Shift key and click the last row you
want to end with. When right clicking on the selection it will bring up two options of Select All and Clear
All Selections. If multiple fields are selected and the Clear All Selections option is chosen it may not
remove the highlight from the fields but it has deselected the previous choices. If you right click and
choose Select All it will highlight all options.
Average Interval selection – You can only select one interval per generated report. Select the interval
by single clicking the blue square on the left side of the interval for the data type you want to run the
report for. Each interval has its description listed to the right of the interval. The default highlight is on
the hourly interval, but may not necessarily be selected. To make sure the interval is selected by single
clicking on the blue square on the left side of the interval so that the interval and description are
selected with dots around the outer edge of the highlight.
Filters and Sorting are explained in Chapter 3 General Information.
If there is no data to display for the request you made it will give back information below the query in
the Report Errors section giving the time you tried to run the report, and the error level of what type of
error it is giving back to you, and what the error message is.
Keep in mind the more data that you try to retrieve in any of the reports, the longer it will take for the
query to gather the data from the database to display it. If you realize that you selected too large of a
range of data or the wrong date or time frame, just simply close the Data Editor tab and reopen the Data
Editor and enter in the correct query selection.
142
143
6.2 Average Data Editor
To open the data editor, single click Average Data Editor from the Data Editors menu. The Average Data
Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, to open the editor
select the Retrieve Data button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the data below the query.
An example of the editor options are shown below.
Selection Criteria Section
Date Range – Enter in the Start and End Dates for the range of data you want to retrieve. The
date and time will default to the current date and time as of when you open the editor.
Average Interval – Select the interval type and its description for the type of data you want to
retrieve. Only one interval can be selected at a time.
Parameter Selection – Select the site and parameter name you want the data retrieved for. You
can select more than one site and parameter by clicking and dragging, or by clicking while
holding down the shift key. The AQS parameter column simply indicates if the parameter has
been setup for the AQS report.
To retrieve the data click the Retrieve Data button on the left side of the buttons on the button
bar above the Main Navigation menu. The results will be brought up at the bottom under the
query section. To highlight the column you can click and drag down the column or you can click
each row while holding down the shift key.
Site – Shows the site(s) that data has been retrieved for.
Parameter – Shows the parameter(s) the data has been retrieved for.
Average interval – Shows the interval type of data that was retrieved.
Date – Shows the date the data was collected on by the logger.
Value – The data value that was retrieved from the database. To change the value in a cell, double click
the cell, or right click the cell to get a pop-up menu. If the data is bold it means that it has been edited
and doesn’t match the raw data. If the data is in italics it means it has an annotation. If you hover the
mouse over the data value it will show the annotation. This column is only shown with the Linear Data
display.
Raw Value - This column is only shown with the Linear Data display, and cannot be edited in any
manner.
AQS Null Code - This column is automatically shown with the Linear Data display, and shows any null
code that is attached to the data. Click in the cell in this column that you want to add a null code and it
will bring up a Set AQS Null Code box where you can click the down arrow and select a null code from
the drop down list. Click OK to apply the code. The Set AQS Null Code box can also be accessed by right
144
clicking on the cell as well. To see the null code on the Cross-Tab Data or the Matrix Data displays, while
having one of these displays open click the Display NullCode button on the Ribbon at the top.
Flags - This column is only shown with the Linear Data display, and shows any flag(s) that is attached to
the data. Click in the cell in this column that you want to add a flag and it will bring up a Set Data Flags
box where you can check the box beside of the flag(s) needed. Click OK to apply the flag. The Set Data
Flags box can also be accessed by right clicking on the cell as well.
Qualifier Codes - This column is only shown with the Linear Data display. Click in the cell in this column
that you want to add a qualifier code and it will bring up a Set Qualifier Code(s) box where you can check
the box beside of the code(s) needed. Click OK to apply the code. The Set Qualifier Code(s) box can also
be accessed by right clicking on the cell as well.
AQS Method Code - This column is only shown with the Linear Data display, and shows the method
code that is attached to the data. Double click the cell to type in a method code. Click out of the cell to
apply the code. The Set AQS Method Code box can also be accessed by right clicking on the cell as well.
Data Grade - This column is only shown with the Linear Data display, and used only by the ADVP. If you
do not have the ADVP module this column will remain grayed out. Based on the color that has been
assigned to the flag(s) that are attached to the data; data with more than one flag will be displayed as
the highest priority flag color, but a cross-hatching pattern is used to show that more than one flag is
present.
To export the retrieved data to Excel click the Export to Excel button on the left side of the buttons on
the button bar above the Main Navigation menu. This will bring up a save box asking you to give the
Excel file a name. The default location for saving the file is My Documents, but can be change to
another location while the save box is open if you choose to change the location.
There are six different ways to display the data. Each display option will add or remove columns
depending on the choice you make. The default is the Linear Data display. It is also the one that gives
the most columns on the display and the only one that will show the Value (which is the validated data),
Raw Value, AQS Null Code, Flags, and Qualifier Codes columns on the same display.
To edit data using the linear, Cross-Tab, and Matrix displays, click on the cell in the Value column that
you want to edit to select it, then right click on the same cell. This will open a pop-up menu with several
options to select from, which are described below. This pop-up menu can only be used on the Value
column, as the data in the Raw Value column cannot be edited.
145
Restore From Raw – This option will remain grayed out unless the validated value has been changed. If
data has been changed and you need to put it back to the state it was when polled from the logger you
can select this option to copy the raw data over the validated data. Save the changes when the process
is finished.
Restore to Original - If data has been changed and raw data doesn’t exist, this option will allow you to
put the value back to the state it was before the change was made. Save the changes when the process
is finished.
Set to Minimum Detectable Limit – The minimum detectable limit has to be set in the Site/Parameter
setup screen for the parameter that you are editing for this selection to work. If the minimum
detectable is set for the parameter and you want the value for the selected field to be set to the min
detect, then you can select this option to change the value to the limit provided in the setup screen.
Set AQS Null Code – This option opens a Set AQS Null Code box where you can click the down arrow and
it will drop down a list of null codes to select from. To select a code click it once to enter it into the AQS
Code field. Once you selection has been made click Ok and the change will be processed and entered
into the cell in the AQS Null Code column.
Set Qualifier Codes – This option opens a Set Qualifiers Code(s) box where you can select the code and
description that best fits the data by checking the box beside of the desired code.
146
View All Flags – This option opens a Set Data Flags box where you can manually assign a flag to the data
by checking the box beside of the desired flag.
Set Annotations – This option opens a Set Annotation box where the date defaults to the current date
and time. Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the Author User and the Category. If
the category you need is not listed you can add it by selecting the Add button and it will open an
AnotCategory box where you enter in the category name in the field at the bottom and click the Add
button, it will put your entry in the Category list. To delete a category select the name in the list and
click the Delete button and it will simply remove the entry without verifying this is the one you want to
delete. After putting an annotation on the data it will change the font of the value to italic.
Delete Annotations – After selecting data that has an annotation attached to it, this option allows you
to remove the annotation from the data. To disable the ability to delete any annotation that has been
added to the data even when the data has been restored to the original data, close the Average Data
Editor. Enter the below script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool which is located under the
Utilities menu, and select the Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the
bottom section of the tool. Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open
the Average Data Editor and the delete annotation option will be grayed out.
147
update dbo.UtilitySetting setSettingValue=0
where SettingKey=’AnnotationDeletesAreAllowed’
To re-enable the ability to delete annotations follow the same steps as listed above with this script:
update dbo.UtilitySetting setSettingValue=1
where SettingKey=’AnnotationDeletesAreAllowed’
Batch Edit – This option will remain grayed out unless more than one cell is selected at a time. It will
open a Batch Edit box that will give you five options to select from for editing the data. When selecting
from the Navigation list which edit you want to use you will need to check the enable box on the top
right of the screen to enable that feature to allow you to use it.
UpdateValues gives the linear correction formula and can also be used to batch fill in blank fields with a
duplicate value. The cell for the value is the original value in the formula, and if blank is viewed by the
formula as a zero. Zero multiplied by the value entered into the Multiplier field will be zero, then it is
added to the Constant field, so the value put in the cells will be the value that is entered into the
Constant field of the formula.
Set AQS Method Codes allows you to attach the same method code to a large amount of data at once.
Set Annotations, Set AQS Code, Set Qualifier Codes, and Set Flags work in the same manner as
mentioned above except it does it for more than on data value.
Show Children – If you want to show a child parameter you will need to select this option on the child
parameter so that it will retrieve the parent parameter and its data. If you select this option on a parent
parameter that is not a child parameter itself it will give this error: “The selected parameters do not
have Parent Parameter IDs configured”.
Drill-Down Interval – Brings up a new Average Data Editor tab showing how the hourly data went to
minute data.
Export to Excel – This creates a file that can be opened in Excel.
148
Analyze/Export Selected – If selected, a new screen will open where the data can be changed from
Average to Sum, to Min, to Max, and can be exported to a document where it can be saved to a file or
printed.
Copy Selected To Clipboard – This allows the highlighted values to be copied and pasted into another
form such as a Word document or Excel, etc.
Cross-Tab Data – This display gives a Date column and a column for each parameter for each site that
you selected in the criteria. This display only shows the validated data. You also have the ability to right
click on the data cell and get the same options on the pop- up menu as mentioned above, but you can
only see the results of any changes made with those menu options by going back to the Linear Data
display so the extra columns are visible. The order of the columns can be changed by dragging the
column by the column heading and dropping it in the order that you want to see displayed.
Clicking the Display Null Code button on the Ribbon at the top, while in the Cross-Tab editor will show a
Null Code column beside of each value column.
149
Matrix Data – This display gives a Site, Parameter, and Interval columns. To see the data values for each
day and hour click the plus sign on the left side of the site name to expand the matrix grid.
Clicking the Display Null Code button on the Ribbon at the top, while in the Matrix editor will show a
Null Code column beside of each value column.
All of the graphs have a Graph Theme field at the bottom center below the graphs that allows you to
change the color scheme of the graphs, the default is Nature Colors, and the examples below are using
Northern Lights. The color scheme can be changed on one of the graphs and saved and it will follow
through to the other two graphs and will also remain the color scheme for the next time you open the
graphs. The graphs can be exported by selecting the Print button at the bottom of the graphs to open
the print preview window, then selecting the Export button on the Ribbon at the top, select the Export
To button and choose the format time to save the graph to.
Time Series Graph – This display gives a line graph where the scale is displayed on the Y axis and the
date and time is displayed on the X axis. The sites, parameters and interval are displayed over to the
right side with a color chart when the Show Legend box is checked at the bottom left below the graph.
150
When multiple parameters are selected they are shown in different colors. The graph shown below is
with two parameters selected shown in different colors.
When a single parameter is selected the history and statistics settings are activated. The graph shown
below is with one parameter selected.
While still showing the history, the Lookback Count and Gap fields can be set and the graph will give the
original data that was queried as well as the years and days that was entered in the fields. To retrieve
this new setting for the graph click the Refresh button above the graph. The default for the Lookback
Count is years, but it can also be set to months or days. The default for the Lookback Gap is days, but it
can also be set to hours.
To have the statistics displayed along with the original queried data select Show Statistics above the
graph and fill in the Lookback Count and Gap fields, then click the Refresh button and the graph will
151
show the original data along with the minimum, maximum, average, and geometric mean of the original
data on one parameter at a time.
The colored circles on the legend are also buttons that can be clicked to darken a data line on the graph
so that is stands out above the others to be easier. For example, the graph below is the same as the
previous graph above with the exception that the dark blue button beside of the Ozone 001h in the
legend has been selected, which in turn darkened in the original data line on the graph.
This graph shows where the Ozone: Minimum in the legend has been selected.
152
This graph shows where the Ozone: Maximum in the legend has been selected.
This graph shows where the Ozone: Average in the legend has been selected.
This graph shows where the Ozone: Geometric Mean in the legend was selected.
Use Dynamic Scaling simply rescales the graph to show the full scale of the data that you have retrieved.
Display Raw Reading when selected shows the raw data on the graph, and when deselected shows the
validated data.
The time series graph can also be retrieved in a report style by using the Average Data Graph Report
under Average Reports from the Reports menu.
153
To be able to put this graph in a report, it can be ran manually by selecting the Average Data Graph
Report under Average Reports from the Reports menu. If you would like for this process to happen
automatically you can schedule a Report Task and select the Average Data Graph Report from the report
list in the task; and it can be emailed by configuring the Notification Options in the task.
Scatter Plot – Displays values for two variables for a set of data. The data is displayed as a collection of
points, each having the value of one variable determining the position on the horizontal axis and the
value of the other variable determining the position on the vertical axis. This display gives a plotted
graph where the Y axis is a selected site and parameter and the X axis is another selected site and
parameter. Only two parameters can be displayed on this graph at a time, no more and no less. To
change the axis parameters click the down arrow on the right side of each parameter at the top of the
graph and select the other parameter in the list, so the Y parameter can be changed to the X parameter,
and the X parameter can be changed to the Y parameter. Click the Refresh button once the new settings
have been entered to change the graph.
This graph shows the original parameter settings and includes invalid data points shown on the graph
with the red dots.
This graph shows the original parameter settings but without the invalid data points.
154
This graph shows the parameter axes switched and includes the invalid data points.
This graph shows the parameter axes switched but without the invalid data points.
This graph shows both the Y and X axis using the same parameter to make it more defined and includes
the invalid data points.
155
This graph shows both the Y and X axis using the same parameter but without the invalid data points.
Histogram – A bar graph of a frequency distribution in which the widths of the bars are proportional to
the classes into which the variable has been divided and the heights of the bars are proportional to the
class frequencies. This display gives a line graph where the parameter names are not shown. This
graph shows the default scale set for the parameter in the Site/Parameter screen.
This graph shows the Override box checked which allows you to change the Interval Size and to increase
or decrease the size of the graph scale. Click the Refresh button once the new settings have been
entered to resize the graph.
156
6.2.1 Annotate Data
This editor was designed to be used with the Security and Group Permissions system to give limited
access to the data only for the purpose of entering annotation notes. Any annotation added to data in
the Average Data Editor will show in the Annotate Data and vice versa. To add an annotation to the
data right click on a data value in the column on the right and select the Annotate Selected menu, enter
in the memo and save it. Once the annotation has been attached to the data, the data point on the
chart will be larger than all other data points to indicate a memo is attached to it. Move the mouse over
top of the data point and the memo will pop up, as seen in the example below.
157
6.3 Batch Reading Updater
The Batch Reading Editor is a blind edit that mimics the function of the Batch Edit in the Average Data
Editor, but without retrieving data to more quickly edit large sets of data, without seeing the data or the
results of the edit.
To open the batch updater, single click Batch Reading Updater from the Data Editors menu. The Batch
Reading Updater tab will open on the right side of the screen. Make the query selection for which the
edits will be applied, then setup the required information under the Action to Take section.
Action Selection: - When the Batch Reading Updater screen is opened this field defaults to Set Value.
Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the action that is to be taken on the select data
query.
Set Value – To perform the linear equation on existing data the original Value represents the value
located in the data cell which is then multiplied by the Multiplier field, then added to the Constant field.
The calculation will be applied to the query selected once the Apply Action button is selected on the
Ribbon at the top.
To fill in a batch of blank data cells with the same value, the original value represents the empty cell,
which would view as zero. Multiply the zero by the Multiplier field, then add the Constant field, check
the Create Missing Readings box at the bottom of the screen and the result is what will get written into
the fields of the selected query once the Apply Action button is selected.
To apply a progressive slope or intercept to the data check the box to do so.
158
Set Annotation – Applies the annotation to the query selection once the Apply Action button has been
selected.
Set AQS Null Code – Applies the null code to the query selection once the Apply Action button have
been selected.
Set AQS Qualifier Codes – Allows qualifier codes to be set or cleared for the query selection once the
Apply Action button have been selected.
159
Set Method Code – Applies the method code to the query selection once the Apply Action button has
been selected.
Set Reading Flags - Allows flags to be attached or removed for the query selection once the Apply Action
button has been selected.
Set Reading Lock – Allows the ability to lock or unlock data against edits for the query selection once the
Apply Action button has been selected.
160
Set to MDL – Set the data to be set to the minimum detectable limit for the query selection once the
Apply button has been selected.
161
6.4 Purging Data
6.4.1 Purge Average Data
To delete or archive average data, expand Archive/Purge Data from the Utilities menu and single click
Purge Average Data. The Purge Average Data tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making
the query selection to archive or delete data, select the Process Data Archive/Purge button on the
Ribbon at the top. Data that is being purged has to be more than 24 hours. Selecting 24 hours or less
will not purge. An example of the editor options are shown below.
Purge / Archive Date Criteria section
Data Older Than –Use the radio buttons and down arrow to select the time frame of data that
you want to archive or delete that is only older than the time range that you selected. Defaults
to 3 years.
Specific Date Range – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time frame of data that you
want to archive or delete. In order for the purging and archiving to function more than one day
has to be selected so that the hours are more than 24 hours that is being purged or archived,
and the last day will not be included in the files that are archived. For example, if you select to
archive the first five days in a month, the date range entered in would need to start with the
first and end with the fifth of that month. The days archived would be the first through the
fourth, and the fifth would be left out, and a file for each of the four days would be created. If
only one day is selected nothing will happen.
Action to Take section
Archive Data – Creates a zipped file in the destination location provided with the name
ReadingArchiveConfig, along with the type of data that was chosen from the query, such as
001H. for hourly dat, then the year, month, and day.xml.zip. Within the zipped file will be an
XML file with the same name. For example selecting to archive hourly data for a couple days
starting with February 2nd will name the zipped file as such:
ReadingAverageData.001H.20060202.xml.zip, and will name the XML file as such:
ReadingAverageData.001H.20060202.xml. This will allow you to import the xml file back into
the database in the case the data is purged out of the database.
Archive and Purge Data – Creates the file for the archive the same as the example explained for
the Archive Data. The Purge will delete the data from the database except for the ending date
selected, the same as it does with archiving the data.
Purge Data –Deletes the data from the database except for the ending date selected, the same
as it does with archiving the data.
Archive File Location section - Choose from the options of Server or Local, and click the Browse button
to enter in the location of where the archive is to be written to. This option works in conjunction with
the Archive Data and Archive and Purge Data options only.
162
Average Data Selection section
Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the data type from the drop down list of the
data that you want to archive or delete.
Retain Readings During Calibrations – Check this box if data marked with a C flag for calibration
should not be deleted for the time frame selected.
Parameter Selection section
All Parameters – All sites and all of their parameters will be selected by the list being
grayed out so that you cannot select or deselect from the list.
Selected Parameters – The list will come into focus and you can pick and choose the
sites and parameters that you want to delete or archive data for.
Purging average data can also be ran automatically in the Task Scheduler. Refer to Chapter 4.16.1.g for
instructions on how to set up the automatic task.
6.4.2 Average Data Archive Loader
To restore the data to the database, expand Table Import/Export from the Utilities menu and single click
Average Data Archive Loader. The Average Data Archive Loader tab will open on the right side of the
screen. Select the location of where the archive file(s) were stored, and select the date range and type
of data to restore. Select the Load Archive button on the Ribbon at the top to reload the data to the
database
163
6.4.3 Purge Calibration Data
To delete or archive calibration data, expand Archive/Purge Data from the Utilities menu and single click
Purge Calibration Data. The Purge Calibration Data tab will open on the right side of the screen. After
making the query selection to archive or delete data, select the Process Data Archive/Purge button on
the Ribbon at the top. Data that is being purged has to be more than 24 hours. Selecting 24 hours or
less will not purge. An example of the editor options are shown below.
Purge / Archive Date Criteria section
Data Older Than –Use the radio buttons and down arrow to select the time frame of data that
you want to archive or delete that is only older than the time range that you selected. Defaults
to 3 years.
Specific Date Range – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time frame of data that you
want to archive or delete. In order for the purging and archiving to function more than one day
has to be selected so that the hours are more than 24 hours that is being purged or archived,
and the last day will not be included in the files that are archived. For example, if you select to
archive the first five days in a month, the date range entered in would need to start with the
first and end with the fifth of that month. The days archived would be the first through the
fourth, and the fifth would be left out, and a file for each of the four days would be created. If
only one day is selected nothing will happen.
Action to Take section
Archive Data – Creates a zipped file in the destination location provided with the name
ReadingArchiveConfig. along with the type of data that was chosen from the query, such as
001H. for hourly dat, then the year, month, and day.xml.zip. Within the zipped file will be an
XML file with the same name. For example selecting to archive hourly data for a couple days
starting with February 2nd will name the zipped file as such:
164
ReadingCalibrationData.001H.20060202.xml.zip, and will name the XML file as such:
ReadingCalibrationData.001H.20060202.xml. This will allow you to import the xml file back into
the database in the case the data is purged out of the database.
Archive and Purge Data – Creates the file for the archive the same as the example explained for
the Archive Data. The Purge will delete the data from the database except for the ending date
selected, the same as it does with archiving the data.
Purge Data –Deletes the data from the database except for the ending date selected, the same
as it does with archiving the data.
Archive File Location section - Choose from the options of Server or Local, and click the Browse button
to enter in the location of where the archive is to be written to. This option works in conjunction with
the Archive Data and Archive and Purge Data options only.
Calibration Data Selection section
Parameter Selection section
All Parameters – All sites and all of their parameters will be selected by the list being
grayed out so that you cannot select or deselect from the list.
Selected Parameters – The list will come into focus and you can pick and choose the
sites and parameters that you want to delete or archive data for.
165
6.5 Sample Data Editor
The purpose of the Sample Data Editor is to edit non-continuous/24 hour data. To open the data editor,
single click Sample Data Editor from the Data Editors menu. The Sample Data Editor tab will open on the
right side of the screen. If the data does not exist and you need to manually enter the data by selecting
the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. After the needed fields are filled in on the right side of the
screen and the information saved it will populate the list on the left side of the screen.
To bring up previously entered data, make the query selection and select the Retrieve Data button on
the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the data below the query. An example of the editor is shown
below.
To delete a data entry, after retrieving the data, single click the blue square on the left side to highlight
the row. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you
want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the data is immediately remove from the list.
Site – Shows the site(s) that data has been retrieved for.
Parameter – Shows the parameter(s) the data has been retrieved for.
Units - Shows the units for the parameter(s) retrieved.
Sample Time – This is automatically filled in by the query when the date range of the data was selected.
Value – The data value that was retrieved from the database. To change the value in a cell, double click
the cell, or right click the cell to get a pop-up menu. If the data is bold it means that it has been edited
and doesn’t match the raw data. If the data is in italics it means it has an annotation. If you hover the
mouse over the data value it will show the annotation. This column is only shown with the Linear Data
display.
Sample ID – Double click in the field to enter in a user defined code to identify the sample if a code is
needed.
Null Code – Click in the null code field beside of the value that the null code is to be applied to and it will
bring up a Set AQS Null Code box where you can click the down arrow and select a null code from the
drop down list. Click OK to apply the code to the data if it is to be replaced with a null code on the AQS
report. The Set AQS Null Code box can also be accessed by right clicking on the cell as well.
Qualifier Codes – Click in the field and it will bring up a Set Qualifier Code(s) box where you can click in
the check boxes to select the code(s) to apply to the data record being entered. Click OK to apply the
code to the data. The Set Qualifier Code(s) box can also be accessed by right clicking on the cell as well.
Frequency Code – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list how often the sample is
taken.
Duration Code – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the time duration of the
sample taken.
166
Blank Type – Click the down arrow and select from the pop up list which blank filter type applies; FIELD,
LAB, or TRIP.
Method Code – Click in the field to enter in the method code for this parameter that is to be reported
on the AQS report. The Set AQS Method Code box can also be accessed by right clicking on the cell as
well.
Creditable – Check this box if this parameter is a good sample that can be used. If this check box is dark
blue this field is set to Null, if it is checked it is set to Yes, if it is blank it is set to No.
Scheduled – Check this box if this parameter is to be a scheduled sample. If this check box is dark blue
this field is set to Null, if it is checked it is set to Yes, if it is blank it is set to No.
Exclude From Reporting – Check this box if this parameter is not to be reported.
The Sample Details tab at the bottom of the screen shows the same fields and information as it does in
the columns in the middle area of the screen.
All of the fields listed below can be found under the Extended Details tab at the bottom of the screen .
End Time – Enter in the time the sample ended.
Analysis Time – Enter in the time the sample was analyzed, weighed, or counted.
Retrieved Time – Enter in the time the sample was retrieved from the site.
Canister Identifier – Enter in serial number or any other text or numbers that identifies the canister
being used.
167
MDL – Enter in the Minimum Detectable Limit value if one is to be use, otherwise the field can be left
blank.
Uncertainty Value – Enter in a floating point if one is needed.
Tare Weight - If the Sample Value calculator is used the Tare Weight will automatically be filled in.
Final Weight – If the Sample Value calculator is used the Final Weight will automatically be filled in.
Barometric Press – If the Sample Value calculator is used the Barometric Pressure will automatically be
filled in.
Ambient Temp – If the Sample Value calculator is used the Ambient Temp will automatically be filled in.
Total Flow - If the Sample Value calculator is used the Total Flow will automatically be filled in.
If an annotation has been added to the data, it will be displayed under the Annotations tab at the
bottom of the screen.
168
There are five different ways to display the data. Each display option will add or remove columns
depending on the choice you make. The default is the Linear Data display. It is also the one that gives
the most columns on the display.
Another way to edit data using the linear and Cross-Tab displays, click on the cell in the Value column
that you want to edit to select it, then right click on the same cell. This will open a pop-up menu with
several options to select from, which are described below. This pop-up menu can only be used on the
Value column.
Set to Minimum Detectable Limit – The minimum detectable limit has to be set in the Site/Parameter
setup screen for the parameter that you are editing for this selection to work. If the minimum
detectable is set for the parameter and you want the value for the selected field to be set to the min
detect, then you can select this option to change the value to the limit provided in the setup screen.
Set AQS Null Code – This option opens a Set AQS Null Code box where you can click the down arrow and
it will drop down a list of null codes to select from. To select a code click it once to enter it into the AQS
Code field. Once you selection has been made click Ok and the change will be processed and entered
into the cell in the AQS Null Code column.
169
Set Qualifier Codes – This option opens a Set Qualifiers Code(s) box where you can select the code and
description that best fits the data by checking the box beside of the desired code.
Set Annotations – This option opens a Set Annotation box where the date defaults to the current date
and time. Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the Author User and the Category. If
the category you need is not listed you can add it by selecting the Add button and it will open an
AnotCategory box where you enter in the category name in the field at the bottom and click the Add
button, it will put your entry in the Category list. To delete a category select the name in the list and
click the Delete button and it will simply remove the entry without verifying this is the one you want to
delete. After putting an annotation on the data it will change the font of the value to italic.
Delete Annotations – After selecting data that has an annotation attached to it, this option allows you
to remove the annotation from the data. To disable the ability to delete any annotation that has been
added to the data even when the data has been restored to the original data, close the Average Data
Editor. Enter the below script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool which is located under the
Utilities menu, and select the Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the
bottom section of the tool. Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open
the Average Data Editor and the delete annotation option will be grayed out.
update dbo.UtilitySetting setSettingValue=0
where SettingKey=’AnnotationDeletesAreAllowed’
170
To re-enable the ability to delete annotations follow the same steps as listed above with this script:
update dbo.UtilitySetting setSettingValue=1
where SettingKey=’AnnotationDeletesAreAllowed’
Batch Edit – This option will remain grayed out unless more than one cell is selected at a time. It will
open a Batch Edit box that will give you five options to select from for editing the data. When selecting
from the Navigation list which edit you want to use you will need to check the enable box on the top
right of the screen to enable that feature to allow you to use it.
UpdateValues gives the linear correction formula and can also be used to batch fill in blank fields with a
duplicate value. The cell for the value is the original value in the formula, and if blank is viewed by the
formula as a zero. Zero multiplied by the value entered into the Multiplier field will be zero, then it is
added to the Constant field, so the value put in the cells will be the value that is entered into the
Constant field of the formula.
Set AQS Method Codes allows you to attach the same method code to a large amount of data at once.
Set Annotations, Set AQS Code, Set Qualifier Codes, and Set Flags work in the same manner as
mentioned above except it does it for more than on data value.
Show Children – If you want to show a child parameter you will need to select this option on the child
parameter so that it will retrieve the parent parameter and its data. If you select this option on a parent
parameter that is not a child parameter itself it will give this error: “The selected parameters do not
have Parent Parameter IDs configured”.
Export to Excel – This creates a file that can be opened in Excel.
171
Analyze/Export Selected – If selected, a new screen will open where the data can be changed from
Average to Sum, to Min, to Max, and can be exported to a document where it can be saved to a file or
printed.
Copy Selected To Clipboard – This allows the highlighted values to be copied and pasted into another
form such as a Word document or Excel, etc.
Cross-Tab Data – This display gives a Date column and a column for each parameter for each site that
you selected in the criteria. This display only shows the validated data. You also have the ability to right
click on the data cell and get the same options on the pop- up menu as mentioned above, but you can
only see the results of any changes made with those menu options by going back to the Linear Data
display so the extra columns are visible. The order of the columns can be changed by dragging the
column by the column heading and dropping it in the order that you want to see displayed.
All of the graphs have a Graph Theme field at the bottom center below the graphs that allows you to
change the color scheme of the graphs, the default is Nature Colors, and the examples below are using
Northern Lights. The color scheme can be changed on one of the graphs and saved and it will follow
through to the other two graphs and will also remain the color scheme for the next time you open the
graphs. The graphs can be exported by selecting the Print button at the bottom of the graphs to open
the print preview window, then selecting the Export button on the Ribbon at the top, select the Export
To button and choose the format time to save the graph to.
Time Series Graph – This display gives a line graph where the scale is displayed on the Y axis and the
date and time is displayed on the X axis. The sites, parameters and interval are displayed over to the
right side with a color chart when the Show Legend box is checked at the bottom left below the graph.
172
When multiple parameters are selected they are shown in different colors. The graph shown below is
with two parameters selected shown in different colors.
Scatter Plot – Displays values for two variables for a set of data. The data is displayed as a collection of
points, each having the value of one variable determining the position on the horizontal axis and the
value of the other variable determining the position on the vertical axis. This display gives a plotted
graph where the Y axis is a selected site and parameter and the X axis is another selected site and
parameter. Only two parameters can be displayed on this graph at a time, no more and no less. To
change the axis parameters click the down arrow on the right side of each parameter at the top of the
graph and select the other parameter in the list, so the Y parameter can be changed to the X parameter,
and the X parameter can be changed to the Y parameter. Click the Refresh button once the new settings
have been entered to change the graph.
This graph shows the original parameter settings and includes invalid data points shown on the graph
with the red dots.
Histogram – A bar graph of a frequency distribution in which the widths of the bars are proportional to
the classes into which the variable has been divided and the heights of the bars are proportional to the
class frequencies. This display gives a line graph where the parameter names are not shown. This
graph shows the default scale set for the parameter in the Site/Parameter screen.
173
174
6.6 Flags Editor
To edit a flag setting, single click Flags Editor from the Configuration Editors menu. The Flags Editor tab
will open on the right side of the screen.
To add a new flag, select the Add New button on the Ribbon at the top and it will clear the fields on the
right side of the screen.
To delete a flag, select the Delete Flag button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you be asking if
you are sure you want to delete the selected flag. Select Yes to continue deleting the flag or No to stop
the deletion and retain the flag.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Flags Editor, select the disk icon on the Quick
Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.
Flag – Enter in the flag that you want to add to the flag column
Description – Explains the use of the flag.
Priority – This field allows you to change the order of priority of the flags, which flags take
precedence over the others. The default settings for the priority flags are not currently set to
the priority of what the logger uses.
For quick reference the logger priority for the flags are:
<, P, D, T, F, B, C, M, O, U, A, +, -, R, H, L, h, l, J, j, V, W, X, Y, Z, f, c
Priority of status flags are:
I, ?, *, >, =, m, ^, v, E, d, 9, a, z, Q,
User Defined flags are last in priority. If you want to use a flag for a user defined that hasn’t
already been used by the logger, these are your options:
K , N, S, b, e, g, i, k, n, o, q, r, s, u, w, x, y, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 0, !, @, #, $, %, &
Note: Do not remove all of the priorities from the flags. If the priority is not set, the system
does not know which flag is ranked higher than other flags, and will cause problems when
running reports.
Invalidates Data – If the purpose of the new flag that is being entered or any existing flag is to
invalidate data then click this field to put a check mark in the box.
Mapped AQS Null Code – Data that is flagged as invalid is required to be replaced with a null
code in the AQS report. Mapping the logger flag to a null code will automatically cause the null
code to me placed in the report instead of the invalid data. Click the down arrow and select the
null code from the drop down list.
Mapped AIRNow Code – If the logger flag is to be considered in AIRNow, but cannot be
displayed on the report as itself, it can be mapped to an AIRNow flag that is allowed to be
175
displayed on the report. Click the down arrow and select the AIRNow flag from the drop down
list.
Fore Color – This is the color of the font that shows in the cells in the editors.
Back Color – This is the color of the cell background in the editors.
176
6.7 Calibration Data Editor
To open the data editor, single click Calibration Data Editor from the Data Editors menu. The Calibration
Data Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To bring up previously entered or polled data, make the query selection and select the Retrieve Data
button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the data below the query. An example of the editor
is shown below.
If the data does not exist and you need to manually enter the data, select the Add button on the Ribbon
at the top. It will bring up an add Calibration Data box where you select the site and parameter from the
top section and the sequence and phase for the calibration from the bottom section. Select the Start
and End Date and select OK.
From the selection that is made the Site, Parameter, Sequence, Phase, Start Date and End Date will
automatically be filled in on the table.
Value – Click in the field and enter in the value that was the result of the calibration that was ran.
Expected Value – This field will default to zero. If the expected value is not zero click in the field and
replace the value with the correct expected value.
Exclude From Reporting – Click the check the box if the sequence is not included on the calibration
report.
Tracer ID – If a tracer code is used in the logger, enter in the code that is between 0000 and 9999.
177
178
6.8 Calibration Adjust Tool
This is an add on feature that has to be enabled with a license key that is provided by Agilaire. The
Calibration Adjust Tool is also discussed in Chapter 13.2.
Before the Cal Adjust Tool can function the level of the phase has to be set in the calibration setup in the
Data Source Details screen.
Level – Applies to those who have the Calibration Adjust Tool to identify the calibration levels,
such as zero, span, or precision, regardless of how they are named. This field is also used to
allow the Precision phase of a cal to be identified and reported on the AQS report when the Cal
Precision Data Records box is selected on the report query. Click the down arrow and select
from the dropdown list, ZERO, SPAN, PREC, 20%, 40%, 60%, or 80%. Level is also discussed in
the calibration setup in Chapter 4.6.4.
To open the adjustment tool, single click Calibration Adjust Tool from the Data Editors menu. The
Calibration Adjust Tool tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To see if a calibration needs to be adjusted, select the parameter and average interval affected by the
calibration and the date range the calibration ran, then select the Analyze button on the Ribbon at the
top.
The Adjust for Span button is deselected by default so the adjustment will only do a zero correction. If
you want the adjustment to do a span correction, then select the Adjust for Span button on the Ribbon
at the top.
If the adjustment is to do a span correction as well, the Adjust for Span button is selected. You may
optionally select the Sliding Scale button to have the slope factor linearly interpolated between each
calibration. For example: if the slope correction on the first calibration is 1.1 and the slope correction on
the second calibration is 1.05, then the hourly data at the midpoint would have a slope correction of
1.075, with the hour closest to the first calibration being 1.1 and the hour closest to the second
calibration being 1.05. This button is selected by default.
If the Apply Forward button is selected the calibration corrections are applied using the calibration
results going forward in time. If Apply Forward is deselected the corrections are applied going
backwards from each calibration. This button is selected by default.
179
Once the configuration of buttons has been chosen, select the Analyze button to view the data. If the
data is correct select the Apply button on the Ribbon at the top to make the changes. Any data such as
hourly, that is changed will be marked with the z flag to show the calibration was adjusted, and the
hourly data is locked from the calibration being adjusted a second time. If the data needs to be
returned to its original form, a batch edit can be performed in the Average Data Editor.
6.8.1 Task Scheduler
To run the cal adjust automatically, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list
will open with a selection of jobs and tasks; select Calibration Adjust Task.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task
Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the
Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.
Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.
Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you
want to handle running the task.
Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start
running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The
default is the current date and time that you create the task.
Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and
select how often the task is to run.
180
Task Details Section
General Tab
Basic Task Information section
Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list,
which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection
section at the top unless given a different name by the user.
Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the
scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.
Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.
This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled
Task Selection section at the top.
Calibration Adjust Options section
Interval to Adjust – Click the down arrow and select the type of data that is to be
adjusted.
Forward Adjust – If selected the calibration corrections are applied using the calibration
results going forward in time. If Forward Adjust is deselected the corrections are
applied going backwards from each calibration.
Span Adjust – If selected the span will be corrected in addition to the zero correction.
Sliding Adjust - If selected to have the slope factor linearly interpolated between each
calibration.
Advanced Tab
Retry Options section
Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number of time
you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the retries throughout
the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic
polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a
site that may not be communicating during the particular poll.
Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the
down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries should be.
181
Status Logging section
Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the
degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount of information
it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the level the larger the log
will become and the more hard drive space it will take up.
Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom,
and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.
Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the
drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed to users.
Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.
Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.
182
6.9 Cal Expected Values
To open the editor, single click Cal Expected Values from the Configuration Editors menu. The Cal
Expected Values tab will open on the right side of the screen. This menu is the same as the Quick
Expected Value Editor in the Ambient software.
The editor will give the source name, sequence name, phase name and channel name, all of which
cannot be edited. The expected value can be change by double clicking in the field to highlight the
existing value where you can then type in the new value. Or if the value comes from a constant, click
the down arrow in that field and select which constant is to be used.
After making any changes to each expected value, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at
the very top to save the change and a prompt will appear asking if you want to download to the logger,
when using an 8816 or 8832.
183
Chapter 6.10 Forecast Editor
To open the data editor, single click Forecast Editor from the Data Editors menu. The Forecast Editor tab
will open on the right side of the screen. If the data does not exist and you need to enter the data by
selecting the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. This will put a new line entry in the area below the
query.
To bring up previously entered data, make the query selection and select the Retrieve Data button on
the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the data below the query.
To delete a data entry, after retrieving the data, single click the blue square on the left side to highlight
the row. Select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you
want to delete. Click Save for the deletion to take place.
The copy button on the Ribbon at the top will copy the selected record and assign tomorrow as the
effective date, unless there is already a record for that date loaded in the editor, in which case it will
assign the next unused date to the record.
Site – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select the site name from the drop down
list.
Effective Day – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select the date from the calendar,
and use the radio buttons to set the time, or the field can be highlighted and the date and time and by
typed in.
Parameter – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select the parameter name from the
drop down list.
Concentration – Type in the value for the concentration level.
Forecast AQI – Click the calculator button to the right of the Forecast AQI field, and it will calculate the
AQI and automatically enter it into the Forecast field.
184
Chapter 7: Logs
The logs are generated straight from SQL, so they will be time stamped according to the calendar and
clock on the PC where the SQL database resides.
7.1 Log Viewer
To open the Log Viewer, single click Log Viewer from the Status Displays menu. The Log Viewer will
open at the bottom of the screen. Log Viewer is a communication viewer that will run at the bottom of
any screen if opened from the Status Displays menu. It will also open below the link to logger and
manual poll screen when the communication link is connected.
Options section
Refresh button – Refreshes the log messages in the viewer. Depending on the volume of
messages, data access delay (e.g. slow network, etc), you may not immediately see anything
new. If you setup the auto-refresh that would minimize how often you would need to refresh
manually.
Auto-refresh every __ (s) – Click to check the box if you want the refresh of the log to run
automatically. Used the radio buttons to set how many seconds should pass before the
automatic refresh runs.
Show all messages – Click to check the box to have the log to show all of the messages it has
collected.
Scroll with messages – Click to check the box if you want the scrolling to automatically stay with
the most recent entry.
Export to Excel button – Click this button to bring up a Save window to select a location and give
a name to the Excel file that the log is being exported to.
Time – The time of communication.
Event Type – The different types are Communication, Information, Warning, Startup, Shutdown,
and Exception.
Message – The request or string being sent to the logger, and the response from the logger sent
back. Hover the mouse over the field and it will bring up the full message, but only for a few
seconds. This can made the string hard to read. The strings are also recorded to the Journal
Message Log, and the complete string can be seen by running the log.
185
To see a more in depth look at the message you can highlight the row, then double click the highlighted
row to pop up a Message Details box that gives some of the duplicate information along with fields such
as who inserted the message, the computer name, and the program name, as well as a more extensive
look at the message that was entered. When finished click the Ok button at the bottom right to close
the window.
186
7.2 Internal Reports
Most of the internal reports are intended for the use of Agilaire Support or possibly by a Database
Administrator and really should not be used by someone unfamiliar with SQL. The slightest change
made to any of the SQL tables can make drastic changes to the database, and SQL is not like other
applications; it is not a forgiving program. It assumes that when a change it made that is what you want
even though it may have been a mistake. It does not ask you to save your changes when you close the
program, so any change that is made concerning SQL is permanent.
However, one of the reports can actually aid the user in determining if a poll has had any
communication issues or not.
To open the internal reports, expand Internal Reports from the Reports menu.
7.2.1 Journal Message Log
To run the journal messages, expand Internal Reports from the Reports menu and single click Journal
Message Log. The Journal Message Log tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting the
date and logging type, to open the report select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.
This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. This report allows you to
see the strings that were sent to and received from the logger. This report records every
communication transaction ran by the software, so this log can become very large very quickly. We do
advise keep this log purged on a regular basis to keep the size of the log small. An example of the report
is shown below.
187
7.2.2 Historical Log Viewer
To run the Historical Log, expand Internal Reports from the Reports menu and single click Historical Log
Viewer. The Historical Log Viewer tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting the date
and logging type, to open the report select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This
will bring up the log below the query in the Report Output section. This log allows you to see the
communication strings as they are shown is the Log Viewer, which are also written to the Journal
Message Log. An example of the log is shown below.
188
7.2.3 Audit Change Viewer
To run the Audit Change Viewer, expand Internal Reports from the Reports menu and single click Audit
Change Viewer. The Audit Change Viewer tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting
the date and logging type, to open the report select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the
top. This will bring up the log below the query in the Report Output section. This log allows you to see
changes made by the user(s). An example of the log is shown below.
189
The other internal reports are really for the use of Agilaire for troubleshooting
purposes, such as the Diagnostic Report, DB Modification Report, and Table Size
Information.
7.2.4 Software Version Report
To run the Software Version Report, expand Internal Reports from the Reports menu and single click
Software Version Report. The Software Version Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. It
will automatically open the report for the current day. No date entries are required. This report allows
you to see the versions of the database and when it was upgraded. An example of the report is shown
below.
190
7.2.5 Exception Journal
To run the Exception Journal, expand Internal Reports from the Reports menu and single click Exception
Journal. The Exception Journal tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting the date and
the logging type, to open the report select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This
will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. This is more of a tool used for
troubleshooting by Agilaire. An example of the report is shown below.
191
7.3 Purge Journal Messages
To open the Purge Journal Messages, expand Archive/Purge Data from the Utilities menu and single click
Purge Journal Messages. The Purge Journal Messages tab will open on the right side of the screen. The
Purge Journal Messages purges the messages collected in the message logs in the Internal Reports
under Reports.
To purge or archive journal messages select Data Older Than or select and enter in a Specific Date
Range. Choose to archive the data, purge the data, or both. Then select if the process is to take place
on the server or the local pc and browse to the location. When finished setting up the query select the
Process Data Archive/Purge button on the Ribbon at the top.
Purge / Archive Date Criteria section
Data Older Than –Use the radio buttons and down arrow to select the time frame of data that
you want to archive or delete that is only older than the time range that you selected. The
default setting is 2 weeks.
Specific Date Range – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time frame of data that you
want to archive or delete. The default is the current date with a twenty four hour time setting.
Action to Take section
Archive Data – Dumps the message records out to files for the date range that is selected in the
query. Once the records are dumped to files you will no longer be able to query on those
messages within AirVision unless the records are imported back into the database.
Archive and Purge Data – Dumps message records out to files and delete the messages from the
database for the date range that is selected in the query.
Purge Data – Deletes the messages from the database for the date range that is selected in the
query.
Archive File Location section – Choose from the options of Server or Local, and click the Browse button
to enter in the location of where the archive is to be written to. This option works in conjunction with
the Archive Data and Archive and Purge Data options only.
192
To purge the Journal Messages Log automatically refer to Chapter 4.16.1.f Adding a Journal Message
Purge Task.
193
7.4 Audit Table Enable Tool
The purpose of the Audit Table Enabler is to allow the administrator to track which parts of the software
are changed, as long as each user has a different user log in.
To open the Audit Table Enabler, single click Audit Table Enable Tool from the Configuration Editors
menu. The Audit Table Enable Tool tab will open on the right side of the screen. An example of the tool
options are shown below.
Click the down arrow in the Select All Tables In Category field to select which sections of the software
are to be enabled. Each section does have to be configured individually. Once a category is selected, it
will bring up the list of the software screens that fall under that category. Then to enable a screen to
track change, check the AuditEnabled box and click the Apply button. It will then show executing action
in the bottom section of the screen.
To disable auditing on a table, uncheck the AuditEnabled box and click the Apply button.
Click the save button on the Quick Access toolbar when finished.
194
7.5 LogBook Entry Editor
Entries put into the logbook are logged by the username, and can be grouped into certain categories for
preventative maintenance, repair, data adjustment, etc.
To open the logbook, single click LogBook Entry Editor from the Data Editors menu. The LogBook Entry
Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To add a new log entry, select the New Log Entry button on the Ribbon at the top. A new blank row will
open in the Log Book Data section in the on the right side of the screen. Some of the fields in the Log
Book Entry Details section will fill in with the default settings, but they can be changed.
To change a setting on an entry, single click the blue square on the left side of the log entry to highlight
the row in the Log Book Data section. Then make the changes at the bottom under the Log Book Entry
Details section.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the LogBook Entry Editor, select the disk icon on
the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
The LogBook Editor is similar to the Logbook in the Digi-Trend software which is used at a site.
LogBook Entry Editor Details section
Log Entry Time – Defaults to the current date and time the entry is entered in and cannot be
changed. This is to show the date and time the log entry was created.
User – Defaults to the current user login cannot be changed without closing and reopening
AirVision and logging in as a different user of an existing login account.
User Entry Time – This entry time can be changed to show the date and time that the log entry
applies to.
Site – Click the down arrow and select the site from the drop down list the log entry applies to.
Category – Click in the field for the list to drop down or click the down arrow on the right side of
the new Category button and it will also drop down the list, and select the category that best
applies to the log entry.
Category – Click in the field for the list to drop down or click the down arrow on the right side of
the new Category button and it will also drop down the list, and select the category that best
applies to the log entry. If the category that is needed is not listed, it can be added by selecting
the Log Book Category Editor menu under List Editors. However, if the LogBook Entry Editor is
open when the new category is added, the screen will have to be refreshed before it will see the
new category in the list.
Entry Text – Type in the message that best applies for the log entry.
195
Addendums can now be made to existing logbook entries. However, this feature does have to be turned
on. To turn on this feature, close the Logbook Entry Editor. Enter the below script into the top section
of the SQL Execution Tool which is located under the Utilities menu. Select the Execute SQL button on
the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool. Once the script has
finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the Logbook Entry Editor and there will be an
Addendum button added to the Ribbon at the top.
update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=1
where SettingKey=’EnableLogBookAddendum’
Once the addendum button is enabled, an addendum can be added to any existing log entry by selecting
that entry in the top section of the Logbook Editor, then selecting the Addendum button on the Ribbon
at the top and it will open a small Logbook Addendum window. Under the Addendum Text section add
in the additional needed notes, then click OK to apply the entry. It will then show the additional entry
under the original entry labeled as an addendum with the current days date, the time, and the user that
entered the notes. Be sure to save after entry in the notes with the universal save on the Quick Access
Toolbar at the top.
7.5.1 Purge Log Book Entries
To open the Purge Log Book Entries, expand Archive/Purge Data from the Utilities menu and single click
Purge Log Book Entries. The Purge Log Book Entries tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To purge or archive log entries select Data Older Than or select and enter in a Specific Date Range.
Choose to archive the log entries, or archive and purge the log entries. Then select if the process is to
take place on the server or the local pc and browse to the location. When finished setting up the query
select the Process Data Archive/Purge button on the Ribbon at the top.
Purge / Archive Date Criteria section
Data Older Than –Use the radio buttons and down arrow to select the time frame of the log
entry that you want to archive or delete that is only older than the time range that you selected.
The default setting is 3 years.
196
Specific Date Range – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time frame of data that you
want to archive or delete. The default is the current date with a twenty four hour time setting.
Action to Take section
Archive Data – Dumps the log entries out to files for the date range that is selected in the query.
Archive and Purge Data – Dumps the log entries out to files and delete the entries from the
database for the date range that is selected in the query. Once the records are dumped to files
you will no longer be able to query on those entries within AirVision
Archive File Location section – Choose from the options of Server or Local, and click the Browse button
to enter in the location of where the archive is to be written to.
Site Selection section – Select one or more sites that the log entries are to be archived and purged from.
197
7.6 LogBook Report
To run the logbook report, expand Notation Reports from the Reports menu and single click LogBook
Report. The LogBook Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the date range
selection, pick one or more sites, and one or more categories the log entries were assigned. To open the
report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below
the query in the Report Output section. Each site is shown per page with any entries made in the date
range selected in the query. An example of the report is shown below.
198
Chapter 8: Reports
8.1 Query usage for all reports
Date Ranges – There are several ways to enter in the start and end date range for any of the reports.
1. You can click in each division of the date or the time and use the delete key or the backspace
key to remove the existing number and type in a new number.
2. You can highlight the number and type over it, replacing it with a new number.
3. You can click on the number and use the up and down arrows to scroll through the numbers.
4. You can click the larger down arrow at the end of the date and time and it will bring up a
calendar where you can scroll from month to month and click on the date you want to select.
5. You can click the star button and it will bring up another box where you can select from
various ranges to help shorten the time spent in put in the date range you want to see.
Site and Parameter Selection – Select one or more sites and parameters to be shown on the report. To
select multiple row; click and drag down the left side of the columns in the blue squares and each row
will highlight as it is selected. You can also click each row while holding down the Control key, or you
can click the first row you want to start with then hold down the Shift key and click the last row you
want to end with. When right clicking on the selection it will bring up two options of Select All and Clear
All Selections. If multiple fields are selected and the Clear All Selections option is chosen it may not
remove the highlight from the fields but it has deselected the previous choices. If you right click and
choose Select All it will highlight all options.
Average Interval selection – You can only select one interval per generated report. Select the interval
by clicking the blue box on the left side of the interval for the data type you want to run the report for.
Each interval has its description listed to the right of the interval. The default highlight is on the hourly
interval, but may not necessarily be selected. To make sure the interval is selected click on the blue box
on the left side of the interval so that the interval and description is highlight with dots around the edge
of the highlight.
Filters, Sorting and the Report Output Toolbar are explained in Chapter 3 General Information.
If there is no data to display for the request you made it will give back information below the query in
the Report Errors section giving the time you tried to run the report, and the error level of what type of
error it is giving back to you, and what the error message is.
Keep in mind the more data that you try to retrieve in any of the reports, the longer it will take for the
query to gather the data from the database to display it. If you realize that you selected too large of a
range of data or the wrong date or time frame, you will not be able to cancel the retrieving process. If
you don’t want to wait for it to retrieve the data so that you can correct the range of data, you can
simply open a new tab of the same report and retrieve a new query. Once the incorrect query retrieves
the data you can simply close that tab.
199
8.2 Daily Summary Report
To run the daily report, expand Summary Reports from the Reports menu and single click Daily Summary
Report. The Daily Summary Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query
selection, to open the report select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will
bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site is shown separately per
each day per page with the hours in a column on the left side of the grid and the parameter names in a
row across the top of each of the columns just the same as it does in the Ambient software. If you want
the look of the report on the screen to appear in landscape mode, just check the box labeled Switch to
Landscape and generate the report again. A portrait layout example of the report is shown below. To
setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
The print margins for the report default to 0.32 inches. To change the margins to .020 inches close the
report. Enter the below script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool which is located under the
Utilities menu, and select the Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the
bottom section of the tool. Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open
the report.
Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=1
where SettingKey=’DailySummaryReportMargins’
A user defined text can be added to the header of the Daily Summary report by entering the below
script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool, which is located under the Utilities menu, and
200
select the Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of
the tool. Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the Daily Summary
report and retrieve some data to show the report with the desired text displayed at the top of the
report.
Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’The Users Desired Text’ where SettingKey =
‘DailySummaryNotesString’
To suppress flags on the report when the averages are valid and to only show the flags when averages
are invalid enter the below script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool, which is located under
the Utilities menu, and select the Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in
the bottom section of the tool. Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and
open the report and retrieve some data known to have flags.
Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’0’ where
SettingKey=’DailySummaryShowFlags’
To change the report back to the default to show flags with valid and invalid data enter in the below
script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool.
Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’1’ where
SettingKey=’DailySummaryShowFlags’
The report can be set to use geometric averaging by entering the below script into the top section of the
SQL Execution Tool, which is located under the Utilities menu, and select the Execute SQL button on the
Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool. Once the script has finished,
close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the report and retrieve some data to show the averaging.
update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’1’ where
SettingKey=’DailySummaryGeometricAverage’
To change the averaging back to the default enter in the below script into the top section of the SQL
Execution Tool.
update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’0’ where
SettingKey=’DailySummaryGeometricAverage’
If the Show Flag Description check box is checked, it will add an extra page to the bottom of the report
with all of the flags and their descriptions listed. An example is shown below.
201
If the Show Calibrations check box is checked, it will add an extra page to the bottom of the report with
the calibrations for the parameters that was selected in the query. This is the equivalent of the Hourlyn-cal report in Ambient. An example is shown below.
202
8.3 Data With Flags Report
To run the data report, expand Average Reports from the Reports menu and single click Data With Flags
Report. The Data With Flags Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the
query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.
This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site is shown separately
per parameter, per each day, per page with the date and time in a column on the left, then a value
column, and a flags column. This report is the same as the Data Reports in the Ambient software where
you can select to run the report with all flags. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this
report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
203
8.4 Daily Parameter Report
To run the parameter report, expand Summary Reports from the Reports menu and single click Daily
Parameter Report. The Daily Parameter Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After
making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at
the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section for parameters that
have been configured with a parameter template in the Site/Parameter screen. All parameters are
shown per each day per page. If the Show Null Codes box is checked, the data in the cells will be
replaced with null codes when it applies. This report is similar to the Annual parameter summary report
in the Ambient software. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran
automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
A user defined text can be added to the header of the Daily Parameter report by entering the below
script into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool, which is located under the Utilities menu, and
select the Execute SQL button on the left end of the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the
bottom section of the tool. Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open
the Daily Parameter report and retrieve some data to show the report with the desired text displayed at
the top of the report.
Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’The Users Desired Text’ where SettingKey =
‘DailyParameterNotesString’
204
8.5 Monthly Report
To run the monthly report, expand Summary Reports from the Reports menu and single click Monthly
Report. The Monthly Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query
selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will
bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section.
If the data or the validation flags have been color coded in the Average Data Editor the color and flags
will propagate over into the Monthly Report, but non-validation flags will not. Each site and parameter
is shown separately per page per month with a summary of the average, maximum and number of
readings at the end of each row, and the bottom of each column unless the Totalize in Reports checkbox
or Minimum in Reports checkbox is checked on the parameter in the Site/Parameter screen. If the
Totalize in Reports box is checked it will replace the Average column with a Total column, and if
Minimum in Reports box is checked it will replace the Maximum column with a Minimum column.
This is the same as is in the Ambient software with the check box for the Total actually being on the
query page for the Monthly Report and can be selected or deselected on the fly. The first example is
with the Maximum and Average columns shown. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to
Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
The second example is with the Minimum and Total columns shown.
205
A user defined text can be added to the header of the Monthly report by entering the below script into
the top section of the SQL Execution Tool, which is located under the Utilities menu, and select the
Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool.
Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the Monthly report and
retrieve some data to show the report with the desired text displayed at the top of the report.
Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’The Users Desired Text’ where SettingKey =
‘MonthlyNotesString’
The report can be set to use geometric averaging by entering the below script into the top section of the
SQL Execution Tool, which is located under the Utilities menu, and select the Execute SQL button on the
left end of the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool. Once the
script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the report and retrieve some data to
show the averaging.
update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’1’ where
SettingKey=’MonthlyGeometricAverage’
To change the averaging back to the default enter in the below script into the top section of the SQL
Execution Tool.
update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’0’ where
SettingKey=’MonthlyGeometricAverage’
206
If the Show Null Codes box is checked, the data in the cells will be replaced with null codes when it
applies. If the Flags check box is checked, it will add an extra page to the bottom of the report with all of
the flags and their descriptions listed. An example is shown below.
207
8.6 8 Hour Rolling Average Report
To run the rolling average report, expand Summary Reports from the Reports menu and single click 8
Hour Rolling Average Report. The 8 Hour Rolling Average Report tab will open on the right side of the
screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on
the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section for
parameters that have been configured with a parameter template in the Site/Parameter screen. The
report is generated off of the parameter. If a parameter has multiple sites, each site will have a row
attached to the parameter. All parameters are shown per each day per page. This report is similar to
the Monthly report in the Ambient software when you set the Hours in Rolling Average, except this
report is on a daily basis instead of monthly. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this
report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
208
8.7 24 Hour Average Summary Report
To run the 24 average report, expand Summary Reports from the Reports menu and single click 24 Hour
Average Summary Report. The 24 Hour Average Summary Report tab will open on the right side of the
screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on
the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section for
parameters that have been configured with a parameter template in the Site/Parameter screen. In
order for this report to show data, a continuous daily average has to be configured in the logger and
daily data has to be polled from the logger. The report is generated off of the parameter. If a
parameter has multiple sites, each site will have a column attached to the parameter. All parameters
are shown for all days per page. This report is similar to the Daily Averages report under Data Reports in
the Ambient software. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran
automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
209
8.8 Logger Reports
8.8.1 Alarm Journal
To run the alarm journal report, expand Logger Reports from the Reports menu and single click Alarm
Journal. The Alarm Journal tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query
selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on theRibbon at the top. This will
bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site is shown separately per
page the same is it does in the Alarm Logs in the Ambient software. Examples of the reports are shown
below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report
Task.
210
8.8.2 Central Messages
To open the central messages report, expand Logger Reports from the Reports menu and single click
Central Messages. The Central Messages tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the
query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This
will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section that shows the central operator
messages entered by the operator in the logger. Each site is shown separately per page the same as it
does in the Operator Messages report in the Ambient software. Examples of the reports are shown
below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report
Task.
211
8.8.3 Line Status Report
To open the line status report, expand Logger Reports from the Reports menu and single click Line
Status Report. The Line Status Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the
query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This
will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and logger is shown
separately per page the same as it does in the New Input Line Status Changes and the Historical Input
Line Status Changes in the Ambient software, although laid out slightly difference. Examples of the
reports are shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a
Scheduled Report Task.
212
8.8.4 Power Failure Report
To open the power failure report, expand Logger Reports from the Reports menu and single click Power
Failure Report. The Power Failure Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the
query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This
will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section, where it will show the power
failures that have taken place at the sites as long as power failures have been configured in the
scheduler to be polled automatically or polled manually by the user. Each site is shown separately per
page the same as the Power Failures Report in the Ambient software. Examples of the reports are
shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled
Report Task.
213
8.9 Calibration Reports
8.9.1 Calibration Results
To run the calibration report, expand Calibration Reports from the Reports menu and single click
Calibration Results. The Calibration Results tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making
the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.
This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site is shown separately
per page per day which is exactly the same as the Calibration report in the Ambient software. The %
Error is calculated by the expected value subtracted from the actual value. An example of the report is
shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled
Report Task.
The report can be set to show the calibration percent error as a negative by entering the below script
into the top section of the SQL Execution Tool, which is located under the Utilities menu, and select the
Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. It will give the results in the bottom section of the tool.
Once the script has finished, close the SQL Execution Tool screen and open the report and retrieve some
data and any negative data will be shown with a minus ( - ) symbol.
Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’1’ where
SettingKey=’ShowCalErrorPercentSigned’
To change the report back to the default enter in the below script into the top section of the SQL
Execution Tool.
Update UtilitySetting set SettingValue=’0’ where
SettingKey=’ShowCalErrorPercentSigned’
214
8.9.2 Calibration Export
The calibration export shows what the Calibration Results report shows but without the headers. To run
the export, expand Calibration Reports from the Reports menu and single click Calibration Export. The
Calibration Export tab will open on the right side of the screen. An example graph is shown below. To
setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
8.9.3 Multi Phase Calibration Report
To run the multi phase cal report, expand Calibration Reports from the Reports menu and single click
Multi Phase Calibration Report. The Multi Phase Calibration Report tab will open on the right side of the
screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on
the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. An
example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter
4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
215
8.9.4 USEPA Cal Zero Drift Report
To run the cal drift report, expand Calibration Reports from the Reports menu and single click USEPA Cal
Zero Drift Report. The USEPA Cal Zero Drift Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After
making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at
the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. An example of the
report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a
Scheduled Report Task.
8.9.5 Calibration Trend Graph
To run the calibration graph, expand Calibration Trend Graph from the Reports menu and single click
Calibration Trend Graph. The Calibration Trend Graph tab will open on the right side of the screen.
After making the query selection, open the graph by selecting the Generate Report button on the
Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the graph below the query.
The data’s default display is Raw Data, but can be changed by the buttons on the Ribbon to a Historical
Graph or a Response Graph, and both graphs will display the expected value and the value in two
different colors so that they are easily identified on the graph. The Y axis for the Historical and Response
graph are set in the parameter setup under the Site/Parameter configuration screen. The X axis for the
Historical graph displays the date you selected in the query in the middle of the graph with the previous
day and next day on each side of that date. The Response graph does the same with exception of giving
each minute of a few minutes previous to, and a few minutes after the data points are shown in the
middle. Minute data does have to exist in the database during the same time as when the calibration
ran in order for it to be able to generate this graph. Highlighting data on the graphs works the same as it
does in the Average Data Editor explained in Chapter 6. This graph is similar to the Calibration graph in
the Ambient software. An example of each graph is shown below.
216
Raw Data Display
Historical Graph Display
Response Graph Display
217
8.9.6 Calibration Graph Report
To run the calibration graph report, expand Calibration Reports from the Reports menu and single click
Calibration Graph Report. The Calibration Graph Report tab will open on the right side of the screen.
After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the
Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the graph below the query.
8.9.7 Calibration X Bar R Viewer
The X-Bar-R chart is similar to the calibration trend, but it focuses on a single phase in more
detail. When looking at the Cal Trend graph, it shows both zero and span and minor changes of
small scale are difficult to see. The X-Bar-R chart allows you to look at either zero or span in
more detail by selecting one in the Calibration Level field in the query. It is equivalent to
zooming in.
The top chart shows the results verses the expected, like the regular trend graph does. The
bottom chart shows the change day to day (the delta) as the Y-axis value. To run the X bar graph
218
single click the Calibration X Bar R Viewer from the Reports menu and it will open the Calibration X Bar R
Viewer tab on the right side of the screen. An example graph is shown below.
219
8.10 AIRNow Report
In order for the AIRNow report to generate data it requires that the sites that are to be included on the
report have all of the EPA codes and mnemonic names configured, and the parameters that are to be
included on the report have all of the EPA codes configured, AIRNow enabled under the Site/Parameter
screen, and associated with a parameter template that has the mnemonic name configured under the
Parameter Template screen. It also requires the System have the agency code and the country code
configured under the Site/Parameter screen. To run the AIRNow report, expand AIRNow Reports from
the Reports menu and single click AIRNow Report. The AIRNow Report tab will open on the right side of
the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button
on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section
which is exactly the same as the AIRNow report in the Ambient software, where data is put into a
predetermined ASCII text format and then transmitted to the central AIRNow database at EPA’s Data
Collection Center via FTP. An example of the report is shown below.
To manually transfer the report that has been queried select the Transfer Now button on the Ribbon at
the top. It will bring up a Select FTP Destination screen where an FTP Configuration can be selected by
clicking the down arrow and selecting from the drop down list. The list of configurations is what has
previously been configured under the AIRNow/FTP Setup screen. To setup this report to be
automatically transferred, that will include all parameters enabled for AIRNow reporting, refer to
Chapter 4.16.1.c Adding an AIRNow FTP Transfer Task. To setup this report to be ran automatically so
that you can pick which parameters are included on the report, refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a
Scheduled Report Task.
220
8.11 AQI Reports
To run an AQI report, expand AQI Reports from the Reports menu and single click AQI Report- Current,
Range, Standard, or Monthly. The AQI Report- Current, Range, Standard, or Monthly tab will open on
the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the
Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the
Report Output section.
Current shows data for the current hour. The Current method calculates the most recent hourly
average.
Range shows data starting at midnight on the beginning date specified to the ending date and time
specified. The Range method calculates from midnight to the current hour.
Standard shows the data 24 hours prior to the specified date and time given. The Standard method is
based on the highest of 24 averages where each average consists of a 1 hour, 8 hour, or 24 hour running
average depending on the averaging interval entered for the parameter in the AQI Configuration Editor.
For example, if the hour is 13:00 and the averaging interval is 8 hours, the first average will consist of an
average of the values for hours 05:00 through 12:00. The second average will consist of an average of
the values for hours 04:00 through 11:00. When it gets to the seventh average it will use hours 23:00
from the previous day through the 06:00 of the current day. This process continues until 24 averages
are calculated. The AQI is then based on the highest of these 24 averages.
Monthly shows the index for each hour of each day along with the color of the index, as well as the peak
for the day, the max for each hour of each day, and the pollutant responsible for the AQI.
Monthly Group shows the index for each hour of each day along with the color of the index, as well as
the peak for the day, the max for each hour of each day, and the pollutant responsible for the AQI.
CSV Export is a csv format that can be saved as a file or exported to notepad.
XML Export is an xml format that can be save as a file or exported to notepad.
The data is reported slightly different than the other reports. For example: if the data is collected
through the 10:00 hour, it is not reported as the value for 10:00, it is reported as the value for 11:00. If
an N/A is in the Index column for a parameter it means that the average for the parameter was below
the first index level, therefore, the average is not applicable. To have the average below the level to
show on the report the Use Zero Scaling needs to be checked for the specific parameter in the AQI
Program Editor. These reports are displayed just as they are in the Ambient software with the exception
of being displayed in a grid form, using the Air Quality Index as required in the Code of Federal
Regulations and Appendix G of 40 CFR 58. An example of each report is shown below. To setup this
report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
221
Current
Range
222
Standard
Monthly
223
Monthly Group
CSV Export
224
XML Export
Levels
225
8.12 AQS Report
To run the AQS report, expand AQS Reports from the Reports menu and single click AQS Text or AQS
XML Report. The AQS Text or XML Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the
query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This
will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. These reports are exactly the
same as the AQS or AIRS reports in the Ambient software. An example of each report is shown below.
When generating the AQS XML report you have the options of selecting a record type to produce the
report with. The default selections are Average Data, Sample Data, and Composite Data, but you also
have the option to select Cal Precision Data, which will only produce data if the level has been
configured for PREC in the calibration phase in the calibration configuration in the Data Source Details
screen. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report
Task.
Text 2.2
226
XML 2.2
227
XML 3.0
Monitor Assurance record
228
8.13 AIRNow CSV Text Report (AQCSV)
To run the AIRNow CSV report, expand the AIRNow Reports from the Reports menu and single click
AIRNow CSV Text Report. The AIRNow CSV Text Report tab will open on the right side of the screen.
After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the
Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section where
data is put into a predetermined comma delimited text format. To run this report automatically,
schedule a Report Task in the Task Scheduler and select AIRNOW CSV Text Report in the Report field
under the Report Task Options section as the bottom. Under the File Output Options tab set the File
Extension to the agencies three digit code, and append the date in the format that EPA requires. Use
the same FTP Transfer Program that is used for the standard AIRNow report. An example of the report
is shown below.
Selecting the action code in the query will change the code number between 0 and 4 that will show in
the third column of the output file.
To manually override the site code for a mobile site, use the Site Metatag in the Site setup screen in the
Site/Parameter menu under Configuration Editors. Enter in AQCSVSiteCode in the Metatag Name field,
then add in the site code you want to use in the Value field. Click save when finished.
To manually transfer the report that has been queried select the Transfer Now button on the Ribbon at
the top. It will bring up a Select FTP Destination screen where an FTP Configuration can be selected by
clicking the down arrow and selecting from the drop down list. The list of configurations is what has
previously been configured under the AIRNow/FTP Setup screen. . To setup this report to be
automatically transferred, that will include all parameters enabled for AIRNow reporting, refer to
Chapter 4.16.1.c Adding an AIRNow FTP Transfer Task. To setup this report to be ran automatically so
that you can pick which parameters are included on the report, refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a
Scheduled Report Task.
229
8.14 Violation of Standard
To run the Violation of Standards report single click the Violation of Standards Report from the Reports
menu. The Violation of Standards Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the
query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.
This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and parameter is
shown separately per page per month. Three years of data is required for this report to be able to
produce data. It is best to run the report for one parameter at a time, as the report will not show any
data if one of the parameters selected does not have any data, it will state that there is no data even
though at least one of the parameters has data. This report is exactly the same as the VOS report in the
Ambient software, where the report lists data averages that were in violation of NAAQS according to
limits configured. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran
automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
The query for this report also has extra fields to be filled in:
Standard Violations section
Report Overlapping Violations – Click to put a check mark in the box only if you want the
violations of the associated averaging intervals that overlap to be reported; otherwise,
overlapping violation will not be reported.
230
8.15 Met Reports
8.15.1 Joint Frequency Distribution Report
To run the Joint Frequency Distribution report, expand Met Reports from the Reports menu and single
click Joint Frequency Distribution Report. The Joint Frequency Distribution Report tab will open on the
right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate
Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report
Output section. This report has to be ran one site and parameter at a time. This report is exactly the
same as the Joint frequency distribution report in the Ambient software, and shows wind direction
versus wind speed or pollutant. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be
ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
The query for this report also has extra fields to be filled in:
Wind/Pollution Rose Program – Click the down arrow and select the template from the drop down list
that you want to use to report the needed data.
Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the data type from the drop down list that you want
reported.
Wind Direction Parameter Selection – Select the site and wind direction parameter to be reported.
231
8.15.2 Wind/Pollution Rose
To run the Wind Rose, expand Met Reports from the Reports menu and single click Wind/Pollution Rose.
The Wind/Pollution Rose tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection,
open the rose by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the
rose below the query in the Report Output section. This wind rose is exactly the same as the rose that
comes up with the Joint frequency distribution report in the Ambient software, and shows wind
direction versus wind speed or pollutant. An example of the wind rose is shown below. To setup this
report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
The query for this report also has extra fields to be filled in:
Wind/Pollution Rose Program – Click the down arrow and select the template from the drop down list
that you want to use to report the needed data.
Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the data type from the drop down list that you want
reported.
Wind Direction Parameter Selection – Select the site and wind direction parameter to be reported.
232
8.15.3 Meteorological Report
To run the meteorological report, expand Met Reports from the Reports menu and single click
Meteorological Report. The Meteorological Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After
making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at
the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site is shown
separately per each day per page. This report is displayed different but uses the same means as the
Met report in the Ambient software, and shows met data based on the lateral turbulence and wind
speed method. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically
refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
233
234
8.16 Statistical Reports
8.16.1 Maximum Hourly Values
To run the maximum hourly report, expand Statistical Reports from the Reports menu and single click
Maximum Hourly Values. The Maximum Hourly Values tab will open on the right side of the screen.
After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the
Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section which
shows a list of the highest averages, by rank, over a selected time frame. Each site and parameter is
shown separately per page. This report is exactly the same as the Maximum hourly averages report in
the Ambient software, and generates the highest averages by rand over a selected time period. An
example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter
4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
This report also has extra fields to fill out in the query section.
Options section
Hours for Rolling Average – Use the radio buttons to select the number of hours you want to
roll the average. The default is one hour.
Rolling Type – Select between rolling Forward or Backward. For example, if a three-hour
average of hours 03, 04, and 05 should be tagged as occurring at 05, then select Backward. If
this average should be tagged as occurring at 03, then select Forward. The default is Backward.
Report Highest Average Only – Click to put a check mark in the box only if you want just
the highest average. The purpose of this option is to prevent reporting multiple averages from
the same excursion and to comply with federal standards.
Report Overlapping Maximums – Click to put a check mark in the box only if the rolling average
periods overlapped in time.
Number of Averages to Report – Use the radio buttons to select the total number of averages
for the selected time period. Defaults to ten.
235
236
8.16.2 Data Recovery Report
To run the data recovery report, expand Statistical Reports from the Reports menu and single click Data
Recovery Report. The Data Recovery Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making
the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.
This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and parameters are
shown separated section on each page. This report is exactly the same as the Data recovery report in
the Ambient software, a summary of the percentage of total possible data points that were valid during
a selected time period.
Valid Average Scans is the total reads taken for the specified time frame where valid hourly data was
collected.
Valid Cal Scans is the total calibrations where the hourly data was invalid during the calibration.
Total Valid Scans is the total amount of reads before the subtraction of valid calibration scans. The
Total Valid Scans formula is the Valid Average Scans plus the Valid Calibration Scans equal the Total Valid
Scans.
Total Scans in Period is the amount of total reads before the subtraction of invalid reads where data
was not present of invalid.
Percent Recovery is the percentage of total scans in a period. The Percent Recovery formula is the Total
valid scans (or valid averages) divided by the Total scans (or possible averages) in the period. An
example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter
4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
237
8.16.3 Network Data Recovery Report
To run the recovery report, expand Statistical Reports from the Reports menu and single click Network
Data Recovery Report. The Network Data Recovery Report tab will open on the right side of the screen.
After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the
Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site
and parameters are shown separated section on each page. A summary of the percentage of total
possible data points that were valid during a selected time period. An example of the report is shown
below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report
Task.
238
8.16.4 Frequency Distribution
To run the frequency report, expand Statistical Reports from the Reports menu and single click
Frequency Distribution. The Frequency Distribution tab will open on the right side of the screen. After
making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at
the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and
parameters are shown separated section on each page. This report is exactly the same as the
Frequency report in the Ambient software. The frequency report calculates the distribution of data
averages as a percentage of the total number of samples collected, and provides a breakdown of
concentration values that represent the Nth percentiles of a requested data set. For example, the value
under the 50% column means that 50% of the values over the selected time period are that value or
below. Another example, if the 95th percentile for a pollutant for the given time period was 46 ppb,
meaning that 95% of the pollutant readings were at or below 46 ppb. An example of the report is shown
below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report
Task.
239
8.16.5 Concentration Distribution
To run the concentration report, expand Statistical Reports from the Reports menu and single click
Concentration Distribution Report. The Concentration Distribution Report tab will open on the right side
of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report
button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output
section. Each parameter is shown separately per page, and show the number of readings that fall into
user-defined concentration ranges. This report is exactly the same as the Concentration distribution
report in the Ambient software. The data averages are parsed into the respective ranges as described
under the Annual SLAMS (State and Local Air Monitoring Summary) Air Quality Information. The number
of averages that occurred in each range is reported. An example of the report is shown below. To setup
this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
240
8.16.6 Data Analysis
To run the Data Analysis report, expand Statistical Reports from the Reports menu and single click Data
Analysis Report. The Data Analysis tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query
selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will
bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Data Analysis is an open system used
to create reports and graphical summaries designed for a specific task based on categorization of the
data. It is useful for creating unusual reports, for example average ozone value on Tuesdays. First select
Start and End dates Site/Parameter(s), and an Average Interval. Data Analysis is more useful for looking
at a single parameter at a time for one or more sites, for example, ozone for the month of August.
Default filters are Site, Parameter, and Report Value (Average). To add more Filter Fields, right-click in
Drop Filter Fields area and select Show Field List, or click Show Column Choose on the ribbon at the top
of the screen . From the pop-up list select and click the Add to Filter Area button, or click-drag to the
‘Drag Filter Fields Here’ area.
Data Analysis Tool with new Filter Field of Week Day Name put in the column area. After dragging a
new Filter Field to the ‘Drop Filter Fields Here’ area, which is a holding area where fields are not active
but available for immediate reactivation, the new field will not be activated until you drag it to the
column area. Once in the column area the new field information will be displayed. This example shows
the new Filter Field Week Day Name. Scroll to the bottom of the report to see Totals. If Week Day is
selected instead of Week Day Name, it will give a numerically ordered display. To remove a header,
right-click the header and select Hide. To deactivate a header drag it back to the inactive area.
241
Data Analysis Tool with Hour added as a new Filter Field, which shows a grid with Hour selected as a
new Filter Field. Since the grid can be large, you could drag the Date field up the ‘Drag Filter Fields Here’
area and deactivate the Date column.
Data Analysis Tool with the Date column deactivated. In this example a grid with Hour selected as a new
Filter Field. Since the grid can be large, the Date field can be drug up to the ‘Drag Filter Fields Here’ area
and deactivate the Date column.
242
Data Analysis Tool with the Date and Interval columns deactivated. In this example only one Interval
was selected (001h), so the grid further simplified by deactivating the Interval column, by dragging it to
the ‘Drop Filter Fields Here’ area.
Data Analysis Tool with the Date and Interval columns deactivated. With the Hour moved to the ‘Drag
Row Fields’ area, and Week Day Name moved back into the column area for the Reports menu.
If the Interval column is deactivated by moving it to the ‘Drop Filter Fields Here’ area, how the rows are
displayed can be controlled. For example, drag the Hour field into the ‘Drag Row Fields Here’ area and
the Week Day Name back into the column area. This example shows composite statistics for a month,
broken down by hour and day of the week, but you can combine data for more than one site by using
filters to break down data into different categories. If Site is moved back to the holding area, the filter
will be removed and data will be grouped together, which causes the scroll bar to be removed and the
second site can also be seen. Multiple parameters could also be grouped or merged; for example when
ozone parameters use different names.
Left click on the Report Value, and select one from the following options: Count, Sum, Min, Max,
Average. Changing this selection can be helpful for answering questions like “What is the highest value
for Monday, 9 a.m. for the entire year?”
243
Saving Grid Layouts as Favorites
The Favorites editor only saves the data query itself, not the changes in filters. To save an analysis
layout, click Save Grid Layout or Apply Grid Layout on the Ribbon at the top.
Chart Display
To display the data analysis report as a chart, click the Show Chart button on the Ribbon at the top of
the page and select a row, column, or range of cells. This example shows a Point graph by Hour.
244
8.16.6.a Data Analysis Tool Sample Output
The Data Analysis Tool can be used to create ad hoc reports and graphs correlating data sets with
parameters, such as hour of the day, day of the week or month, and identify composite statistics and
trends. These examples show day of the week averages and hour of the day averages for larger data
sets.
Data Analysis Tool Sample Output
245
246
8.16.7 Statistical Report
To run the statistical report, expand Statistical Reports from the Reports menu and single click Statistical
Report. The Statistical Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query
selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will
bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and parameter is separated
into sections on each page. An example of the report is shown below.
The purpose of the statistical report is to provide a report for a review of a range of data against
historical statistics and identify unusual conditions, as well as a comparison against previous years of the
same parameter and date/time range, with calculated ratios. This report is similar to the Statistical
functions in the Data Editor and used to identify data that lies outside the norm. To setup this report to
be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
247
8.17 Sample Data Reports
8.17.1 Monthly Sample Data Report
To run the monthly sample report, expand Sample Data Reports from the Reports menu and single click
Monthly Sample Data Report. The Monthly Sample Data Report tab will open on the right side of the
screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on
the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query that shows each parameter per
page, and is meant to be ran for a month’s worth of averages but can also be ran for daily data as well.
This report is similar to the Monthly non-continuous summary report in the Ambient software. An
example of the report is shown below.
248
8.17.2 Sample Hourly Daily Comparison Report
To run the sample hourly daily comparison, expand Sample Data Reports from the Reports menu and
single click Sample Hourly Daily Comparison Report. The Sample Hourly Daily Comparison Report tab
will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting
the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query.
This report allows FRM sample data and hourly Particulate Matter data to be compared. No
other report can do this because of the different sections of the database each type of data is
stored. An example of the report is shown below.
249
8.17.3 Sample/Hourly Comparison Graph
To run the sample /hourly comparison graph, expand Sample Data Reports from the Reports menu and
single click Sample/ Hourly Comparison Graph. The Sample /Hourly Comparison Graph tab will open on
the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the graph by selecting the Generate
Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the graph below the query. To change the
charted lines to gray, check the box beside of Use Grayscale Lines on the query selection. To use
dynamic scaling, check the box beside of Use Dynamic Scaling on the query selection. An example of the
report is shown below.
250
8.17.4 Basic Sample Data Export
To run the basic sample data export, expand Sample Data Reports from the Reports menu and single
click Basic Sample Data Export. The Basic Sample Data Export tab will open on the right side of the
screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on
the the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query. An example of the report is
shown below.
251
8.18 Annotations Report
To run the annotations report, expand the Notation Reports from the Reports menu and single click
Annotations Report. The Annotations Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making
the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.
This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and parameter are
shown separately per page just the same as it does in the Ambient software. An example of the report
is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled
Report Task.
252
8.19 Audit Trail Report
To run the audit trail, expand the Notation Reports from the Reports menu and single click Audit Trail
Report. The Audit Trail Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query
selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will
bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and parameter is shown
separately per page, unlike the Ambient software where it was displayed in a grid form from within the
Matrix Editor. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this report to be ran automatically
refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
253
8.20 Configuration Reports
8.20.1 Site Configuration Report
To run the site configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click Site
Configuration Report. The Site Configuration Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After
selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at
the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Multiple sites are
shown on each page, which is similar to the Ambient software when running the Site Configuration
under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown below.
254
8.20.2 Parameter Configuration Report
To run the parameter configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single
click Parameter Configuration Report. The Parameter Configuration Report tab will open on the right
side of the screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report
button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output
section. Each site and its parameters are shown separately per page, which is similar to the Ambient
software when running the Instrument Configuration under the Network configuration report. An
example of the report is shown below.
255
8.20.3 Channel Configuration Report
To run the channel configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click
Channel Configuration Report. The Channel Configuration Report tab will open on the right side of the
screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on
the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each
site and its parameters are shown separately per page, which is similar to the Ambient software when
running the Instrument Configuration under the Network configuration report. An example of the
report is shown below.
256
8.20.4 Calibration Configuration Report
To run the calibration configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single
click Calibration Configuration Report. The Calibration Configuration Report tab will open on the right
side of the screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report
button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output
section. Each site and all of its calibration sequences are shown separately per page, the same as the
Ambient software when running the Calibration Configuration under the Network configuration report.
An example of the report is shown below.
257
8.20.5 Scheduled Tasks Report
To run the scheduled tasks report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click
Scheduled Tasks Report. The Scheduled Tasks Report tab will open on the right side of the screen.
There is no query to be selected on this screen, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button
on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section.
This report is similar to the Ambient software when running the Scheduler Setup and Polling Tasks under
the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown below.
258
8.20.6 Calibration Configuration Report
To run the calibration configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single
click Calibration Configuration Report. The Calibration Configuration Report tab will open on the right
side of the screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report
button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output
section. Each site and all of its calibration sequences are shown separately per page, the same as the
Ambient software when running the Calibration Configuration under the Network configuration report.
An example of the report is shown below.
259
8.20.7 Calibration Alarm Configuration Report
To run the calibration alarm report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click
Calibration Alarm Configuration Report. The Calibration Alarm Configuration Report tab will open on
the right side of the screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate
Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report
Output section. Each site and all of its calibration sequences are shown separately per page, the same
as the Ambient software when running the Calibration Configuration under the Network configuration
report. An example of the report is shown below.
260
8.20.8 Logger Configuration Report
To run the logger configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and ingle click
Logger Configuration Report. The Logger Configuration Report tab will open on the right side of the
screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on
the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section.
Multiple sites are shown on each page, which is similar to the Ambient software when running the
Instrument Configuration under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown
below.
261
8.20.9 GSI Configuration Report
To run the GSI configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click GSI
Configuration Report. The GSI Configuration Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After
selecting one or more GSI drivers, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the
Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each
driver is shown separately per page, which is similar to the Ambient software when running the
Instrument Configuration under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown
below.
262
8.20.10 Analog Outputs Configuration Report
To run the analog out configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single
click Analog Outputs Configuration Report. The Analog Outputs Configuration Report tab will open on
the right side of the screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate
Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report
Output section. Each site is shown separately per page, which is similar to the Ambient software when
running the Instrument Configuration under the Network configuration report. An example of the
report is shown below.
263
8.20.11 Digital IO Configuration Report
To run the digital IO configuration report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click
Digital IO Configuration Report. The Digital IO Configuration Report tab will open on the right side of the
screen. After selecting one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on
the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section.
Multiple sites are shown per page, which is similar to the Ambient software when running the
Instrument Configuration under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown
below.
264
8.20.12 Scheduled Tasks Report
To run the scheduled tasks report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click
Scheduled Tasks Report. The Scheduled Tasks Report tab will open on the right side of the screen.
There is no query to be selected on this screen, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button
on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section.
This report is similar to the Ambient software when running the Scheduler Setup and Polling Tasks under
the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown below.
265
8.20.13 Average Alarm Report
To run the average alarm report, expand Configuration from the Reports menu and single click Average
Alarm Report. The Average Alarm Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After selecting
one or more sites, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.
This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and its parameters
are shown separately per page, which is similar to the Ambient software when running the Instrument
Configuration under the Network configuration report. An example of the report is shown below.
266
8.21 Cumulative Report
To run the cumulative report single click the Cumulative Report from the Reports menu and the
Cumulative Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open
the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the
report below the query that shows parameters, units, and the values for each parameter under the site
column. The values are cumulative over the time frame that was entered into the query selection. The
Ambient software does not have such a report. An example of the report is shown below. To setup this
report to be ran automatically refer to Chapter 4.16 Adding a Scheduled Report Task.
267
8.22 Basic Data Export
The purpose of the basic export feature is to export data without limits on the number of columns, page
breaks between sites or days, and more suitable for automated importing to some place such as a web
site, for example. To run the data export, expand Average Reports from the Reports menu and single
click Basic Data Export. The Basic Data Export tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making
the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top.
This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. Each site and parameter
name is shown in columns on one page until it is filled then it will wrap to the second page. Invalid data
is not included on the report. An example of the report is shown below.
268
8.23 Average Data Graph Report
The purpose of the average data graph in a report is so that it doesn’t have to be printed or exported
from the Average Data Editor. To run the average data graph, expand Average Reports from the Reports
menu and single click Average Data Graph Report. The Average Data Graph Report tab will open on the
right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the report by selecting the Generate
Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report
Output section. There are four chart options that the report can be ran with; Use Dynamic Scaling, Use
Grayscale Lines, Suppress Flag Point Colors, and Show Invalid as Empty. An example of the report is
shown below with Use Dynamic Scaling and Show Invalid as empty selected.
269
8.24 Site Health Report
To run the Site Health Report single click the Site Health Report from the Reports menu and the Site
Health Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection, open the
report by selecting the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report
below the query that shows site(s), parameters and their max, min, and average values, primary
measurements, secondary measurements, logbook report, and calibration report. The Ambient
software does not have such a report. An example of the report is shown below.
270
271
Chapter 9: Additional Modules
9.1 Favorites Editor
To setup a favorite single, click the Favorites Editor from the Configuration Editors menu. The Favorites
Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen. As favorites are added they will appear in the
Selected Favorite section on the left of the setup screen.
To add a favorite, select the Add Favorite button on the ribbon at the top. It will clear the fields on the
right side of the Selected Favorite column.
To change an existing favorite, single click on the blue square on the left side of the favorite name in the
Selected favorite column so that the row is highlighted. The setting s for the favorite will open on the
right side of the screen. Make needed changes to the details or the query .
To delete a favorite, single click on the blue square on the left side of the favorite name in the Selected
favorite column so that the row is highlighted. Select the Delete Favorite button on the ribbon at the
top. It will delete the selected favorite without prompting.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Favorites Editor screen, select the disk icon on
the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen
To create a favorite from any other editor or report, complete the desired query, and select the
Favorites tab above the Ribbon at the top. The Ribbon will change to show the Favorites buttons.
Select the Save as Favorite button on the Ribbon at the top. It will bring up Add a Favorite box with the
setup fields for the Favorite Detail section explained below. To make changes to a favorite created from
an editor or report, simply open the favorite in the Favorites Editor to make adjustments.
Favorite Detail tab
Favorite Details section
Menu Item – Click the down arrow and select a menu from the drop down list.
Favorite Name – Enter in the name that you choose to call the menu for your own reference, or
you can accept the default that it gives.
Favorite Description – Enter in the description of the name you have chosen to call the menu
selection, or it can be left blank.
Favorite Scope – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list if this favorite is to be
used by a specific user or all users.
User – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which user this setting is to be
applied to.
272
Launch on Application Startup – Click to check the box to launch the application that has been
chosen for the favorite at the startup of AirVision.
Run Launch on Query – Click to check the box to execute the query that has been setup under
the Favorite Query tab when this Favorite is selected.
Favorite Query tab
Date Range Selection
Current Day, Month, Quarter, Week, and Year – Does not use the date and look back fields and
simply uses the current date range that is selected.
Fixed Date Range – Use the radio buttons or type in the Start and End Date fields the date range
this report is include data.
Last Month, Quarter, and Week – Does not use the date and look back fields and simply uses
the previous date range that is selected from the current date.
Days Back – Use the radio buttons or type in the Look Back Days field the number of days you
want to the report to go back to and get data from.
Parameter Selection section – Select the site and parameter that is to be included on this report.
Average Interval section – Select the type of data that is to be included on this report.
Query String section – Shows the string being used to create this report. If you use the Clear Selection
button it will remove the string and it cannot be brought back without being manually typed in or the
task deleted and recreated
273
Once you have save the menu as a favorite, you can test it be clicking the Test button on the Ribbon at
the top.
My Favorites Editor
The My Favorites Editor can be accessed from the Configuration Editors or from the Favorites Tab above
the Ribbon at the top. My Favorites will allow the user that is logged into the software to edit that
user’s own favorites. It works in the same manner as the basic Favorites Editor with the exception the
Favorite Scope field and the User field, which are not accessible as they are specific to the user logged
in.
274
9.2 Server Restart
To manually restart the service, single click Server Restart from the Utilities menu. The Server Restart
tab will open on the right side of the screen. Select the executive you want to restart by clicking in the
blue box on the left side of the executive name to highlight the row. Select the Restart Executive
Service button on the Ribbon at the top. It will ask if you are sure you want to restart the selected
executive service. Select Yes and the service will restart, select No and the service will remain in its
current state.
275
9.3 SQL Execution Tool
To execute a SQL statement, single click SQL Execution Tool from the Utilities menu. The SQL Execution
Tool tab will open on the right side of the screen. After entering in the SQL statement in the SQL Query
Test to Execute section, select the Execute SQL button on the Ribbon at the top. The results will bring
up a Query Results tab beside of the Messages tab in the lower section. The Query Results tab will be in
focus and will display the results of the statement that was executed. To view the message information
click the Messages tab to see how many records were affected and how long it took the query to run.
Examples are shown below.
276
To load an existing SQL file, select the Load SQL File button or Load Saved XML Results button on the
Ribbon at the top. It will bring up an Open box like you are used to seeing in Windows, where you can
browse to the location of the existing file that you want to execute.
You can also export the results to Excel or XML or simply save the executed query to a file.
277
9.4 AQS Import Tools
9.4.1 AQS Text Import Tool
To run the Text Import Tool, single click the AQS Text Import Tool from the Utilities menu. The AQS Text
Import Tool tab will open on the right side of the screen.
Select the Browse button at the end of the Location of AQS Text File to Import field. This will bring up a
Select Import File box where you can browse to the location of where the AQS file is stored that you
want to import. Once the file has been selected it will show the path to the file and the file name in the
import field. Select the Process Import button on the Ribbon at the top.
The data is imported by matching the EPA codes in the file with the EPA codes set in the sites and
parameters to import the data to the correct location in the database. The text import can import
hourly data, 24 hour data records for particulate data, and PARS pipe delimited records , but it cannot
import 5 minute SO2 data.
9.4.2 AQS XML Import Tool
To run the XML Import Tool, single click the AQS XML Import Tool from the Utilities menu. The AQS XML
Import Tool tab will open on the right side of the screen.
Select the Browse button at the end of the Location of AQS XML File to Import field. This will bring up a
Select Import File box where you can browse to the location of where the AQS XML file is stored that
you want to import. Once the file has been selected it will show the path to the file and the file name in
the import field. Select the Process Import button on the Ribbon at the top.
The data is imported by matching the EPA codes in the file with the EPA codes set in the sites and
parameters to import the data to the correct location in the database. The XML import can only import
hourly data records.
278
9.5 Database Export
To run the Database Export, expand Table Import/Export from the Utilities menu and single click
Database Export. The Database Export tab will open on the right side of the screen.
In the Export Options section select the date range of data that is to be exported along with the
configuration. Select the Browse button at the end of the Location of File to Export field. This will bring
up an Export File Location box where you can browse to the location of where the zipped XML files are
to be exported to. Once the location has been selected it will show the path to the file and the file name
in the export field. Select the Process Export button on the Ribbon at the top. The configuration is
exported to a zipped file that holds the XML files. The purpose of this export function is to help Agilaire
in the need to troubleshooting the customer’s database. This form of exporting should not be used as a
primary backup process for the database.
279
9.6 Creating the CLAIRE Files to Update the CLAIRE System
The CLAIRE system gets its information from a number of files, but mainly the VoiceAQI file. The
VoiceAQI file is created from the AQI setup. Any parameter that is used in the CLAIRE system has to
setup in the AQI Editor for a 24 hour Average Period. The VoiceAQI file used by the CLAIRE system has
to be created automatically. This is done by obtaining a license key from Agilaire that will enable the
Claire function, and a script from Agilaire that is to be ran in the SQL Execution Tool, that will
automatically create the tasks in the Task Scheduler. The task will need to be slightly adjusted to run
with the customers AirVision settings. To do this go through the following steps.
Step 1. Save the license key file to the AirVision hard drive that was provided to you by Agilaire. Then
close all tabs in AirVision. Open the Feature Licensing Tool under Utilities. Highlight the text in
the top section and delete it. Select the Load License File button on the Ribbon at the top.
Browse to where you stored the license key file and double click the (*)_Key.txt to open the file.
Copy and paste the test into the top section of the Feature Licensing Tool. Select the Apply
License Key button on the Ribbon at the top. Close and reopen the AirVision software and log
in for the Claire settings to be added to the AirVision software.
Step 2. Open the SQL Execution Tool located under Utilities. Copy and paste the SQL script that was
provided to you by Agilaire, into the top section of the SQL tool. Select the Execute SQL button
on the Ribbon at the top to execute the script. When it has finished it will say one row affected
in the bottom section of the tool. Close the SQL Execution Tool. This process will add the
needed task to the Task Scheduler to automatically create the files needed for the Claire system.
Step 3. The task will be added to the end of the list of scheduled tasks that have been created. Select
the task called VoiceAQI to bring up its settings in the blue area at the bottom. This is a group
task. The name of the task needs to remain VoiceAQI in order for this task to run properly.
Step 4. Under the Task Schedule Details section the start time default to the current date and time that
the script was ran to create the task. The time will need to be adjusted so that the task is
scheduled to run after the polling task that collects the hourly data has completed and updated
the data to the database. In order to the Claire system to stay updated the Repeat Interval will
need to be set to run once and hour.
Step 5. Under the Task Details section the Task Name needs to remain defaulted to VoiceAQI, and the
task needs to be enabled.
280
Step 6. Under the Group Options sections, check the box to Execute Tasks in Parallel.
Step 7. There will be five sub tasks listed; VoiceAQI.DAT, VoiceAQI.BAK,LastAQI.DAT, LastAQI.TMP,
and AQIDates.DAT. All of these sub task names need to remain defaulted and enabled.
Changing any of these names or disabling them will cause the task to stop functioning and the
Claire system will no longer receive updated data.
Step 8. At the end of the row for the VoiceAQI.DAT, click the Edit Task button and it will open a task
window for the VoiceAQI.DAT.
a. The Task Name needs to remain VoiceAQI.DAT and enabled.
b. Under the Report Task Options section the Report field needs to remain set to Voice AQI
Report.
c. Only if a smaller selection of parameters needs to be selected should tbe settings under the
Configure Report Query button be changed, otherwise it will use all of the parameters setup
in the AQI Program Editor for 24 hour Average Period, rolling backward and truncated. The
rest of the settings for the Configure Report Query button should remain defualted.
d. Select the File Output Options tab. The Output File Type field should remain defaulted to
Export File as Text.
e. Under the File Name Construction section, the File Output Base Name field needs to remain
defaulted to VoiceAQI. The File Extension field needs to remain defualted to DAT.
f. The Append Date To File Name section needs to remain blank.
g. Under the Save File Options section, the Save Report to File Enabled needs to remain
checked. The File Output Path field is defaulted to C:\Data|Claire Test, however, this field
does need to be changed to location on the customer’s network that the Claire system can
access. Click the Browse button at the end of the field to select the path to the location the
file needs to be written to.
h. The Upload File Via FTP Options section needs to remain blank. Click OK when finish.
Step 9. At the end of the row for the VoiceAQI.BAK, click the Edit Task button and it will open a task
window for the VoiceAQI.BAK.
a. The Task Name needs to remain VoiceAQI.BAK and enabled.
b. Under the Report Task Options section the Report field needs to remain set to Voice AQI
BAK Report.
c. Only if a smaller selection of parameters needs to be selected should tbe settings under the
281
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Configure Report Query button be changed, otherwise it will use all of the parameters setup
in the AQI Program Editor for 24 hour Average Period, rolling backward and truncated. The
rest of the settings for the Configure Report Query button should remain defualted. If the
list of parameters are changed they must match the list that was selected under the
VoiceAQI.DAT sub task in Step 8.
Select the File Output Options tab. The Output File Type field should remain defaulted to
Export File as Text.
Under the File Name Construction section, the File Output Base Name field needs to remain
defaulted to VoiceAQI. The File Extension field needs to remain defualted to BAK.
The Append Date To File Name section needs to remain blank.
Under the Save File Options section, the Save Report to File Enabled needs to remain
checked. The File Output Path field is defaulted to C:\Data|Claire Test, however, this field
does need to be changed to location on the customer’s network that the Claire system can
access. Click the Browse button at the end of the field to select the path to the location the
file needs to be written to. This has to be the same location as to where the VoiceAQI.DAT
file is being written to in Step 8.
The Upload File Via FTP Options section needs to remain blank. Click OK when finish.
Step 10. At the end of the row for the LastAQI.DAT, click the Edit Task button and it will open a task
window for the LastAQI.DAT.
a. The Task Name needs to remain LastAQI.DAT and enabled.
b. In the Report Task Options section the Report field needs to remain set to LastAQI Report.
c. Only if a smaller selection of parameters needs to be selected should tbe settings under the
Configure Report Query button be changed, otherwise it will use all of the parameters setup
in the AQI Program Editor for 24 hour Average Period, rolling backward and truncated. The
rest of the settings for the Configure Report Query button should remain defualted. If the
list of parameters are changed they must match the list that was selected under the
VoiceAQI.DAT sub task in Step 8.
d. Select the File Output Options tab. The Output File Type should remain defaulted to Export
File as Text.
e. Under the File Name Construction section, the File Output Base Name field needs to remain
defaulted to LastAQI. The File Extension field needs to remain defualted to DAT.
f. The Append Date To File Name section needs to remain blank.
g. Under the Save File Options section, the Save Report to File Enabled needs to remain
checked. The File Output Path field is defaulted to C:\Data|Claire Test, however, this field
does need to be changed to location on the customer’s network that the Claire system can
access. Click the Browse button at the end of the field to select the path to the location the
file needs to be written to. This has to be the same location as to where the VoiceAQI.DAT
file is being written to in Step 8.
h. The Upload File Via FTP Options section needs to remain blank. Click OK when finish.
Step 11. At the end of the row for the LastAQI.TMP, click the Edit Task button and it will open a task
window for the LastAQI.TMP.
a. The Task Name needs to remain LastAQI.TMP and enabled.
b. In the Report Task Options section the Report field needs to remain set to VoiceAQILastTmp
Report.
c. Only if a smaller selection of parameters needs to be selected should tbe settings under the
Configure Report Query button be changed, otherwise it will use all of the parameters setup
282
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
in the AQI Program Editor for 24 hour Average Period, rolling backward and truncated. The
rest of the settings for the Configure Report Query button should remain defualted. If the
list of parameters are changed they must match the list that was selected under the
VoiceAQI.DAT sub task in Step 8.
Select the File Output Options tab. The Output File Type should remain defaulted to Export
File as Text.
Under the File Name Construction section, the File Output Base Name field needs to remain
defaulted to LastAQI. The File Extension field needs to remain defualted to TMP.
The Append Date To File Name section needs to remain blank.
Under the Save File Options section, the Save Report to File Enabled needs to remain
checked. The File Output Path field is defaulted to C:\Data|Claire Test, however, this field
does need to be changed to location on the customer’s network that the Claire system can
access. Click the Browse button at the end of the field to select the path to the location the
file needs to be written to. This has to be the same location as to where the VoiceAQI.DAT
file is being written to in Step 8.
The Upload File Via FTP Options section needs to remain blank. Click OK when finish.
Step 12. At the end of the row for the AQIDates.DAT, click the Edit Task button and it will open a task
window for the AQIDates.DAT.
a. The Task Name needs to remain AQIDates.DAT and enabled.
b. In the Report Task Options section the Report field needs to remain set to VoiceAQIDates
Report.
c. Only if a smaller selection of parameters needs to be selected should tbe settings under the
Configure Report Query button be changed, otherwise it will use all of the parameters setup
in the AQI Program Editor for 24 hour Average Period, rolling backward and truncated. The
rest of the settings for the Configure Report Query button should remain defualted. If the
list of parameters are changed they must match the list that was selected under the
VoiceAQI.DAT sub task in Step 8.
d. Select the File Output Options tab. The Output File Type should remain defaulted to Export
File as Text.
e. Under the File Name Construction section, the File Output Base Name field needs to remain
defaulted to AQIDates. The File Extension field needs to remain defualted to DAT.
f. The Append Date To File Name section needs to remain blank.
g. Under the Save File Options section, the Save Report to File Enabled needs to remain
checked. The File Output Path field is defaulted to C:\Data|Claire Test, however, this field
does need to be changed to location on the customer’s network that the Claire system can
access. Click the Browse button at the end of the field to select the path to the location the
file needs to be written to. This has to be the same location as to where the VoiceAQI.DAT
file is being written to in Step 8.
h. The Upload File Via FTP Options section needs to remain blank. Click OK when finish.
Step 13. Click the Save save when finished.
283
Important Note: Once the CLAIRE system is being updated by the data from AirVision, sites can no
longer be imported by the Import Sites button in the CLAIRE software. If the Import Sites button is
clicked it will corrupt the database and cause the software to start to give error messages. The only way
to restore the database once this is done is to restore a backup database.
If a backup database does not exist, one should be created at this time. Because CLAIRE’s database is an
Access file, to make a backup copy of the database simply close CLAIRE and select and copy the
recordinginfo.mdb file and paste it in a safe location that it can be retrieved from in the case that it has
to be put back into place.
If new sites and parameters need to be added to CLAIRE, then they will need to be added to the old
Ambient system, the CLAIRE directory changed to look at the Ambient config, then the sites and
parameters can be re-imported. Otherwise, you will need to keep a copy of the Ambient configuration
so that it can be provided to Agilaire, along with the information that is to be added so the files can be
reconfigured with the new site(s) and parameters.
284
Chapter 10: Security
To open the security editors, expand Security from the Configuration Editors menu and single click
wither Group Permissions, Groups Editor, My User Settings, or User Editor. The editor’s tab will open on
the right side of the screen. The default database has been setup with an administrative login called
Admin. Each editor is described below.
10.1 User Editor
To add a new user, select the Add User button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields on the
right side of the screen, which are described below. As users are added they will appear in the Users
column on the left of the setup screen.
To open an existing user, single click the user name in the Users column on the left side of the editor and
it will open their setting on the right side. Existing user names cannot be changed. If the user name is
in need of being changed the user will have to be deleted, saved, and re-entered in with the new user
name and password.
To delete an existing user, single click the user name from the list in the Users column that you want to
remove. Select the Delete User button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure
you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the user is immediately removed from the list.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the User Editor, select the disk icon on the Quick
Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.
User Details section
Account
User Name – Enter in a name that represents the user.
Email – If this user is to receive any of the email alarms or reports enter in the users
email address.
Enabled – If this user is to be active with using the software, the enabled box will need
to be checked. If a user is temporarily moved to another division, and you don’t want
their login to be active while they are away, you can simple disable their login by
removing the check mark until they return to original position.
Set User Password button – Click the password button to open a smaller box that will
have a field to enter in the password and another field to confirm the password you just
entered.
285
Name – In the case that you gave a user a login and password that is not their name but you
want to keep track of who the user login and passwords belong to you can fill in the information
fields for First, Middle, Last, and Title. None of which are required.
Contact Addresses
Add… Contact Address button – This button allows you to add multiple emails for the
same user account. Depending on which boxes are checked for each email will depend
on what gets sent to that particular email address. For example: if you have Report
Notifications checked for more than one email address, when that user is selected for
reports in the Notification Subscription setup it will send the selected reports to the
emails that were selected for Report Notifications in the setup of the User Editor. What
get sent to any of the additional emails will also be sent to the main email setup for the
user.
Type – Default is Email, but could be changed to text in the event that the ADVP is
controlling what is being sent out.
Label – Type in this field what the email is to be receiving. For example: if you have
Report Notifications checked you could type Reports in this field. There cannot be two
of the Label fields identical for the same user, even if the email is different. If you try to
use the same label for more than one email it will give a SQL error.
Address – Enter in an email address different than any of the other email address setup
for the user.
Tasks Notifications – Check this box to have notifications that have been setup in the
Task Scheduler sent to the selected email.
Report Notifications – Check this box to have reports sent to the selected email.
Alarm Notifications – Check this box to have notifications of alarms sent to the selected
email.
ADVP Notifications – Check this box to have ADVP messages sent to the selected email.
286
10.2 My User Info
A user can make changes to their login by opening My User Info. The User Name is grayed out by
default as it cannot be changed by the user that is not the administrator. However the user can change
their password, email address, first, middle, or last name, and their title, or any of the additional emails
and notification options the user has setup.
After making any changes in My User Info, select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very
top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.
10.3 Groups Editor
After adding users you have to add the users to a group in order for the users to have permission to use
certain or all screens. Users can be members of multiple groups as security is attached to the group not
the individual user.
To add a new group, select the Add Group button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put a blank field at
the bottom of the groups section where you would enter in the name of the group and a description of
who is in the group. Click the blank asterisks row under the Users in group section and click the down
arrow and select a user. If more than one user is to be added to the group then select the next blank
link under the Users in group and click the down arrow and select another user. Continue with these
steps until you have added the needed users.
To open an existing group, single click on the left side of the group name under the Groups section. It
will open the users in that group under the Users in group section.
To delete an existing group, single click the group under the Groups section Test Selection section that
you want to remove. Select the Delete Group button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you
to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the group is immediately removed
from the list.
To delete one user from a group, single click the group you want to delete from under the Group column
on the left side of the screen, then single click the user you want to delete from under the Users in
group column on the right side of the screen, and press the delete key on the keyboard. A message will
appear prompting if you are sure you want to delete the row that has been selected. Click Yes to delete
287
the user or Click No to cancel the deletion. If the user is deleted click the Save button before proceeding
to any other step. Do not delete more than one user at a time before clicking Save, or it will generate
errors.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Groups Editor, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.
10.4 Group Permissions
After adding a group(s) you have to add the permissions for each group in order for the users in the
groups to have permission to use certain or all screens.
To add a new group permission, click the down arrow at the top in the Group field and select the group
from the drop down list that needs permissions setup and it will list the users that was setup for that
group. Select one of the users in the list under the Users in group section. Select on the right side under
the Available permissions section what you want that user to have permissions to. Select the Add
Permission button on the Ribbon at the top. Once a permission has been added to a user the text will
darken in and the word Assigned will be placed in the right column beside of the permission you
enabled. If the permissions you have added pertain to all of the sites simply click the box beside of
Apply to all sites under the Limit to sites section. If it pertains to certain sites uncheck the box for all site
and click the down arrow and select a site per each row. Keep repeating the steps until you have
selected all of the permission you want the user(s) to have and for the needed sites. Repeat these steps
with each user until finished.
To open an existing group permission, click the down arrow in the Group field at the top and select the
group from the drop down list. Select the user under the Users in group section and it will show the
permissions setup for that user on the right side under the Available permissions section. As you select
a site and parameter the fields in the other four sections will change to reveal the setting for that
parameter. If you select a permission for a user by mistake simply select the group for that user and
select the user, then select the permission and select the Remove Permission button on the Ribbon at
the top. It will remove the Assigned tag beside of the permission.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Group Permissions Editor, select the disk icon
on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.
Child permissions can added or delete in the same manner as described above.
Important! When permissions are added to a group, all users in that group get the same permissions.
Different permissions cannot be given to different users under the same group. If a user needs to have
288
different permissions that the rest of the users in a particular group; that user will need to be added to
another group or removed from the existing group and added to a different group, or possibly put in a
group by themselves.
289
Chapter 11: Quick Reference to the Software
11.1 AirVision menus compared to Ambient menus
In AirVision
In Ambient
AIRNow can be found…..
Configuration Editors…..
Site/Parameter
Parameter Template
Report Configuration….
AIRNow / FTP Setup
Reports…..
AIRNow Reports…..
AIRNow Report
Manual Transfer
AIRNow AQCSV Report
Manual Transfer
Task Scheduler……
AIRNow/FTP Transfer Task
Scheduled Report Task….
FTP transfer
AIRNow can be found…..
FTP/AIRNow…..
Setup…..
Setup polling tasks…
Report Information
Manual Transfer……
Alarms can be found…..
Configuration Editors.….
Email Alarm Trigger Editor
Task Scheduler
Reports / Logger Reports…..
Alarm Journal
Alarms can be found…..
Setup…..
Set up report email information
Set up pager information
Set up advanced pager and email
Information
Set up advanced config options
Edit average alarms
AQI can be found…..
Configuration Editors…..
Site/Parameter
Report Configurations….
AQI Program Editor
Reports….
AQI Report – Current
AQI Report – Standard
AQI Report –Range
AQI Levels Report
AQI Monthly Report
AQI can be found…..
Ambient…..
Set up AQI levels
Set up EPA codes
AQI report
290
AQI Monthly Group Report
Voice AQI Report (for CLAIRE users only)
AQS can be found…..
Configuration Editors….
Site/Parameter
Flags Editor
Utilities…..
AQS Text Import Tool (2.2)
AQS XML Import Tool (2.2)
Reports…..
AQS 2.2 Text Report
AQS 2.2 XML Report
AQS 3.0 XML Report
AQS can be found…..
Ambient…..
Set up EPA codes
EPA…..
Generate re-engineered AIRS output
Import re-engineered AIRS data
Calibrations can be found…..
Configuration Editors…..
Data Source Details….
Site…..
Logger…..
Calibrations
Calibration Expected Value Editor……
Reports…..
Calibration Reports…..
Calibration Results
Calibration Trend Graph
Calibration Export
Calibration X Bar R Viewer
Multi Phase Calibration Report
USEPA Cal Zero Drift Report
Configuration….
Calibration Configuration Report
Calibration Alarm Configuration Report
Data Editors…..
Calibration Data Editor
Calibration Adjust Tool - (enabled with special key)
Calibration can be found…..
Setup……
Set up calibration information
Quick expected value editor
Reports…..
Calibration report
Channels/Parameters can be found…..
Configuration Editors…..
Data Source Details…
Channels Editor
Parameter Template
Site/Parameter
Channels/Parameter can be found…..
Setup…..
Instrument information
291
Configuration Reports can be found…..
Reports…..
Configuration…..
Analog Outputs Configuration Report
Average Alarm Report
Calibration Alarm Configuration Report
Calibration Configuration Report
Channel Configuration Report
Digital IO Configuration Report
GSI Configuration Report
Logger Configuration Report
Math Equation Report
Notification Configuration Report
Parameter Configuration Report
Scheduled Task Report
Site Configuration Report
Configuration Reports can be found…..
Reports…..
Network configuration report
Data can be found…..
Reports…..
Average Reports…..
Data with Flags
Basic Data Export
Summary Reports…..
Daily Parameter Report
Daily Summary Report
Monthly Report
Sample Data Reports…..
Monthly Sample Report
Basic Sample Data Export
Data Editors…..
Average Data Editor
Sample Data Editor
Data can be found…..
Reports…..
Data reports
Minute summary report
Hourly summary report
Daily summary report
Multi hourly monthly report
Non-continuous report
Monthly non-continuous monthly
reports
Flags can be found…..
Configuration Editors …..
Flags Editor
Data Editors….
Average Data Editor
Flags can be found…..
Matrix data editor……
Flags……
Edit Flags
Set Flag Colors and Null Value Codes
Add User Flag
Reports…..
Flag report
Editors…..
Add or edit offline data
Matrix data editor
Batch edit data and flags
Move raw to validated data
Particulate calculation editor
Non-Continuous data editor
292
Logger can be found…..
Configuration Editors…..
Task Scheduler
Utilities…..
Link to Logger
Logger Download
Manual Poll
Status Displays…..
Log Viewer
Task Status
Reports……..
Logger Reports…..
Alarm Journal
Central Messages
Input Line Status Report
Power Failure Report
Internal Reports…..
Journal Message Log
Logger can be found…..
Setup…..
Polling tasks
Build strings to configure data logger
Selective instrument download to data
logger
Editors…..
Scheduled tasks
Utilities…..
Link to logger
Manual Poll
Reports…..
Status reports…..
Communication Log
Power Failures
New Input Line Status Changes
Historical Input Line Status Changes
Operator Messages
Alarm Logs
Logs can be found…..
Data Editors…..
LogBook Entry Editor
Reports…..
LogBook Report
Internal Reports…..
Journal Message Log
Logger Reports…..
Alarm Journal
Central Messages
Input Line Status Report
Power Failure Report
Status Displays…….
Task Status
Log Viewer
List Editors…..
Log Book Category Editor
Logs can be found…..
Reports…..
Status report…..
Communication Log
Power Failures
New Input Line Status Changes
Historical Input Line Changes
Operator Messages
Alarm Logs
Logins & Passwords can be found…..
Configuration Editors…..
Security
Logins and Passwords can be found…..
Administrative login…..
Security
Meteorological can be found…..
Configuration Editors…..
Report Configurations….
Meteorological can be found…..
Ambient…..
Set up wind rose levels
293
Frequency Distribution Editor
Wind Rose Levels Editor
Reports…..
Met Reports…..
Joint Frequency Distribution Report
Wind / Pollution Rose
Meteorological Report
Set up meteorological report
Joint frequency report
Meteorological report
Non-continuous Data can be found…..
Configuration Editors…..
Site/Parameter
Data Editors…..
Sample Data Editor
Reports…
Sample Data Report….
Monthly Sample Data Report
Sample Hourly Daily Comparison Report
Sample/Hourly Comparison Graph
Non-continuous Data can be found….
Setup…..
Set up instrument information
Add or edit offline data …..
Matrix data editor…..
Batch edit data and flags….
Ambient…..
Non-continuous report
Monthly non-continuous summary reports
Monthly non-continuous parameter reports
Polling can be found…..
Configuration Editors…..
Task Scheduler
Utilities…..
Manual Poll
Status Displays…..
Log Viewer
Task status
Reports……
Internal Reports…
Journal Message Log
Polling can be found…..
Editors…..
Schedule tasks
Utilities…..
Manual Poll
Reports…..
Status Reports…..
Communication Log
Purging data can be found……
Utilities…..
Archive/Purge Data….
Purge Average Data
Configuration Editors….
Task Scheduler
Purging data can be found…..
Editors……
Batch Editor
Violation of Standards can be found…..
Configuration Editors…..
Violation of Standards Editor
Reports…..
Violation of Standards
Violation of Standards can be found…..
Ambient…..
Set up violation limits
Violation of standards report
294
Wind Speed & Direction can be found…..
Configuration Editors…..
Report Configurations….
Wind Rose Levels Editor
Reports…..
Wind/Pollution Rose
Joint Frequency Distribution
Wind Speed & Direction can be found…..
Ambient…..
Set up wind rose levels
Joint frequency distribution
11.2 AirVision menus compared to AVTrend menus
In AirVision
Under Configuration Editors…..
Site/Parameter
Data Source Details
Server Configuration
In AVTrend
Under Configuration Editors …..
Parameter Settings
Logger Channels
PC Configuration
295
Chapter 12: Troubleshooting
12.1
Do not change the security settings for the Admin and Agilaire user name and password, as this can
permanently look the user out of the software.
12.2
The AirVision Server service should be set to start automatically, and when it is running it will say
started. If the service says it is starting or is blank, then it is not actively running.
12.3
When getting the message ‘ You have saved changes that may require the AirVision services to be
restarted. Would you like to restart the AirVision services now?’ go ahead and click Yes to restart the
service, or you can manually restart the service if more changes are to be made. If unsure of more
changes go ahead and restart the service when the message box appears. This message will appear
when changes have been made concerning communications.
12.4
If the AirVision Server service won’t start and gives a message that some services have been stopped,
can be due to a couple of different things. Make sure the AirVision Server software is able to access the
296
AVData database. An incomplete or corrupted installation of SQL can also keep the service from
starting. Also, if the name of the PC is all numerical characters will keep the service from starting. The
PC name has to have a combination of alpha-numeric characters.
12.5
When logging into the menu it gives error “An unexpected error in this application has been detected.
In order to determine the cause of this error and provide a resolution, Please submit this error report for
review and diagnosis”, usually means the AirVision Server service is not started. Start the service and try
to log in again, and it should be successful.
12.6
If a user’s Windows login or login permissions change, those settings have to also be changed for the
AirVision Server service in order for the service to start up under the new login.
12.7
When logging into AirVision it gives an error unable to connect to specified server, or the target machine
actively refused it; the AirVision Server service is not running. The service will need to be started from
under the Windows Control Panel | Administrative Tools | Services.
12.8
Things that can cause the AirVision Server service to not start:
1. If the name of the SQL Server PC is not setup correctly in the Server Settings Editor screen.
2. If the SQL services are not started.
3. If SQL does not allow Windows authentication logon and requires a user name and password, then
SQL authentication will need to be selected in the Server Settings Editor screen, and the user name and
password entered in to allow the AirVision PC to log into SQL Server.
4. If the PC is not logged into Windows with an administrative login.
5. If the administrative user and/or password has been changed since the software was installed.
6. If the name of the PC is made up of all numerical characters, when it needs to be alpha numeric.
12.9
When setting up channels in the Site/Parameter screen using the parameter templates, make sure that
if the units of the analyzer are not being used, that the field is left blank. Otherwise, the analyzer units
will be built to the logger over the basic units set for the parameter itself.
297
12.10
When getting a message that indicates the certain fields have not been filled in and are required even
though the fields are filled in, there are three things that can be done to clear the message. First close
and reopen the screen that is open. Try entering in and saving the settings again.
If the same message appears, then the second option is to restart the server by selecting Utilities and
Server Restart. Pick the Executive from the list and select Restart Executive Service button on the
Ribbon at the top. Try entering in and saving the settings again.
If the same message appears, then the third option is to close AirVision. Open Services from the
Administrative Tools in the Control Panel, and stop and restart the AirVision service. Once started back
up open AirVision again. Try entering in and saving the settings again.
12.11
When getting the information message ‘No Data was found for the specified criteria’, re-query the range
of data again for different time frame or smaller time frame. If the message appears again for a time
frame that there is definitely existing data, make sure only one site and parameter is selected in the list.
Refresh the screen by clicking the green paper clip beside of the save button on the quick access toolbar
at the top left, and re-query for the time frame that the data definitely exists.
12.12
SQL Express and 64 bit XP, Vista, and Windows 7 are not compatible.
12.13
SQL Express 2005 has a 4G file size limit, SQL Express 2008 has a 10G file size limit, and is not ample for
running a large size database for AV.
12.14
When using SQL Express the full pc name used in SQL Express has to be used when test the connection
to the database after the AV install for the database server.
298
12.15
When running the reports, if the outcome is that there is no data to be displayed it will simply give a
message that says no data available and won’t open the form of the report. If you re-run the report
where you know there is data but it is still giving the no data available message, this means the report
screen is not refreshing. Simply close the report query that is open and reselect it from the Reports
menu tree and re-enter in your query selection to run the report and it should open the report form
with the data displayed.
12.16
If you run a query selection for a time frame that is too large and causes the query an extended amount
of time to retrieve the selection, you can simply open another tab of the same menu item and reselect
the query for a smaller time frame then retrieve the selection.
12.17
The blank fields at the top of every column throughout the software are sorting columns, and are meant
to be typed in using the names in the column to sort by. The down arrow at the right end of the field is
not to be used. For instance, if the site name column was used to sort with the site name could be
typed in the field at the top of the column to sort by a specific site name so all of the other sites would
be removed from the list.
12.18
When querying a report for more than one parameter for a date range that you know has data, but the
report says there is no data to be found; one of the parameters chosen in the query doesn’t have data
for the date frame chosen. This will cause the parameters that do have data to not show one the report.
To narrow down which parameter doesn’t have data for the date range requested, run the report for
one parameter at a time. The Violation of Standards Report is one of the reports that acts in this
manner.
12.19
When deleting a setting from any of the configuration screens, be sure to click the save button after the
deletion before proceeding further to avoid receiving error messages.
299
12.20
When running the AIRNow report, it gives an error message that the agency code and/or the country
code is required or missing. These two codes are required for the report to run, and are located under
the System in the Site/Parameter screen.
12.21
When running the AIRNow report automatically, and the 23rd hour is missing; open the Configure Query
button on the task in the Scheduler and set the Lookback Days to 1.
12.22
If you change the POC on a parameter that has existing data, it will cause that data to no longer be
viewed in the editor and it will appear as if the data is not there. If you run the AQS report on this data
it will fill in the value column with ZZ because it can no longer see that data. You cannot import data
into the database in the date and time frame of that data because you cannot overwrite existing data,
even though you cannot see it and it appears to not be there.
The only way to change the POC on existing data is to create the AQS file with the existing POC, purge
the data out of the database, change the POC on the parameter setup, change the POC in the AQS file,
then import it back in with the AQS import. Any other historical data still existing in the database with
the old POC attached to it will no longer be accessible to be viewed by the software except to see that
data does exist and cannot be overwritten.
12.23
If you can link to the logger with the Server Connection box unchecked, but cannot link with the Server
Connection box checked can be caused by not being logged into the PC with an administrative login.
12.24
If the logger’s time changed to daylight savings the poll will be two hours behind on the data it collects.
If you want the poll to be only one hour behind, the sites in the Site/Parameter screen will need the
time zones changed to one time zone below the standard zone. For example, if the sites are in the
Eastern Time zone, the zone would need to be changed to Atlantic, but leave the time zone for the PC
set to Eastern. This will cause the poll to be only one hour behind and collect the most recent hour of
available data. Once the logger’s time goes back to standard time, set the sites time zone back to the
original time zone setting.
300
12.25
When direct polling an instrument with AirVision, and the data in the database is off by an hour, and it
does it on all instrument polled data; open the File Configuration Editor and find the template being
used to parse the instrument data. See if the box for Back Stamp Data Time is checked; if it is, uncheck
the box and save the settings. The next round of polled data should show the correct time.
12.26
Help and Support is a new menu option under the Main Navigation menu that has four sub-menu
options.
When Agilaire Support is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the Agilaire web site.
When AirVision Manual is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the AirVision
manual in pdf form. The pfd can be downloaded.
When Software Release Info is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the Agilaire
web site to the page where the Release Notes are listed for the latest version first, then some of the
previous versions on down the page.
When Video Tutorials is selected, it opens the default web browser and brings up the Agilaire web site
to the Video Training Resources page where a video for AVTrend is listed first, and individuals videos for
different sections of AirVision are listed next, and videos for the 8872 are listed last.
301
Chapter 13: Optional Modules
The optional modules are extra add-ons that are not part of the standard package. Some of the
modules are free and simply require a license key from Agilaire to activate them; the rest can be
purchased to be incorporated into the standard package.
NOTE: The free modules are listed first starting with Chapter 13.1. The purchased modules are listed
second starting with Chapter 13.6.
13.1 Math Editors
The Math Editors are used in conjunction with the Math Equation field in the Parameter Template and
Site/Parameter screens for a central channel calculation only. This add on feature is also discussed in
Chapter 4.4. If the equation is to be used as a global setting it can be set it in the Parameter Template,
but if it is going to be used on one parameter only, it can be set on the parameter setup in the
Site/Parameter screen. This setting is to be set after the equation has been configured. To setup math
equations or math constants, expand Math from the List Editors menu and single click Math Equation
Editor or Math Constants Editor. The Math Equation Editor tab or Math Constants Editor tab will open
on the right side of the screen. Each editor is described below.
13.1.1 Math Equations Editor
To add a new equation, select the Add Equation button on the Ribbon at the top. It will create a new
entry with an editing box.
To delete an equation, single click the blue square on the left side of the equation name to highlight the
row that you want to remove. Select the Delete Equation button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not
prompt you before simply deleting the current selection.
Equation Name - Type in a name to identify the equation.
Equation Description – Type in a description to help identify the function of the equation.
Math Equation – Type in the formula that is to be used to calculate the value of the selected parameter
in the Site/Parameter setup screen. Do not put an equals sign at the end of the formula as it will cause
the calculation when ran to give an error and not calculate the value.
302
If there are any flags that are to be ignored from the propagation can be selected by expanding the plus
sign beside of the equation row to open an ignore flags box. To setup a flag single click the blue square
on the left side of the row with the asterisks then click the down arrow at the right end of the field and
pick the flag from the drop down list.
To manually run the calculator, select Manual Parameter Calculator from the Utilities menu. The Math
Parameter Calculator tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection click
the Calculate Selected button on the Ribbon at the top. Use the Average Data Editor to evaluate the
calculated data.
13.1.2 Math Constants Editor
To add a new constant, select the Add Constant button on the Ribbon at the top. It will create a new
entry row with an editing box.
To delete a constant, single click the blue square on the left side of the constant name to highlight the
row that you want to remove. Select the Delete Constant button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not
prompt you before simply deleting the current selection.
Constant Name - Type in a name to identify the equation.
Constant Value – Type in the value the constant is to be set to.
Constant Description – Type in a description to help identify the function of the constant.
303
13.1.3 Math Parameter Calculator
To manually run the math equations or math constants, select Math Parameter Calculator from the
Utilities menu. To run all configured equations for a site, select the site tab and enter in the query, then
select the Calculate Selected button on the Ribbon at the top.
To run specific parameter calculations, select the Parameter Calculation tab and enter in the query,
then select the Calculate Selected button on the Ribbon at the top.
13.1.4 Task Scheduler
To run the math equations automatically, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down
list will open with a selection of jobs and tasks; select Calculate Math Parameters Task.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
304
When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task
Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the
Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.
Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.
Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you
want to handle running the task.
Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start
running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The
default is the current date and time that you create the task.
Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and
select how often the task is to run.
Task Details Section
General Tab
Basic Task Information section
Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list,
which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection
section at the top unless given a different name by the user.
Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the
scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.
Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.
This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled
Task Selection section at the top.
Calculation Options section
Site - Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list the
site the calculation is to be performed on. A separate task will have to be configured for
each site that a calculation is to be ran for.
Interval - Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the drop down list
the data type the calculation is to be performed on.
305
Advanced Tab
Retry Options section
Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number of time
you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the retries throughout
the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic
polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a
site that may not be communicating during the particular poll.
Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the
down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries should be.
Status Logging section
Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the
degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount of information
it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the level the larger the log
will become and the more hard drive space it will take up.
Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom,
and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.
Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the
drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed to users.
Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.
Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.
306
13.2 Calibration Adjust Tool
This add on feature is also discussed in Chapter 6.8.
Before the Cal Adjust Tool can function the level of the phase has to be set in the calibration setup in the
Data Source Details screen.
Level – Applies to those who have the Calibration Adjust Tool to identify the calibration levels,
such as zero, span, or precision, regardless of how they are named. This field is also used to
allow the Precision phase of a cal to be identified and reported on the AQS report when the Cal
Precision Data Records box is selected on the report query. Click the down arrow and select
from the dropdown list, ZERO, SPAN, PREC, 20%, 40%, 60%, or 80%. Level is also discussed in
the calibration setup in Chapter 4.6.4.
To open the adjustment tool, single click Calibration Adjust Tool from the Data Editors menu. The
Calibration Adjust Tool tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To see if a calibration needs to be adjusted, select the parameter and average interval affected by the
calibration and the date range the calibration ran, then select the Analyze button on the Ribbon at the
top.
The Adjust for Span button is deselected by default so the adjustment will only do a zero correction. If
you want the adjustment to do a span correction, then select the Adjust for Span button.
If the adjustment is to do a span correction as well the Adjust for Span button is selected. You may
optionally select the Sliding Scale button to have the slope factor linearly interpolated between each
calibration. For example: if the slope correction on the first calibration is 1.1 and the slope correction on
the second calibration is 1.05, then the hourly data at the midpoint would have a slope correction of
1.075, with the hour closest to the first calibration being 1.1 and the hour closest to the second
calibration being 1.05. This button is selected by default.
If the Apply Forward button is selected the calibration corrections are applied using the calibration
results going forward in time. If Apply Forward is deselected the corrections are applied going
backwards from each calibration. This button is selected by default.
Once the configuration of buttons has been chosen, select the Analyze button to view the data. If the
data is correct select the Apply button on the Ribbon at the top to make the changes. Any data such as
307
hourly, that is changed will be marked with the z flag to show the calibration was adjusted, and the
hourly data is locked from the calibration being adjusted a second time. If the data needs to be
returned to its original form, a batch edit can be performed in the Average Data Editor.
13.2.1 Task Scheduler
To run the cal adjust automatically, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list
will open with a selection of jobs and tasks; select Calibration Adjust Task.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task
Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the
Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.
Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.
Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you
want to handle running the task.
Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start
running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The
default is the current date and time that you create the task.
Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and
select how often the task is to run.
308
Task Details Section
General Tab
Basic Task Information section
Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list,
which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection
section at the top unless given a different name by the user.
Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the
scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.
Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.
This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled
Task Selection section at the top.
Calibration Adjust Options section
Interval to Adjust – Click the down arrow and select the type of data that is to be
adjusted.
Forward Adjust – If selected the calibration corrections are applied using the calibration
results going forward in time. If Forward Adjust is deselected the corrections are
applied going backwards from each calibration.
Span Adjust – If selected the span will be corrected in addition to the zero correction.
Sliding Adjust - If selected to have the slope factor linearly interpolated between each
calibration.
Advanced Tab
Retry Options section
Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number of time
you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the retries throughout
the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic
polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a
site that may not be communicating during the particular poll.
Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the
down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries should be.
309
Status Logging section
Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the
degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount of information
it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the level the larger the log
will become and the more hard drive space it will take up.
Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom,
and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.
Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the
drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed to users.
Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.
Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.
310
13.3 Data Average Tag Rollup Editor
The Average Tag Rollup Editor allows smaller data interval type be used to create a larger data interval
type, such as using minute data to create hourly data.
The setup screen is to select the type of data to roll up into a larger interval type, and select the site and
parameter that is to be affected by the roll up. To actually execute this action the roll up task has to be
scheduled in the scheduler.
To setup the rollup editor, single click Data Average Rollup Configuration from the Configuration Editors
menu. The Data Average Rollup Configuration tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To add a new rollup task, single click the asterisks in the blue square on the left side of the blank row.
Each field has a drop down arrow at the right end of the field. Click each down arrow to select from the
drop down lists in each field.
To delete an existing rollup task, single click the blue square on the left side of the task to highlight the
row you want to remove. Press the Delete key on the keyboard and it will prompt you to choose Yes to
delete or No to exit.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the File Import Configuration, select the disk icon
on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this
screen.
Rollup Method – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list
which method to use for rolling up the smaller data interval to the larger data interval. There are four
methods to choose from:
Minute to Hour – where the inputs are rounded, and the minute data has to have 75% valid.
5 Minute to Hour – where the inputs are rounded , and the 5 minute data has to have 75% valid.
Hour to Daily – where the inputs are rounded, and the hourly data has to have 75% valid.
Hourly to 8-Hour Rolling – where the inputs are rounded, and the hourly data has to have 75% valid.
Hourly to 8-Hour Rolling, Truncated – where the inputs are truncated, and the hourly data has to have
75% valid.
Hourly to 24-Hour Rolling – where the inputs are rounded, and the hourly data has to have 75% valid.
Input Tag – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list site,
parameter, and the interval type the data will be rolled up from.
Output Tag - Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list the
site, parameter and the interval type the data will be written to.
311
13.3.1 Task Scheduler
To add a new rollup task, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list will open
with a selection of jobs and tasks; select Average Rollup Task.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task
Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the
Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.
Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.
Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you
want to handle running the task.
Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start
running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The
default is the current date and time that you create the task.
Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and
select how often the task is to run.
Task Details Section
General Tab
Basic Task Information section
Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list,
which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection
section at the top unless given a different name by the user.
Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the
scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.
Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.
This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled
Task Selection section at the top.
312
Rollup Type – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down
list which Rollup method to run.
Tag - Select the asterisks in the blue square at the left end of the blank row. Click the drop
down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list the site, parameter,
and interval the data will be written to.
Advanced Tab
Retry Options section
Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number
of time you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the
retries throughout the software if set are added up and used as the total retries
when the automatic polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it
will take the poll to pass up a site that may not be communicating during the
particular poll.
Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and
click the down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries
should be.
Status Logging section
Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down
list the degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount
of information it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the
level the larger the log will become and the more hard drive space it will take
up.
Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom,
and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.
Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from
the drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed
to users.
Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.
Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.
313
13.3.2 Manual Average Data Rollup
To run a manual data rollup, single click Manual Average Data Rollup from the Utilities menu. The
Manual Average Data Rollup tab will open on the right side of the screen.
Rollup Type – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list which
method to use for rolling up the smaller data interval to the larger data interval.
Date Range – Enter in start and end date range of the data that is stored in the logger that you want to
retrieve. The default is the current days date and time when you open the manual poll screen.
Parameter Tag Selection - Select the asterisks in the blue square at the left end of the blank row. Click
the drop down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the drop down list the site, parameter,
and interval the data will be written to.
314
13.4 Sync
Sync allows AirVision to automatically sync with other AirVision pc’s or with AV-Trend pc’s in the field.
This synchronization capability provides the option to synchronize data and configuration tables.
Important: A broadband connection is required as dial up modems are too slow to support
synchronization. The AirVision Server pc must also have Microsoft Sync Framework loaded, however,
only the Synchronization Tools and the Database Providers need to be installed, which can be
downloaded from Microsoft’s web site. Be sure to install the proper version, either 32 bit or 64 bit, for
your version of SQL Server. The versions of AirVision and AV-Trend must be the same.
Important: For the site pc’s running AV-Trend; TCP/IP protocol must be enabled using the SQL
Configuration Tool, SQL Server must be configured to allow Remote Connections, the sa account must
be enabled under Security and the correct password must be set in the connection string, and the
firewall should allow ports 1433 and 1434 to be open on the AV-Trend pc, router and intervening
firewalls.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the sync editor, select the disk icon on the Quick
Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.
A TCP route will need to be created in the Server Configuration screen to the site pc. As a phone line and
modem cannot be used with the Sync module. Steps for setting up a TCP route can be found in Chapter
4 section 4.13.2.d.
13.4.1 Sync Connection Editor
To setup the connection editor, expand Sync from the Configuration Editors menu, and single click Sync
Connection Editor. The Sync Connection Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To add a new connection entry, single click the blue square at the bottom left with the asterisks and it
will highlight the row. The row has three fields that are to be completed at the bottom of the screen.
Once the settings are saved the connection entry will appear at the top.
Connection Properties section
Connection Name – Type in the field a name to describe the connection string.
Connection Type – Click the down arrow and select Sql Server Direct Connection.
Database Server – This is the name of the PC where SQL is installed.
Instance – This field will likely automatically fill in, but if not, it should be the type of SQL that is
installed; such as the example is SQLEXPRESS.
Database – This is the name of the database, which defaults to AVData unless it was changed
when the database was originally created.
315
Security section – The Database Server Name or IP Address field should be filled in with the name of the
remote server or the IP address where SQL is installed at the site. Uncheck the Windows Security box
and enter in the sa user name and password for SQL. Click the Test Connection button to see if the
database can be seen by the central.
13.4.2 Sync Contract Editor
To setup the contract editor, expand Sync from the Configuration Editors menu, and single click Sync
Contract Editor. The Sync Contract Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To add a new contract, select the New button on the Ribbon at the top. It will add a new row in the
Selected Sync Contract section at the top.
Selected Sync Editor section
Contract Name – Type in a name to describe the contract for the site.
Sync Direction – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the direction in which
the data will be traveling between the central and the site.
Sync Scope – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list if data or configuration
will be transferred. Download is transferring from the site to the central. Upload is transferring
from central to the site.
Remote Sync Connection – Click the down arrow and select from the list the needed connection
that was created in the Sync Connection Editor.
Reading Look Back Day Limit – Click in the field and type in the number of days for the sync
process to look back for data.
Most Recent Contract Modification – This field will automatically fill in with the current days
date and time once the entry has been saved.
316
Contract Needs Provisioning – This field will automatically fill in once the entry has been saved.
If the remote database gets replaced with a blank database, AirVision will not automatically
reprovision. A new provision will need to be performed as it was originally in order for it to
recreate the configuration and tables.
Site Restriction Filter section
Included Sites - Click the blue button at the bottom left with the asterisks and it will highlight
the field. At the right end of the field click the down arrow and select from the drop down list
which site the contract is for, then click in the white area of the section to the right, or press
Enter on the keyboard to propagate the entry up to the bottom of the list.
Average Interval Restriction Filter section
Included Average Intervals - Click the blue button at the bottom left with the asterisks and it
will highlight the field. At the right end of the field click the down arrow and select from the
drop down list the data interval type(s) that is to be transferred, then click in the white area of
the section to the left, or press Enter on the keyboard to propagate the entry up to the bottom
of the list.
13.4.3 Database Sync
To setup the database sync, expand Sync from the Utilities menu, and single click Database Sync. The
Database Sync tab will open on the right side of the screen.
Under the Selected Contract section, select the contract that is to be used. It will show in each column
the information that was created in the previous sync setup screens.
Select the Execute Contract Sync button on the Ribbon at the top, and it will process the information
then give the TimeStamp and Event Description under the Processing Information section.
317
13.4.4 Task Scheduler
To add a new rollup task, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list will open
with a selection of jobs and tasks; select Database Sync Task.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task
Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the
Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.
Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.
Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you
want to handle running the task.
Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start
running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The
default is the current date and time that you create the task.
Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and
select how often the task is to run.
Task Details Section
General Tab
Basic Task Information section
318
Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list,
which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection
section at the top unless given a different name by the user.
Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the
scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.
Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.
This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled
Task Selection section at the top.
Sync Contract – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the sync contract that
is to be scheduled to run.
Advanced Tab
Retry Options section
Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number
of time you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the
retries throughout the software if set are added up and used as the total retries
when the automatic polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it
will take the poll to pass up a site that may not be communicating during the
particular poll.
Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and
click the down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries
should be.
Status Logging section
Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down
list the degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount
of information it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the
level the larger the log will become and the more hard drive space it will take
up.
Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom,
and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.
Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from
the drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed
to users.
Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.
Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.
319
13.4.5 Sync Configuration Wizard
To setup the Sync using the wizard, expand Sync from the Configuration Editors menu, and single click
Sync Configuration Wizard. The wizard will open in a new window, click Next to continue.
Select the Remote Node for the remote PC that the sync is being configured to talk to.
320
Select Create a new Sync Connection is this is the first connection to be created.
The Database Server Name or IP Address field should be filled in with the name of the remote server or
the IP address where SQL is installed at the site. Once this is done it will fill the name in the Connection
Name field at the bottom. Uncheck the Windows Security box and enter in the sa user name and
password for SQL. Click the Test Connection button to see if the database can be seen by the wizard. If
it has a successful connection click Next to continue.
The Sync Contract Names will automatically fill in with the Name that was provided in the previous
screen, but can be changed in these two fields if needed. Click Next to continue.
321
In the Site Restruction Filter section select all sites or specific sites. In the Interval Restriction Filter
select all data interval types or specific intervals. Click Next to contine.
Click Next to continue setting up and saving the connection.
322
If you choose to launch the Sync Database screen, check the box at the bottom of the Completing the
wizard screen and click Finish.
323
13.5 Status Displays
13.5.1 Realtime Data Trending
To setup the realtime graph, single click Realtime Data Trending from the Status Displays menu. The
Realtime Data Trending tab will open on the right side of the screen.
Select from the query the Site and Parameter, the Average Interval data type, and the Number of Hours
for the graph to look back to retrieve data. Use Dynamic Scaling and Suppress Reading Flag colors can
be selected if needed to change the graphs scale or to keep the data as one color on the graph.
The data can be retrieved by selecting the Manual Refresh button on the Ribbon at the top, or as long
as the trending screen remains open the Auto Refresh button can be selected and the software will
automatically update the graph after the poll runs.
The graph is shown on the left side of the screen while the same data is also shown in column form on
the right side of the screen.
Select the Open Selection in Data Editor button on the Ribbon at the top to bring this same data
selection up in the Average Data Editor.
324
The graph or chart can be show separate by selecting or deselecting the Show Grid and Show Chart
buttons on the Ribbon at the top.
13.5.2 Realtime Tabular Display
To setup the realtime display, single click Realtime Tabular Dispaly from the Status Displays menu. The
Realtime Tabular Display tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To add a new display, select the Select Display Elements button on the Ribbon at the top. It will open
the Realtime Element Selection Wizard. Click Next to continue to the next screen.
Select the Site(s), Parameter(s), and Time Interval data type(s) that is to be displayed and click Next.
325
Select the Site(s) and Parameter(s) for the instantaneous data that is to be displayed and click Next.
If a digital input line(s) is to also be displayed that may be triggering the parameter select the digital
input by checking the box beside of the specific digital input and click Next.
326
The Refresh Interval defaults to 30 seconds but can be changed. The appearance for the Default
Element Style defaults to Deep File but can be changed by clicking the down arrow on the right side of
the field and selecting from the drop down list one of the other element options. It will show in the
Example box below the field selection what the element choice looks like. Click Next.
When all selection choices have been made click Finish to complete the setup of the display.
327
The display(s) will open with the selections that have been created.
Select the Save Current Layout button on the Ribbon at the top to save the display so that it can be
opened again at a later time if the display gets closed.
To open a previously created display, select the Load Display Layout button on the Ribbon at the top.
328
13.6 File Import Configuration
The File Import Configuration works in conjunction with the File Import Tool, which is an optional added
feature that has to be purchased in addition to the AirVision software to get these two features.
To setup the import configuration, single click File Import Configuration from the Configuration Editors
menu. The File Import Configuration tab will open on the right side of the screen. As import templates
are added they will appear in the Template Name column on the left of the setup screen.
To add a new template, select the Add Template button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields
in each section on the right side of the screen, which are described below.
To open an existing template, single click on the template name listed in the Template Name column to
bring up the template settings.
To delete an existing template, single click the template name in the Template Name column you want
to remove. Select the Delete Template button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make
sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the template is immediately removed from
the list.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the File Import Configuration, select the disk icon
on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this
screen.
File Schema section
Template Name – Enter in the name that you want this template to be referred to. This is the
name that will show in the Template Name column on the left.
File Layout section
Number of Header Rows – Use the radio buttons to select the number of header rows that will
be at the top of the file you are importing. This is the number of rows at the top of the file the
import tool should ignore as not being data.
Number of Footer Rows – Use the radio buttons to select the number of footer rows that will be
at the bottom of the file you are importing. This is the number of rows at the bottom of the file
the import tool should ignore as not being data.
Minimum Number of Columns – By default this field is blank. Use the radio buttons to select
the number of columns that will be in the file you are importing. If this field is set, incoming
lines with fewer columns are skipped and a warning is logged. Incoming lines with at least that
number of columns will be attempted.
Field Delimiter – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list what delimiter is used
to separate the data in the file.
329
Sample Type – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the type that applies to
where the file is being retrieved from. Standard is usually the most common type used. If
SampleIdKey is selected, the rest of the fields have to be setup as such: Match Parameters From
Row, Overwrite Existing Data, Particulate Sample, and the Data field column set to Sample
Identifier.
Back Stamp Data Time - Click to check the box if the data is to be backed up by one interval.
Example: If the file gives hourly data as 01:00 it will back it up to 00:00.
Parameter Information section
Parameter Matching – Select either Match the Parameter by Column Number, Match
Parameters from Row, or Match Parameters from Header.
Overwrite Existing Data – Click to check the box if you want to overwrite the existing data. If
the box is not checked the import will skip data points where data already exists in the
database.
Parameter Data Type – Click the dot beside of the type of data that you are importing. Most
data formats will be Average (Continuous), unless it is 24 hour data or particulate matter.
Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the type of data from the drop down list.
Example – 001h would be for hourly data.
File Column Mapping section – To setup the mapping for the columns of the file you are
importing click the Add Column Mapping button. This will turn on columns to be filled in.
Depending on what you enter in the first two columns will depend if the last two columns are
required.
Column Number – Fill in this column with the column number where the option chosen
in the Data Field will be located. Example: if the Date/Time is located in the second
column in the data file, then a 2 would be put in the Column Number field.
Data Field - Click the down arrow and select the drop down list what represents the
column number you entered in the first field. The options are AQS Method Code, AQS
Null Code, Date, Date/Time, Flags, Qualifier Code, Time, and Value.
Parameter Template – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which
parameter template represents the type of data you are importing.
Parse Format – Depending on which option you selected in the second field will depend
on what the parse format is. For example, if you selected Date in the second field the
parse format would give option to choose from as to the format of the date in the file
you are importing. The Parse Format is available when Date, Date /Time, or Time is
selected for the Data Type. Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list
which format represents the Data Type you selected for the file you are importing.
330
Flag Map - This option is only available when Flags is selected for the Data Type. Click
the down arrow and select from the drop down list which flag represents the parameter
you selected for the file you are importing.
331
13.7 File Import Tool
The File Import Tool works in conjunction with the File Import Configuration, which is an optional added
feature that has to be purchased in addition to the AirVision software to get these two features. A file
must have a template created for it in the File Import Configuration editor before it can be imported
with the Import Tool.
To run the Import Tool, single click File Import Tool from the Utilities menu. The File Import Tool tab will
open on the right side of the screen.
General section
Template – Click the down arrow and select a template that was created in the import
configuration, from the drop down list.
Site – Click the down arrow and select the site from the drop down list that the data is to be
imported into.
Select File – Click the Browse button at the end of the field. This will open a Select File box
where you can change directories and select the file that you are wanting to import.
Import File button – Once you have selected the file you want to import, click the Import File
button. The results of the import will be displayed in the field below the button.
Cancel button – To import another file click the Cancel button at the bottom to clear the fields
to allow you to make a new selection.
332
13.8 Instrument Polling Setup
13.8.1 Server Configuration Screen
To setup the server configuration, single click Server Configuration from the Configuration Editors menu.
The Server Configuration tab will open on the right side of the screen. This tab has a tree menu that
expands the System’s Executive (the pc name) and the communication routes once they have been
created.
Setting up the Executive
Single click the executive under the System in the tree menu and select Configure Executive button on
the Ribbon at the top. The New Executive Options box will open with all of the selections checked;
clicked the OK button.
Executive tab
General tab
Executive Information section
Executive Name – The default is the pc’s name.
Executive Description – The default is Executive on the pc listed in the Executive Name
field, unless it is a new entry then this field will be blank.
Network Address – The default is the pc’s name.
Network Protocol – The default is TCP and should remain at the default. The other
option is HTTP and is a place holder in the software for possible future development.
Port – This port is what the client software uses to communicate with the server
software whether they are both installed on the same pc or on separate pcs. The
default is 9885 and although the field allows you to change the port number it needs to
remain at the default setting in order for the client and server to communicate.
333
Select the Service Components tab and make sure the Plugin entry File Import Service is enabled and
auto start is enabled. Select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the
settings before exiting this screen.
Setting up a TCP Route
To add a TCP connection, single click the Executive under the System in the tree menu and select the
Add TCP Route button on the Ribbon at the top. The TCP tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To open an existing TCP route, expand the Executive and Comm Routes, and double-click on the TCP
route you want to open on the right side of the screen.
To delete an existing TCP route, expand the Executive and Comm Routes, and single click the TCP route
you want to delete, then select the Delete button on the Ribbon at the top. It will prompt you by asking
if you are sure you want to delete the current selection. Select Ok to continue deleting the TCP route or
select Cancel to stop the deletion and retain the TCP route.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Server Configuration, select the disk icon on
the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
TCP tab
TCP Connection Details section
Route Name – Enter in the name you want to give the route name.
Enabled – Check the box to enable the TCP connection for use.
Network Address – Enter in the required IP address.
334
Polling port – The default is 9881, and is required by the logger as it is part of the loggers code.
Although the field allows you to change the port number, it needs to remain at the default
setting in order for the logger to communicate with the automatic or manual polling.
Emulation Port - The default is 9887, and is required by the logger as it is part of the loggers
code. Although the field allows you to change the port number, it needs to remain at the
default setting in order for the logger to communicate through the link to logger function.
Read Timeout – The timeout used when trying to read the response before it deems the
response empty and gives up. If the field is left blank it defaults to 60 seconds.
Recommendation is to leave the field blank.
Write Timeout – The amount of time to allow for sending (writing) data to the device. If the
field is left blank it defaults to 60 seconds. Recommendation is to leave the field blank.
Disconnect After – The amount of time that should pass before disconnecting in the event that
the communication connection has timed out.
Setting up Import Service
The Import service works in conjunction with the direct polling of an instrument, which is an optional
module that does not come with the standard software package and has to be purchased in addition to
the standard software package.
To add an import service, double click Import Service on the left in the tree menu. The Import Service
tab will open on the right side of the screen. Then select the Source Mapping button at the bottom and
it will put a blank row on the right side of the screen with blank fields that are explained below.
To open the existing import service, expand the Executive and Service Configuration, and double-click on
the import service. The Import Service tab will open on the right side of the screen. Select the row you
want to make changes to by clicking in the blue box on the left side of the row to highlight it.
Import Service
Import Service tab
Folder Root (leave null for default): - This is the root folder the import service watches. Any
source mappings with relative folder paths will be rooted here. By default it is empty, which
335
means it will use the default of C:\AVServerData\DataFiles. Each mapping entry maps a source
to a file import template, and specifies which folder and what types of files to watch for. If the
folder path is empty, then the service looks under the <RootFolder>\<SourceName> folder for
files. If the folder path is an absolute path (e.g. C:\test\data), then the root folder doesn't affect
it. If the folder path is a relative path (e.g. test\data), then the service looks under
<RootFolder>\test\data for the files.
Source – The source or device the import is coming from.
Import Template – The format of the file being imported.
Filename Pattern – The filename pattern can be *.*, or something more specific like *.rsp, or
even more specific than that, like "SITE1LABDATA*.csv", etc . Leaving the field blank is the same
as typing in *.*. This is the same as using the command prompt and doing a "dir for a type of
file.
Folder Path – This field should remain blank unless you are polling data straight from an
instrument and running into errors. Have the data dropped into a folder and configure the
source mapping to have the import to look in that folder so it can import the data.
13.8.2 Data Source Details Screen
To add a new instrument, open Data source Details and single click the Site name in the tree menu, then
select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top, and select Instrument. A new Instrument tab will open
on the right side of the screen.
To open an existing instrument, expand the System and Site, and double-click the instrument name to
open the Instrument Name tab.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Data Source Details, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
Source tab
Source Information section
Site – Defaults to the name of the site the instrument is being created for and is grayed
out to indicate that it cannot be changed.
336
Source Name – Enter in a name that identifies the instrument.
Enabled – Click to check the box if this instrument is to be used.
Description – Enter in a description for the instrument or for what it is used for. This is
not a required field and can be left blank.
Retry Attempts – The number of times communication will be attempted in the case of
communication issues. The default is 3.
Instrument Details section
Instrument Type – Click the down arrow and select an instrument name from the drop
down list.
Instrument Identifier – Enter in the identifier number for the instrument.
Instrument Password – Enter in the password for the instrument if it requires one for
communication.
Communication tab
Communication Routes
Create New Route button – Click the Create New Route button to add the route. This
will open a new screen where you select the server by clicking the down arrow and
selecting the Executive name from the list. Select if the connection will be made by TCP,
Modem, or serial (which is considered direct connection). Click the OK button to save
the settings.
Route – Shows the communication option and executive name that was chosen when
the route was created.
Priority – If you only have one communication route the priority should be set to 1. If
you have more than one communication route setup for a site, then the priority has to
be set in order of which route is to be used first to communicate with the site.
Polling – Check this box if the communication route selected is to poll the site. If you
have only one route to communicate with the site then this box will need to be checked.
337
Emulation – Check this box if the communication route selected is to be able to link to
logger. If you have only one route to communicate with the site then this box will need
to be checked.
Init Command – This field is only used for sites with T switch or switch boxes. If a switch
box is used at a site that needs a command to know how to set the switches, enter in
the command that is to be used. The command will be sent
after the modem opens the connection.
Final Command – This field is only used to sites with T switch or switch boxes.
Enter in the command that is needed to tell the switch the string is finished.
The command will be sent before the connection disconnects.
13.8.3 Flag Mapping Editor
To setup the flag mapping, single click Flag Mapping Editor from the Configuration Editors menu. The
Flag Mapping Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To add a new flag, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put a blank row at the bottom
of the list.
To view an existing flag, single click the flag name listed in the Flag Map Name column and it will show
the settings in the bottom portion of the screen.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Flag Mapping Editor, select the disk icon on
the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
Flag Mappings section
Flag Map Name column – Type in the name chosen for the flag.
Mapping Type - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the type of mapping.
Choose from Binary, DecBinary, Hex, and String.
Description – Type in the reference that describes the use of the flag.
Flags section
Incoming Bit Number – Type in the number of bits if any, type in 0 if none.
338
Map to Reading Flag – Click the down arrow and select the flag from the drop down list.
Inhibit Flag – Check this box if this flag is to be an inhibitor.
Test Absence Of Flag – Check this box if the absence of the flag is to be tested.
Annotation Text – Type in an annotation if one is needed as a description.
13.8.4 File Import Configuration Screen
To setup the import configuration, single click File Import Configuration from the Configuration Editors
menu. The File Import Configuration tab on the right side of the screen. As import templates are added
they will appear in the Template Name column on the left of the setup screen.
To add a new template, select the Add Template button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields
in each section on the right side of the screen, which are described below.
To open an existing template, single click the template name listed in the Template Name column to
open the template settings.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the File Import Configuration, select the disk icon
on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this
screen.
File Schema section
Template Name – Enter in the name that you want this template to be referred to. This is the
name that will show in the Template Name column on the left.
File Layout section
Number of Header Rows – Use the radio buttons to select the number of header rows that will
be at the top of the file you are importing. This is the number of rows at the top of the file the
import tool should ignore as not being data.
339
Number of Footer Rows – Use the radio buttons to select the number of footer rows that will be
at the bottom of the file you are importing. This is the number of rows at the bottom of the file
the import tool should ignore as not being data.
Maximum Number of Columns – Use the radio buttons to select the number of columns that
will be in the file you are importing.
Field Delimiter – Click the down arrow and select comma or pipe delimited from the drop down
list.
Sample Type – Click the down arrow and always select standard from the drop down list.
Parameter Information section
Parameter Matching – Select either Match the Parameter by Column Number or Match
Parameters from Header.
Overwrite existing data – Click to check the box if you want to overwrite the existing data. If
the box is not checked the import will skip data points where data already exists in the
database.
Parameter Data Type – Click the dot beside of the type of data that you are importing. Most
data formats will be Average (Continuous), unless it is 24 hour data or particulate matter.
Average Interval – Click the down arrow and select the type of data from the drop down list.
Example – 001h would be for hourly data.
File Column Mapping section – To setup the mapping for the columns of the file you are
importing click the Add Column Mapping button. This will turn on columns to be filled in.
Depending on what you enter in the first two columns will depend if the last two columns are
required.
Column Number – Enter in the number of the column where the import is to start
reading in the file from.
Data Type - Click the down arrow and select the drop down list what represents the
column number you entered in the first field. The options are Date, Date and Time,
Floating Point, and Time.
Parameter Template – This option is only available when Floating Point is selected for
the Data Type. Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which
parameter template represents the type of data you are importing.
Parse Format – Depending on which option you selected in the second field will depend
on what the parse format is. For example, if you selected Date in the second field the
parse format would give option to choose from as to the format of the date in the file
you are importing. The Parse Format is available when Date, Date and Time, or Time is
340
selected for the Data Type. Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list
which format represents the Data Type you selected for the file you are importing.
13.8.5 File Import Tool
The File Import Tool works in conjunction with the File Import Configuration, which is an optional added
feature that has to be purchased in addition to the AirVision software to get these two features. A file
must have a template created for it in the File Import Configuration editor before it can be imported
with the Import Tool.
To run the Import Tool, single click File Import Tool from the Utilities menu. The File Import Tool tab will
open on the right side of the screen.
General section
Template – Click the down arrow and select a template that was created in the import
configuration, from the drop down list.
Site – Click the down arrow and select the site from the drop down list that the data is to be
imported into.
Select File – Click the Browse button at the end of the field. This will open a Select File box
where you can change directories and select the file that you are wanting to import.
Import File button – Once you have selected the file you want to import, click the Import File
button. The results of the import will be displayed in the field below the button.
Cancel button – To import another file click the Cancel button at the bottom to clear the fields
to allow you to make a new selection.
341
13.8.6 Task Scheduler
To add a new Instrument Poll Task, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list
will open with a selection of jobs and tasks; select Instrument Poll Task.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task
Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the
Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.
Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.
Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you
want to handle running the task.
Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start
running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The
default is the current date and time that you create the task.
Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and
select how often the task is to run.
Task Details Section
General Tab
Basic Task Information section
Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list,
which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection
section at the top unless given a different name by the user.
342
Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the
scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.
Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.
This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled
Task Selection section at the top.
Instrument Polling Options
Instrument - Click the drop down arrow at the right end of the field and select from the
drop down list the instrument that is to be polled.
Instrument Poll Type - Click the drop down arrow at the right end of the field and
select from the drop down list the data average interval that is to be collected.
File Import Template: (Overrides Default for Command) - Click the drop down arrow at
the right end of the field and select from the drop down list the instrument driver that is
to be used for the particular instrument.
Advanced Tab
Retry Options section
Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number of time
you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the retries throughout
the software if set are added up and used as the total retries when the automatic
polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it will take the poll to pass up a
site that may not be communicating during the particular poll.
Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the
down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries should be.
Status Logging section
Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the
degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount of information
it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the level the larger the log
will become and the more hard drive space it will take up.
Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom,
and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.
Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from the
drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed to users.
Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.
343
Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.
13.8.7 Manual Instrument Poll
To run a manual instrument poll, single click Manual Instrument Poll from the Utilities menu. The
Manual Instrument Poll tab will open on the right side of the screen. Each section allows you to select
what data you want to retrieve.
Site and Source Name – Select the site and source that you want to poll from by clicking the blue square
to the left side of the name to highlight the row.
Poll Type – Select the type of data you want to retrieve. To select more than one type hold down the
Control key while clicking on the poll types needing to be polled.
Date Range – Enter in start and end date range of the data that is stored in the instrument that you
want to retrieve. The default is the current days date and time when you open the manual poll screen.
To manual poll the selected types from the instrument, select the Start Manual Poll button on the
Ribbon at the top.
To abort the manual poll before it has finished retrieving the data, select the Cancel button on the
Ribbon at the top.
The Show Log Viewer and Scroll With Messages buttons are selected by default so the log will appear
at the bottom of the screen to show the results of the download. If you do not want to view the log you
can deselect the buttons on the Ribbon at the top.
To clear the results sent back from the instrument from the screen, select the Clear Results button on
the Ribbon at the top.
Time Initiated – The time the poll started to contact the instrument.
Device – The logger or instrument the poll is connected to.
Type – The type of data the poll is asking for.
Item Information – This shows the command string being sent and received.
344
Status - Shows the result sent back from the instrument, if it was good, successful, or failed with errors.
345
13.9 PARS
The Precision and Accuracy tests are ran outside of the software. The information from those tests have
to be hand entered into the PARS editor by the user. The Precision and Accuracy data records can also
be selected to be outputted on the AQS XML report.
To open the precision editor, expand PARS from the Data Editors menu, and single click Precision Test
Editor. The Precision Test Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To open the accuracy editor, expand PARS from the Data Editors menu, and single click Accuracy Test
Editor. The Accuracy Test Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To add new test information to either editor, select the New Test button on the Ribbon at the top. It
will put blank fields in each section on the right side of the screen, which are described below.
To open an existing test in either editor, single click the blue square on the left side of the site and
parameter to highlight the row listed in the Parameter column in the Test Selection section. As you
select a site and parameter the fields in the other four sections will change to reveal the settings for that
parameter.
To delete an existing test from either editor, single click the blue square on the left side of the site and
parameter to highlight the row listed in the Parameter column in the Test Selection section that you
want to remove. Select the Delete Test button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make
sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the template is immediately removed from
the list.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the PARS Editors, select the disk icon on the Quick
Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.
13.9.1 Precision Test Editor
A precision test is a phase in a calibration for the air flow. Entering test information into the editor
starts with the Precision Test Information section.
Precision Test Information section
Precision Check Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop
down a calendar.
Precision Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that was
performed.
Precision Sample Identifier and Precision Type Identifier – These two fields are meant to be
comment fields.
346
Audit Agency Code – Enter in the audit code that has been assigned to your agency.
Enable AQS Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be included on the AQS XML report.
Monitor Information section
Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a parameter drop down a list of parameters and
their information.
Duration Code - Click the down arrow and select the length of the test from the drop down list.
Actual Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor.
Parameter Type, Unit Code, POC, State Code, County/Tribal Code, and Site Code – If the
parameter that you selected in the above parameter field, has been setup in the Parameter
Template Editor, all of these fields will be automatically filled in as they are propagated over
from the parameter’s template.
Once those fields are filled in the Precision Test Selection fields will automatically be filled in.
Collocated Monitor section
Parameter - Click down arrow and select a parameter from the drop down list.
POC – If the parameter you selected has been setup in the Parameter Template Editor this field
will be automatically filled in as it is propagated from the parameter’s template.
Indicated Method Code – Enter in the method code of a comparison monitor.
Test Results section
Actual Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.
Indicated Value – Enter in the value that you were expecting to get from the test.
347
13.9.2 Accuracy Test Editor
Accuracy Test Information section
Accuracy Date – Click the down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down
a calendar.
Accuracy Audit Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that was
performed.
Accuracy Type - Click the down arrow and select the type of accuracy test that was ran from the
drop down list.
Local Primary Standard - Click the down arrow and select which standard applies to the test
that was ran from the drop down list.
Local Standard Expiration Date - Click down arrow and select the date the standard expires
from the drop down calendar.
Audit Sample Identifier - This field is meant to be a comment field.
Audit Scheduled Date - Click down arrow and select the audit date from the drop down
calendar.
Audit Class - Click the down arrow and select the audit class from the drop down list.
Audit Type - Click the down arrow and select the audit type from the drop down list.
Enable AQS Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be included on the AQS XML report.
348
Monitor Information section
All of the fields under the Monitor Information section are setup in the same manner as the fields under
the Monitor Information section for the Precision Test.
Once those fields are filled in the Accuracy Test Selection fields will be automatically filled in
Test Results section
Actual Value and Indicated Value – These fields are setup in the same manner as the fields for
the Precision Test.
Zero Span Value - Enter in the needed value.
349
13.10 PARS Reports
13.10.1 Accuracy Report
To run the accuracy report, expand PARS Reports from the Reports menu, and single click Accuracy
Report. The Accuracy Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query
selection to run the report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring
up the report below the query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information
that has been manually entered into the Accuracy Test Editor in a report format. Each site and
parameter is shown separately per page. Examples of the reports are shown below.
350
13.10.2 Precision Report
To run the precision report, expand the PARS Reports from the Reports menu, and single click Precision
Report. The Precision Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query
selection to run the report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring
up the report below the query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information
that has been manually entered into the Precision Test Editor in a report format. Each site and
parameter is shown separately per page. Examples of the reports are shown below.
351
13.11 Monitor Assessment
The Monitor Assessment tests are ran outside of the software. The information from those tests have
to be hand entered into the Monitor Assessment editor by the user. The Monitor Assessment data
records can also be selected to be outputted on the AQS 3.0 XML report.
To open each assessment editor, expand Monitor Assessment from the Data Editors menu, and single
click the editor’s name. The editor’s tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To add new test information to each editor, select the Add Assessment button on the Ribbon at the top.
It will put blank fields in each section on the right side of the screen, which are described below.
To open an existing test in each editor, single click the blue square on the left side of the site and
parameter to highlight the row listed in the Parameter column in the Test Selection section. As you
select a site and parameter, the fields in the other three sections will change to reveal the settings for
that parameter.
To delete an existing test from each editor, single click the blue square on the left side of the site and
parameter to highlight the row listed in the Parameter column in the Test Selection section that you
want to remove. Select the Delete Assessment button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you
to make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the template is immediately
removed from the list.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the editors, select the disk icon on the Quick
Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new settings before exiting this screen.
13.11.1 Annual Performance Evaluation
Assessment Details section
Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a
calendar.
Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that
was performed.
Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down
List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the
Site/Parameter screen.
Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.
Monitor Information section
Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down
a list.
352
Monitor Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill
when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a
list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
Recorded Values section
Monitor Concentration – Enter in the value(s) that was the result of the test.
Assessment Concentration – Enter in the value(s) that was the result of the test.
353
13.11.2 Duplicate Assessment Details
Assessment Details section
Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a
calendar.
Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that
was performed.
Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down
List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the
Site/Parameter screen.
Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.
Monitor Information section
Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down
a list.
Monitor Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill
when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a
list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
Recorded Values section - Enter in the value(s) that was the result of the test.
354
13.11.3 Field Proficiency Test Details
Assessment Details section
Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a
calendar.
Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that
was performed.
Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down
List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the
Site/Parameter screen.
Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.
Monitor Information section
Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down
a list.
Monitor Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill
when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a
list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
Recorded Values section
Monitor Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.
Assessment Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.
355
13.11.4 Flow Rate Coarse Details
Assessment Details section
Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a
calendar.
Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that
was performed.
Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down
List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the
Site/Parameter screen.
Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.
PM10 Monitor Information section
PM10 Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a
list.
PM10 Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when
the Monitor Parameter is selected.
Flow Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a
list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
PM2.5 Monitor Information section
PM2.5 Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a
list.
PM2.5 Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when
the Monitor Parameter is selected.
Assessment Results section
Monitor Flow Rate – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.
Assessment Flow Rate – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.
356
357
13.11.5 Flow Rate Verification Details
Assessment Details section
Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a
calendar.
Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that
was performed.
Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down
List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the
Site/Parameter screen.
Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.
Monitor Information section
Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down
a list.
AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a
list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
Recorded Values section
Monitor Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.
Assessment Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.
358
13.11.6 National Performance Audit
Assessment Details section
Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a
calendar.
Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that
was performed.
Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down
List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the
Site/Parameter screen.
Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.
NPAP Assessment Details section
NPAP Assessment Type – Click the down arrow and select BOA (Back of the Analyzer ) or TTP
(Through the Sampling Inlet or Probe ) from the drop down list.
NPAP Method Code – Enter in the method code of the NPAP.
Monitor Information section
Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down
a list.
Monitor Method Code - Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill
when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a
list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
Recorded Values section
Monitor Concentration – Enter in the value(s) that was the result of the test.
Assessment Concentration – Enter in the value(s) that was the result of the test.
359
360
13.11.7 One Point Quality Control
Assessment Details section
Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a
calendar.
Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that
was performed.
Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down
List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the
Site/Parameter screen.
Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.
Monitor Information section
Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down
a list.
Monitor Method Code - Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill
when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a
list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
Recorded Values section
Monitor Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.
Assessment Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.
361
13.11.8 Performance Evaluation Program Details
Assessment Details section
Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a
calendar.
Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that
was performed.
Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down
List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the
Site/Parameter screen.
Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.
Monitor Information section
Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down
a list.
Monitor Method Code - Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill
when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a
list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
Performance Evaluation section
Sampler Type – Click the down arrow and select Independent or Collocated from the drop down
list.
Sampler Concentration – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.
362
363
13.11.9 Replicate Assessment Details
Assessment Details section
Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a
calendar.
Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that
was performed.
Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down
List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the
Site/Parameter screen.
Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.
Monitor Information section
Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down
a list.
Monitor Method Code - Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill
when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a
list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
Recorded Values section - Enter in the value that was the result of the test.
364
13.11.10 Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Coarse Details
Assessment Details section
Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a
calendar.
Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that
was performed.
Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down
List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the
Site/Parameter screen.
Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.
PM10 Monitor Information section
PM10 Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a
list.
PM10 Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when
the Monitor Parameter is selected.
Flow Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a
list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
PM2.5 Monitor Information section
PM2.5 Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a
list.
PM2.5 Method Code – Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill when
the Monitor Parameter is selected.
Assessment Results section
Monitor Flow Rate – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.
Assessment Flow Rate – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.
365
366
13.11.11 Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Details
Assessment Details section
Assessment Date - Click down arrow and select the date the test was ran from the drop down a
calendar.
Assessment Identifier Number – Use the radio buttons to enter in the number of the test that
was performed.
Performing Agency – Click the down arrow and select the proper agency from the drop down
List, but it should auto-fill is the agency code has been entered in under the System in the
Site/Parameter screen.
Exclude From Reporting – Check the box if the record is to be excluded on the AQS XML report.
Monitor Information section
Monitor Parameter - Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down
a list.
Monitor Method Code - Enter in the method code of the main monitor, but should auto-fill
when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
AQS Unit Code – Click the down arrow and select a site and parameter from the drop down a
list, but should auto-fill when the Monitor Parameter is selected.
Recorded Values section
Monitor Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.
Assessment Value – Enter in the value that was the result of the test.
367
13.12 Monitor Assessment Reports
13.12.1 Annual Performance Evaluation Report
To run the annual performance evaluation report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the
Reports menu, and single click the Annual Performance Evaluation Report. The Annual Performance
Evaluation Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run
the report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report
below the query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been
manually entered into the Annual Performance Evaluation Monitor Assessment Editor in a report
format. Each parameter for all sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown
below.
368
13.12.2 Duplicate Assessment Report
To run the duplicate assessment report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports menu,
and single click the Duplicate Assessment Report. The Duplicate Assessment Report tab will open on the
right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the Generate Report
button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output
section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into the Duplicate
Assessment Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each parameter for all sites is shown
separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.
369
13.12.3 Field Proficiency Test Details Report
To run the field proficiency test report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports menu,
and single click the Field Proficiency Test Details Report. The Field Proficiency Test Details Report tab
will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the
Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the
Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into
the Field Proficiency Test Details Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each parameter for all
sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.
370
13.12.4 Flow Rate Coarse Details Report
To run the flow rate coarse report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports menu, and
single click the Flow Rate Coarse Details Report. The Flow Rate Coarse Details Report tab will open on
the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the Generate
Report button on the Ribbon above the Main Navigation menu. This will bring up the report below the
query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually
entered into the Flow Rate Coarse Details Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each site is
shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.
371
13.12.5 Flow Rate Verification Details Report
To run the flow rate verification report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports menu,
and single click Flow Rate Verification Details Report. The Flow Rate Verification Details Report tab will
open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the
Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the
Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into
the Flow Rate Verification Details Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each parameter for all
sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.
372
13.12.6 National Performance Audit Report
To run the national performance audit report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports
menu, and single click the National Performance Audit Report. The National Performance Audit Report
tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select
the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in
the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered
into the National Performance Audit Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each parameter for
all sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.
373
13.12.7 One Point Quality Control Report
To run the one point quality control report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports
menu, and single click the One Point Quality Control Report. The One Point Quality Control Report tab
will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the
Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the
Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into
the One Point Quality Control Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each parameter for all
sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.
374
13.12.8 Performance Evaluation Program Details Report
To run the performance evaluation program report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the
Reports menu, and single click the Performance Evaluation Program Details Report. The Performance
Evaluation Program Details Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query
selection to run the report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring
up the report below the query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information
that has been manually entered into the Performance Evaluation Program Details Monitor Assessment
Editor in a report format. Each parameter for all sites is shown separately per page. Example of the
report is shown below.
375
13.12.9 Replicate Assessment Details Report
To run the replication assessment report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports menu,
and single click the Replicate Assessment Details Report. The Replicate Assessment Details Report tab
will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to run the report, select the
Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report below the query in the
Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been manually entered into
the Replicate Assessment Details Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each parameter for all
sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.
376
13.12.10 Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Coarse Details Report
To run the semi annual flow rate audit coarse report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the
Reports menu, and single click the Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Coarse Details Report and the Semi
Annual Flow Rate Audit Coarse Details Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making
the query selection to run the report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This
will bring up the report below the query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the
information that has been manually entered into the Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Coarse Details
Monitor Assessment Editor in a report format. Each site is shown separately per page. Example of the
report is shown below.
377
13.12.11 Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Details Report
To run the semi annual flow rate audit report, expand Monitor Assessment Reports from the Reports
menu, and single click the Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Details Report. The Semi Annual Flow Rate
Audit Details Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. After making the query selection to
run the report, select the Generate Report button on the Ribbon at the top. This will bring up the report
below the query in the Report Output section. The report simply displays the information that has been
manually entered into the Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit Details Assessment Editor in a report format.
Each parameter for all sites is shown separately per page. Example of the report is shown below.
378
13.13 Asset Tracking
The Asset Tracking Tool provides an easy way to create history records for analyzers, samplers, and data
loggers; and allows the user to create an asset entity by defining the manufacturer, model number,
serial number, etc. The asset can then be associated with a particular logger, directly polled instrument
(which are typically a PM sampler or non-Agilaire data logger), or a measured parameter.
To run the Asset Tracking Tool, single click Asset Tracking under the Data Editors menu. The Asset
Tracking tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To add a new Asset Tracker, select the Add Asset button on the Ribbon at the top. It will bring up a
blank Add New Asset screen where you can select Logger, which can be an 8816, 8832, or 8872;
Instrument, which is a directly polled instrument by the software that is licensed by Agilaire,such as a
BAM, TEOM, API, or third party logger; Analyzer, which is associated with the Site/Parameter, usually
through a logger; or Unspecified, which is another asset that can only be associated with a site.
Once the asset is created, it defaults to a purchase date of the current day, but that and other properties
(manufacturer, model, serial number, etc) can be edited by selecting the Asset on the left and editing
the Asset Details on the right. To change the Associated With, select the asset under the Assets list on
the left and select the Assign Asset button on the Ribbon at the top. It will open the Assign Asset screen
for the user to select a different association. The current date will be defaulted to represent the new
assignment Start date, and the End date of the previous assignment record, but these can be changed, if
needed, in the editor after creating the new association.
379
To delete an existing asset, single click the name in the Asset Name column under Rule List that you
want to remove. Select the Delete Asset button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to
make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the asset is immediately removed
from the list.
380
13.14 Asset Reports
13.14.1 Asset Current Status Report
To run the Asset Current Status Report, expand Asset Reports under the Reports menu, and single click
Asset Current Status Report. The Asset Current Status Report tab will open on the right side of the
screen. The report will automatically show the current status of all assets entered into the Asset
Tracking editor, as there are no query selections to choose from.
381
13.14.2 Asset History Report
To run the Asset History Report, expand Asset Reports under the Reports menu, and single click Asset
History Report. The Asset History Report tab will open on the right side of the screen. The report will
automatically show the history of an asset as it passed through different sites, as there are no query
selections to choose from.
13.14.3 Parameter Asset History
To run the Parameter Asset History, expand Asset Reports under the Reports menu, and single click
Parameter Asset History. The Parameter Asset History tab will open on the right side of the screen.
This shows the history of assets associated with a particular site's logger, instrument and parameter
records.
382
13.15 ADVP Editor
Automatic Data Validation Processor allows the designation of an unlimited number of logical rules to
be applied to the data, and as a result of those rules, data can be flagged, graded, annotated, coded,
and/or have an e-mail generated to designated users.
The ADVP’s purpose is to automate the traditionally manual validation process by allowing the user to
define simple or complex logical rules, and what to do when the data falls outside of those rule
definitions.
Each ADVP rule consists of two main components: a trigger, and a resultant action. If the conditions of
the trigger are met for a given data point, the action is taken. If not, nothing happens, and the next rule
is evaluated.
A trigger consist of a number of conditions linked by logical combination (AND, OR).
To setup the ADVP editor, single click the ADVP Editor from the Configuration Editors menu. The ADVP
Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To setup a new rule, select the New Rule button on the Ribbon at the top. It will put blank fields in each
section on the right side of the screen, which are described below. As rules are added they will appear
in the Rule Name column on the left of the setup screen.
To delete an existing rule, single click the rule name in the Rule Name column under Rule List that you
want to remove. Select the Delete Rule button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to
make sure you want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the rule is immediately removed from
the list.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the ADVP Editor, select the disk icon on the Quick
Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
Rule Information section
Rule Details section
Rule Name –Enter in the name you want to call the rule, then save it to create the base
rule so that you can then enter in the logic of the rule and it will be able to save properly
because it is link to the base rule that you have already saved. This is a required field.
Enabled – Click the box to put in a check mark to enable the rule to run if assigned in the
task scheduler to run.
Description – Enter text describing the rule or the purpose of the rule, but is not
required.
Average Interval field – Select the type of data from the drop down selection that you
want the rule to be ran against. This is a required field.
383
Max Lookback Intervals – Use the radio buttons or click and type in the field the time
out per number of intervals to set the number of attempts, and if it fails all attempts it
will time out.
After setting up this section select the disk icon on the Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to
save and create the base rule.
Actions section
Site – Click the down arrows and select the site name from the drop down list if the
condition is to be site specific.
Parameter Template – Click the down arrow and select the parameter template from
the drop down list that the condition is to be set for.
Apply Null Code – Click the down arrow and select the null code that properly identifies
the data from the drop down list if one is needed for the condition.
Clear Null Code – Click the down arrow and select the null code that you want cleared
from the data from the drop down list if one needs to be cleared for the condition.
Add Annotation Test – Enter in any additional information pertaining to the data that
needs to be noted. This field is not required.
Assign Value – Enter in a value that you want the data to be overwritten with if the
condition set holds true. For example if the condition gives a negative number you can
have it replaced with the fixed value of zero.
Assign Data Grade – Use the radio buttons to increase or decrease the value. A data
grade is the level of confidence that you have in the data being good.
Apply Flag – Click the down arrow and select the flag that is to be applied to the data in
a condition from the drop down list.
Clear Flag – Click the down arrow and select the flag that you want cleared from the
data in a condition from the drop down list.
Subject – Enter in a subject for the email if sending an email.
384
Tag Email Urgent – Click the put a check mark in the box to enable the urgent tag to be
placed on the email.
Email Message – The message you would like attached to the email.
Conditions Triggering Rule section – The trigger is the” IF” side of the rule.
Condition List section
Condition Number – This shows which condition is to be ran first. They do appear in
chronological order. To delete a condition number, highlight the row by clicking the
blue box on the left end of the row and press the delete key on the keyboard. It will pop
up a message asking if you are sure you want to delete. Click Yes to delete the entry or
click No to keep the entry.
Logical Operator to Next – Click the down arrow and select between the options of AND
and OR, or it can be left blank to indicate there is only one condition.
Add Condition button – When this button is clicked it automatically inserts a new entry
row in the Condition List.
Delete Condition button - When this button is clicked it automatically delete the entry
row that is selected in the Condition List.
Condition Details section
Condition Number – Use the radio buttons or click and type in the number of the
condition being configured.
385
Comparison Type section –When each subsection changes its options it causes other
fields to change, fields to be added, or fields to be taken away depending on the
selection made from each of the drop down lists.
Characteristic – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list which
characteristic to look at the data that best fits the condition. This is a required
field. The characteristic options are Annotation Text, Flag, Value, and Variance.
Relationship – Click the down arrow and select from the drop down list the
relationship of the condition being configured. This is a required field. The
relationship options will change depending on which characteristic is chosen.
When Annotation Text characteristic or the Flag characteristic is chosen the
relationship options are Contains and Doesn’t Contain.
When Variance characteristic is chosen the relationship options are Equal To, Greater
Than, and Less Than.
When Value characteristic is chosen the relationship options are Differs >, Differs <,
Equal To, Greater Than, and Less Than. If Differs > or Differs < is chosen it will bring up
a Percent field.
Percent – Use the radio button or click and type in the percent that the Differs
great than or less than is to use.
Compare section – The site and parameter lists will remain the same no matter what
the characteristic and relationship fields are set to.
Site – Click the down arrow and select the site from the drop down list is if it is
being compared to another site, or multiple parameters being compared at a
particular site.
Parameter Template – Click the down arrow and select the parameter from the
drop down list that is to be compared. This is a required field.
386
To section – Depending on what the characteristic has been set to will depend on the
subsection that is brought up in the To section.
When Annotation Text is selected for the Characteristic, and either Contains or Doesn’t
Contain is selected for the Relationship under the Comparison Type section, the To
section changes to Annotation Comparison Type.
Annotation Text – Type in the text that is to be attached to the comparison
condition.
When Flag is selected for the Characteristic and either Contains or Doesn’t Contain is
selected for Relationship under the Comparison Type section, the To section changes to
Flag Comparison Type.
Flag – Click the down arrow and select the flag from the drop down list that
applies to the comparison condition.
When Variance is selected for the Characteristic, and either Equal To, Greater Than, or
Less Than is selected for the Relationship under the Comparison Type section, the To
section changes to Variance Comparison Type.
Percentage – Use the radio buttons or click and type in the percentage that is to
be used in the comparison condition.
387
When Value is selected for the Characteristic, and either Differs >, Differs <, Equal To,
Greater Than or Less Than is selected for the Relationship under the Comparison Type
section, the To section changes to Value Comparison Type.
Fixed Value – When this option is selected it turns on the Fixed Value field.
Fixed Value field – Enter in a set value that you want used in the
comparison condition.
Historical Average – Does not bring up any additional fields, but instead uses
historical values.
Historical Composite – When this option is selected it turns the Historical
Composite Years and +/- Days fields.
Historical Composite Years field – Use the radio buttons or click and
type in the number of years of historical data that is to be used in the
comparison condition.
+/- Days field – Use the radio buttons or click and type in the number of
days that will be plus or minus of the number of years set for the
Historical Composite Years.
Parameter Value – When this option is selected it turns the Parameter
Template and Site fields.
388
Parameter Template – Click the down arrow and select a parameter
from the drop down list that is to be used in the comparison condition.
[Site] field – Click the down arrow and select the site from the drop
down list if the comparison condition is site specific.
Relation to Next Condition – When setting up a multi-condition rule click the down
arrow and select AND or OR from the drop down list, or the field can be left blank if it is
a single condition.
13.15.1 Task Scheduler
To add a new ADVP task, select the Add button on the Ribbon at the top. A drop down list will open
with a selection of jobs and tasks; select ADVP Processing Task.
After putting in new entries or making any changes in the Task Scheduler, select the disk icon on the
Quick Access Toolbar at the very top to save the new or changed settings before exiting this screen.
When adding a new task it will put a new row at the bottom of the list at the top in the Scheduled Task
Selection section. As you fill in the needed information in the Task Schedule Details section and the
Task Details section, the fields will fill in on the new row in the Scheduled Task Selection section.
Task Schedule Details Section works the same for all tasks that are scheduled.
Executive – Click the down arrow and select the executive from the drop down list that you
want to handle running the task.
Start Time – Use the radio buttons or type in the date and time you want the task to start
running, or click the down arrow and click the date on the calendar then set the time. The
default is the current date and time that you create the task.
Repeat Interval – Use the radio buttons or type in the number and click the down arrow and
select how often the task is to run.
389
Task Details Section
General Tab
Basic Task Information section
Task Name – This field defaults to the name of the task that you selected from the list,
which is what will show in the Task Name column in the Scheduled Task Selection
section at the top unless given a different name by the user.
Task Enabled – Click to put a check mark in the box to enable this task to run in the
scheduler, and will show in the Task Enabled column at the top.
Task Description – Enter in a short description of how you want to refer to this task.
This description will be what shows in the Task Description column in the Scheduled
Task Selection section at the top.
ADVP Processing Options section
ADVP Rule to Process – Click the down arrow at the right end of the field and select
from the drop down list which ADVP rule to run.
Advanced Tab
Retry Options section
Number of Retries - Defaults to 0. Use the radio buttons or type in the number
of time you want the poll to try again upon getting errors. NOTE: All of the
retries throughout the software if set are added up and used as the total retries
when the automatic polling runs. The higher the retries are set to the longer it
will take the poll to pass up a site that may not be communicating during the
particular poll.
Interval Between Retries - Use the radio buttons or type in the number and
click the down arrow and select how often the time to wait between the retries
should be.
Status Logging section
Log Status Messages as: - Click the down arrow and select from the drop down
list the degree of message logging desired. Each option increases in the amount
of information it provides about the task as it runs. Keep in mind the higher the
level the larger the log will become and the more hard drive space it will take
up.
390
Notifications section – To add a notification click the Add… Notification button at the bottom
and it will put a new line entry under Notification Type.
Notification Type – Click the down arrow at the end of the field and select from
the drop down list the type of notification that is best for this task to be emailed
to users.
Enabled – Click the box to put in a check to enable the notification.
Notification Description – Defines the notification type that has been selected.
391
13.16 Work Item Editor
The editor simply allows a user to enter in work items.
To run the Work Item Editor, single click Work Item Editor under the Data Editors menu. The Work Item
Editor tab will open on the right side of the screen.
To add new item, select the Add Work Item button on the Ribbon at the top. It will bring up a blank
entry on the right where three of the fields are required to be filled in, in order to save the task.
To delete an existing item, single click the name in the Task Name column that you want to remove.
Select the Delete Work Item button on the Ribbon at the top. It will not prompt you to make sure you
want to delete. Once the delete button is selected the task is immediately removed from the list.
Task Definition tab
Task name – Type the name of the task. This field is required.
Task Description – Type in a description of the purpose of the task.
Enabled – Check this box if the work item is to be used.
Notification Enabled – Check this box if the person this item is assigned to is to get a notification. The
notification will not be configured in the Notification Subscriptions screen, but rather the check box for
Work Item will be checked under the User’s security setup.
Due Date – When the task is due.
Assigned To – Click the down arrow and select a user from the drop down list. This field is required.
Site – Click the down arrow and select the site name from the drop down list.
Asset – If there is an Asset that is to associated with this item, click the down arrow and select the Asset
from the drop down list.
Priority – Click the down arrow and select Low, Medium, or High priority from the drop down list. This
field is required.
Category – Click the down arrow and select the category that best fits the task, from the drop down list.
392
Repeat tab can be set to repeat at the desired interval, and the days of the week can also be selected or
deselected.
Activity Tab will only show entries once a task has been completed in the Work Items menu.
393
13.17 Work Items
This menu duplicates the information found in the Work Item Editor, and simply allows a user to view
work items and mark them as complete.
To run the Work Items, single click Work Items under the Data Editors menu. The Work Items tab will
open on the right side of the screen.
This screen loads automatically when opened or refreshed with the paperclip button. It may take the
screen a few minutes to load, and will continue to show the progress wheel while in progress.
To complete a task, single click the task in the Task Name list, and select the Complete button on the
Ribbon at the top. It will open another Work Item Completion window that contains the same Work
Item Definition information as the Work Items screen.
In the Entry Details section is where the completion date is entered along with a memo if needed.
394
Chapter 14: SQL Server
Agilaire strongly recommends running a backup of the database frequently. Running a backup daily
would be the first choice, but if this is not possible, running a backup weekly would be the second
choice.
14.1 Installing SQL Server 2008 R2
To install SQL Server browse the cd and find and double click the Setup.exe file that has the green
square with white arrow icon.
Select New installation or add features to an existing installation.
395
It will start to install the Support Rules. When the rules have finished, the number of Failed, Warning,
and Skipped should be zero. Click OK.
Enter in the Product Key that came with the software and click Next.
Accept the licensing terms and click Next.
396
Click Install to setup the Support Files.
When the Support Files have finished, the number of Failed, Warning, and Skipped should be zero.
Depending on the security setup on the pc there could be warnings on .Net and the Fire Wall. If any
failed, click the Re-run button to see if it can correct the problem. Then Click Next.
Not all SQL features are needed. Select All Features with Defaults and click Next to bring up the features
list.
397
The two features that are not needed and can be deselected are Analysis Services and Reporting
Services. All other features are required. Click Next.
When the Installation Rules have finished, the number of Failed, Warning, and Skipped should be zero.
If any failed, click the Re-run button to see if it can correct the problem. Then Click Next.
Select Default Instance and the Instance ID and Instance root directory, and click Next.
398
If the hard drive space is sufficient click Next.
Accept the defaults on the Server Configuration and click Next.
For the Database Engine Configuration select Windows authentication mode and click Next.
399
Click Next on Error Reporting.
When the Installation Configuration Rules have finished, the number of Failed, Warning, and Skipped
should be zero. If any failed, click the Re-run button to see if it can correct the problem. Then Click
Next.
Click Next on Ready to Install.
400
When the Installation Progress has finished click Next.
If the process completes successfully click Close.
401
14.2 Backing up the Database in SQL 2008 R2
Before backing up the database the AirVison service under Services must be stopped. Once the service
has stopped the backup process can be done.
Open SQL Server Management Studio and connect to the SQL instance installed on that pc. Click the
plus sign to expand Databases. Right click on the AVData database and select Tasks then Back Up. This
will open a screen titled Back Up Database – AVData. Under the Select a page section on the left side of
the screen select General.
Under Source on the right side of the screen the Database field should be defaulted to AVData. The
Recovery model field should be grayed out, but defaulted to SIMPLE.
Note: If it is not set to simple; cancel the backup process and right click on the AVData database | select
Properties | click Options once in the list at the top left | on the right click the down arrow in the
Recovery model field and select Simple |click the OK button at the bottom of the screen to save. Start
the backup process over by starting at the beginning of these instructions.
The Backup type field should be defaulted to full. All three of these fields need to remain using their
default settings.
Under the Backup set section on the right side of the screen the Name field defaults to AVData-Full
Database Backup. The Description field is not required to be filled in. The Backup set will expire field
should be defaulted to After and the field for days defaulted to zero. All three of these fields need to
remain using their default settings.
Under the Destination section the Back up to field defaults to Disk and needs to remain using the default
setting. Click the Remove button to remove the defaulted path that is listed in the white area. Click the
Add button to bring up a Select Backup Destination window.
402
Destinations on disk field defaults to File name and needs to remain with the File name setting selected.
Click the ellipses button at the right end of the File Name field to bring up a Locate Database Files –
(computer name) window.
This will open a Locate Database Files screen where it defaults to the SQL Backup folder with a default
file called AVData.bak. Select AVData.bak in the tree and it will appear in the File name field at the
bottom. If the backup files are going to remain in the Backup folder , it is recommended to insert the
date of when the backup is ran to the name of the file each time a backup is ran, and this will keep the
file from being overwritten any time a backup is ran. For example the file name would look like
AVData03012011.bak. The Selected path field will remain grayed out. The Files of type field defaults to
Backup Files(*.bak,; *.trn) and needs to remain using the default setting. The File name field has to have
the extension of .bak on the file name in order for it to be a valid backup file. If the extension is not part
of the file name the file will be save without an extension and will be unusable. After entering in the file
name click OK and this will bring you back to the Select Backup Destination window where the File name
field now shows the path and file name that was just set up. Click Ok to accept this file name.
403
Click the OK button on the Back Up Database screen, on the bottom left the Progress section will show
Executing with the percentage.
Once the backup is finished it will give a message stating “The backup of database “AVData’ completed
successfully. Click Ok and the window will close. Close the SQL Server Management Studio.
404
14.3 Restoring the Database in SQL 2008 R2
Before restoring the AVData database from the backup file the AirVision service under Services must be
stopped. Once the service has stopped the restoring process can be done.
The AVData database must already exist in order for the backup to have a place to restore to. If the
AVData database does not already exist in SQL it will need to be created. To create a blank database in
SQL Server open SQL Server Management Studio | right click on Databases and select New Database |
under the General page selection, on the right side of the screen in the Database name field type in
AVData | Click OK at the bottom |Close the SQL Management Studio when the process has finished.
AVData should now be showing under Databases on the left in the tree, if it is not, right click on
Databases and select Refresh from the pop up menu. Once AVData is showing under Databases right
click on the AVData database and select Tasks | Restore |Database. This will open a screen titled
Restore Database – AVData. Under the Select a page section on the left side of the screen select
General.
Under Destination for restore on the right side of the screen the To database field should be defaulted
to AVData. The To a point in time field should be grayed out, but defaulted to Most recent possible.
Both of these fields need to remain using their default settings.
Under the Source for restore section on the right side of the screen the From database field should be
grayed out, but defaulted to AVData. This field needs to remain using its default setting. The From
device field needs to be selected but it will remain grayed out with a blank field. Click the ellipses
button at the right end of the field to open the Specify Backup window.
405
The Backup media field should say File. The Backup location should be blank. Click the Add button to
bring up the Locate Backup File window.
Open the location C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\Backup where the backup
file is stored. Select the AVData.bak file so that it is highlighted and the file name appears in the File
name field at the bottom of the window and click the OK button to select the file.
This will put the path to the backup file in the Backup location field on the Specify Backup screen. Click
the OK button to return back to the Restore Database – AVData screen.
406
The Select the backup sets to restore field now has two backup entries listed. Under the Restore
column check the box beside of AVData full Database Backup.
Under the Select a page section on the left side of the screen select Options. Under Restore options on
the right side of the screen, check the first option to Overwrite the existing database. Under Restore the
database files as will have the AVData and the AVData_log entries listed. Under Recovery state select
the first option to RESTORE WITH RECOVERY. Click the OK button to begin the restoring process. On the
bottom left the Progress section will show Executing with the percentage.
Once the restore is finished it will give a message stating “The restore of database “AVData’ completed
successfully. Click Ok and the window will close. Close the SQL Server Management Studio.
Once the restore has completed and the SQL Server Management Studio has been closed, the AirVision
Server service under Services will need to be started again before logging into AirVision.
407
Download PDF